Manual Mitsubishi Pajero Ioana

PAJERO
OWNER’ S MANUAL
PAJERO - ENGLISH - OBKE12E1
Table of contents
Overview
General information
Locking and unlocking 1
Seat and seat belts 2
Instruments and controls 3
Starting and driving 4
For pleasant driving 5
For emergencies 6
Vehicle care 7
Maintenance 8
Specifications 9
OBKE12E1
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

E00100106021
1. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for driver's seat) p. 2-33

LHD Horn switch p. 3-43
2. Instruments p. 3-02
1 2 3 3. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-35
4. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 3-37
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 3-41
5. Cruise control switch* p. 4-45
19 6. Ignition switch p. 4-12
4 7. Active Stability Control switch p. 4-41
8. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 03
9. Steering control switch (for Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)* p. 5-68
18 10. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-08
11. Bonnet release lever p. 8-03
12. Fuse block lid p. 8-19
13. Sonar cancel switch* p. 4-49
14. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 3-33
5 15. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirror switch p. 4-10
17
16. Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-36
Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-36
6 17. Audio switch* p. 5-57
16 18. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-31
Turn-signal lever p. 3-35
Headlamp washer switch* p. 3-41
7 19. Daytime dipper button (meter illumination control) p. 3-06
15
8
14 11
9
13 10
12
OBKE12E1
Overview
1. Daytime dipper button (meter illumination control) p. 3-06

RHD 2. Instruments p. 3-02
3. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for driver's seat) p. 2-33
Horn switch p. 3-43
1 2 3 4. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 3-37
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 3-41
5. Cruise control switch* p. 4-45
6. Ignition switch p. 4-12
7. Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-36
19 4 Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-36
8. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirror switch p. 4-10
9. Fuse block lid p. 8-19
10. Bonnet release lever p. 8-03
18 5 11. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-08
12. Steering control switch (for Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)* p. 5-68
13. Fuel tank filler door release lever p. 03
14. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 3-33
6
15. Sonar cancel switch* p. 4-49
16. Active stability control switch p. 4-41
17 7 17. Audio switch* p. 5-57
18. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-31
Turn-signal lever p. 3-35
16 Headlamp washer switch* p. 3-41
19. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-35
15 8
10
14 11
13 9
12
OBKE12E1
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Instrument panel)

E00100104779
1. Audio* p. 5-12, 5-26

LHD MITSUBISHI Multi Communication System*
Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
tem owner’s manual”
3 2. Centre information display* p. 3-11
4 3. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-36
1 4. Centre ventilators p. 5-02
22 5 5. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front passenger's
2 seat) p. 2-33
6 6. Side ventilators p. 5-02
21
7. Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 5-56
Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-56
USB input terminal* p. 5-82
20 7 8. Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-36
9. Glove box p. 5-92
19
8 10. Cigarette lighter* p. 5-86
Accessory socket* p. 5-86
18 11. Heated seat switch* p. 2-08
9 12. Rear differential lock switch* p. 4-29
17
13. Transfer shift lever p. 4-24
12 14. Cup holder (for front seats) p. 5-94
13
15. Floor ventilators* p. 5-02
10 16. Rear air conditioning* p. 5-10
16
17. Armrest (for front seats) p. 2-08
14 Centre console box p. 5-92
Accessory socket p. 5-86
15 11
18. Parking brake lever p. 4-06
19. Gearshift lever p. 4-16
Selector lever p. 4-19
20. Centre accessory box* p. 5-93
21. Rear window demister switch p. 3-42
22. Front automatic air conditioning p. 5-03
OBKE12E1
Overview
1. Centre information display* p. 3-11

RHD 2. Audio* p. 5-12, 5-26
MITSUBISHI Multi Communication System*
Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
22 tem owner’s manual”
2 3. Front automatic air conditioning p. 5-03
21 4. Rear window demister switch p. 3-42
1 5. Centre accessory box* p. 5-93
20 3
6. Gearshift lever p. 4-16
19 Selector lever p. 4-19
7. Parking brake lever p. 4-06
4 8. Armrest (for front seats) p. 2-08
Centre console box p. 5-92
18 5 Accessory socket p. 5-86
9. Rear air conditioning* p. 5-10
6 10. Floor ventilators* p. 5-02
11. Cup holder (for front seats) p. 5-94
17
7 12. Transfer shift lever p. 4-24
13. Cigarette lighter* p. 5-86
16
Accessory socket* p. 5-86
8 14. Heated seat switch* p. 2-08
15 15. Rear differential lock switch* p. 4-29
12 16. Glove box p. 5-92
13 17. Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-36
18. Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 5-56
Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-56
11 9
USB input terminal* p. 5-82
19. Side ventilators p. 5-02
14 10 20. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front passenger's
seat) p. 2-33
21. Centre ventilators p. 5-02
22. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-36
OBKE12E1
Overview
Interior
E00100204116
1. Electric window control p. 1-15

LHD 2. Electric window lock switch p. 1-15
3. Central door lock switch p. 1-07
4. Sunroof switch* p. 1-17
Type 1 Type 2 5. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-94
2 6. Sunroof switch* p. 1-17
1 5 6 7. Ceiling lamp p. 5-87
8. Room & map lamp p. 5-88, 8-24, 8-29
3 Interior lamp switch p. 5-88
4 9. Sun visors p. 5-84
10. Vanity mirror p. 5-84
23 11. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-08
7 12. Video Entertainment System*
8
Refer to the separate “Video Entertainment System owner’s man-
22 ual”
21 9 13. Seat p. 2-02
10 14. Supplemental restraint system - side airbag (for front
20 seats)* p. 2-33
15. Armrest (for rear/second seat) p. 2-10
11
Cup holder (for rear/second seat) p. 5-94
16. Head restraints p. 2-11
19 17. Cup holder (for third seat)* p. 5-95
12
18. Luggage floor box p. 5-93
19. Seat belts p. 2-20
Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 2-21
13 20. Luggage compartment lamp p. 5-89, 8-24, 8-30
18
14 21. Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag* p. 2-33
22. Roof ventilators (5-door models)* p. 5-02
17 23. Rear personal lamps p. 5-89, 8-24, 8-29
15
16
OBKE12E1
Overview

2. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-94
4. Ceiling lamp p. 5-87
5. Room & map lamp p. 5-88, 8-24, 8-29
Interior lamp switch p. 5-88
6. Electric window lock switch p. 1-15
7. Central door lock switch p. 1-07
Type 1 Type 2 9. Rear personal lamps p. 5-89, 8-24, 8-29
10. Roof ventilators (5-door models)* p. 5-02
11. Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag* p. 2-33
12. Luggage compartment lamp p. 5-89, 8-24, 8-30
13. Seat belts p. 2-20
Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 2-21
14. Luggage floor box p. 5-93
15. Cup holder (for third seat)* p. 5-95
16. Head restraints p. 2-11
17. Armrest (for rear/second seat) p. 2-10
Cup holder (for rear/second seat) p. 5-94
18. Supplemental restraint system - side airbag (for front
seats)* p. 2-33
19. Seat p. 2-02
20. Video Entertainment System*
Refer to the separate “Video Entertainment System owner’s man-
ual”
21. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-08
22. Vanity mirror p. 5-84
23. Sun visors p. 5-84
OBKE12E1
Overview
Luggage area
E00100401351
1. Accessory socket p. 5-86

2. Rear shelf* p. 5-95
3. Jack p. 6-07
Jack handle p. 6-07
Tool p. 6-07
4. Luggage hooks p. 5-97
5. Securing bands of warning triangle p. 5-98
3-door models
6. Securing bolts of spare wheel garnish p. 6-10
7. Rear window washer fluid container p. 8-08
2
8. Accessory socket p. 5-86
3 9. Luggage hooks p. 5-97
10. Tool p. 6-07
1
11. Jack handle p. 6-07
5
12. Jack p. 6-07
13. Luggage hooks p. 5-97
14. Side box* p. 5-93
4 15. Cargo area cover* p. 5-96
5-door models
8
15
7
6
14
9
13 11
12 10
OBKE12E1
Overview
Outside (Front)
E00100504832
1. Engine compartment p. 9-15

Bonnet p. 8-03
2. Windscreen wiper and washer p. 3-37
3. Rain sensor* p. 3-38
4. Sunroof* p. 1-17
6. Rear side/quarter window p. 1-17
Antenna p. 5-66
7. Locking and unlocking p. 1-06
Keyless entry system* p. 1-04
8. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 4-10
Approach lamps* p. 1-08
9. Side turn-signal lamps* p. 3-35
10. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-35, 8-24, 8-26
11. Position lamps p. 3-31, 8-24, 8-26
12. Headlamps p. 3-31, 8-24, 8-25
13. Front fog lamps* p. 3-36, 8-24, 8-26
14. Headlamp washer* p. 3-41
OBKE12E1
Overview
Outside (Rear)
E00100503239
1. Rear fog lamp p. 3-36, 8-24, 8-28

2. Rear turn-signal lamps* p. 3-35, 8-24, 8-27
3. Tail lamps* p. 3-31, 8-24, 8-27
8 4. Licence plate lamps p. 3-31, 8-24, 8-28
9 5. Spare wheel garnish p. 6-09
6. Rear-view camera* p. 4-52
10 7. Spare wheel p. 6-09
7
8. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-24, 8-28
9. Rear window wiper and washer p. 3-41
6
10. Backdoor p. 1-09
11. Fuel tank filler p. 03
12. Tyre inflation pressure p. 8-13
Changing tyres p. 6-09
5 Tyre rotation p. 8-14
11
Tyre chains p. 8-15
4 13. Corner and back sensor* p. 4-49
14. Rear turn-signal lamps* p. 3-35, 8-24, 8-27
15. Stop and tail lamps* p. 3-31, 8-24, 8-27
12 Stop lamps* p. 8-24, 8-27
3 16. Reversing lamps p. 8-24, 8-27
13 17. Rear turn-signal lamps* p. 3-35, 8-24, 8-27
18. Reversing lamps p. 8-24, 8-27
2 3-door models 5-door models 19. Stop and tail lamps* p. 3-31, 8-24, 8-27
14 17 Stop lamps* p. 8-24, 8-27
15 18
1
16 19
OBKE12E1
General information
Fuel selection...................................................................................02
Filling the fuel tank..........................................................................03
Installation of accessories................................................................04
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems................05
Genuine parts...................................................................................05
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal infor-
mation..........................................................................................06
Disposal information for used batteries...........................................06
OBKE12E1
General information
Fuel selection CAUTION l In petrol-powered vehicles, repeatedly driv-

ing short distances at low speeds can cause
E00200102587
deposits to form in the fuel system and en-
Petrol-powered vehicles l For diesel-powered vehicles, if proper
gine, resulting in poor starting and poor accel-
“winter” fuel is not used in winter, the die-
Unleaded petrol octane num- sel preheat indication lamp may blink eration.
ber (EN228) and the engine speed may not rise above If these problems occur, you are advised to
90 RON or higher (3000 the idling speed because of fuel freezing. add a detergent additive to the gasoline when
models) In this case, keep the engine idling for you refuel the vehicle. The additive will re-
95 RON or higher (3800 about ten minutes, then turn off the igni- move the deposits, thereby returning the en-
models) tion switch and immediately turn it on gine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a
again to confirm that the diesel preheat in- genuine MITSUBISHI FUEL SYSTEM
Recom- CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive
Diesel-powered vehicles dication lamp is off. (Refer to “Diesel pre-
mended could make the engine malfunction.
Vehicles to comply with the Euro 4 heat indication lamp” on page 3-08)
fuel For details, please contact a MITSUBISHI
and Euro 5 regulation
Cetane number (EN590) MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
51 or higher NOTE l Poor quality petrol can cause problems such
l It is advisable to sufficiently warm up the en- as difficult starting, stalling, engine noise
gine after starting it when the outside temper- and hesitation. If you experience these prob-
Vehicles to comply with the Euro 3
ature is below zero °C. lems, try another brand and/or grade of petrol.
regulation
l Due to the separation of paraffin, the fluidity If the check engine warning lamp flashes,
Cetane number
of the fuel decreases considerably as the tem- have the system checked as soon as possible
45 or higher
perature falls. Because of this fact there are at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
two kinds of fuel: “summer” and “winter”. Service Point.
This must be considered in winter use. l In diesel-powered vehicles, poor-quality die-
CAUTION Select either of the two kinds of fuel in ac- sel fuel can cause deposits form in the injec-
cordance with ambient temperature. tor, resulting in black smoke and rough idling.
l For petrol-powered vehicles, the use of lea- If these problems occur, you are advised to
ded fuel can result in serious damage to Above -5 °C: “Summer” diesel
the engine and catalytic converter. Do not Below -5 °C: “Winter” diesel add a cleaning additive to the diesel fuel
use leaded fuel. When travelling abroad, find out in advance when you refuel the vehicle. The additive
about the fuels served in local service stations. will break up and remove the deposits, there-
l Diesel-powered vehicles to comply with
by returning the engine to a normal condition.
the Euro 4 and Euro 5 regulation are de- l Petrol-powered vehicles have the knock con-
signed to use only diesel fuel that meets trol system so that you can use unleaded pet- Be sure to use a genuine MITSUBISHI DIE-
the EN 590 standard. rol 91 RON as an emergent measure in case SEL FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an
Use of any other type of diesel fuel would unleaded petrol 95 RON or higher is not avail- unsuitable additive could make the engine
adversely affect the engine’s performance able on journey, etc. In such a case, you malfunction. For details, please contact a
and durability. don’t need to adjust the engine specially. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
In case of using unleaded petrol 91 RON, the Point.
engine performance level is reduced.
02 OBKE12E1
General information
E10 type petrol Filling the fuel tank Refueling

E00203200019 E00200201767 1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
The petrol engines are compatible with E10 type 2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
petrol (containing 10 % ethanol) conforming to Eu- right side of your vehicle.
ropean standards EN 228. WARNING Open the fuel tank filler door with the re-
lease lever located below the instrument panel.
l When handling fuel, comply with the safe-
CAUTION ty regulations displayed by garages and
filling stations. LHD
l Do not use more than 10 % concentration l Before removing the fuel tank filler tube
of ethanol (grain alcohol) by volume. cap, be sure to get rid of your body’s stat-
Use of more than 10 % concentration ic electricity by touching a metal part of
may lead to damage to your vehicle fuel the car or fuel pump. Any static electrici-
system, engine, engine sensors and ex- ty on your body could create a spark that
haust system. ignites fuel vapour.
l Perform the whole refueling process
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
ing the fuel tank filler tube cap, etc.) by
yourself. Do not let any other person
come near the fuel tank filler. If you al-
lowed a person to help you and that per- RHD
son was carrying static electricity, fuel va-
pour could be ignited.
l Do not move away from the fuel tank fill-
er door until refueling is finished. If you
moved away and did something else (for
example, cleaning your windscreen) part-
way through the refueling process, you
could pick up a fresh charge of static elec-
tricity.
l If the fuel tank filler tube cap must be re-
placed, use only a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS original part.
Fuel tank capacity

3-door models: 69 litres
5-door models: 88 litres
OBKE12E1 03
General information
3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turn-

ing the cap anticlockwise.
6. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube cap
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking
Installation of accessories
E00200300774
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
door closed. MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
l The installation of accessories, optional
parts, should only be carried out within the
limits prescribed by law in your country, and
in accordance with the guidelines fitting in-
structions and warnings contained within the
documents accompanying the parts or acces-
sories.
l Improper installation of electrical compo-
nents may cause an electrical fire if incorrect-
ly fitted. Please refer to the Modification/al-
teration to the electrical or fuel systems sec-
A- Remove
tion within this owner’s manual.
B- Close
l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the
vehicle without an external antenna may
cause electrical system interference, which
CAUTION could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.
l Since the fuel system may be under pres- l Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifi-
sure, remove the fuel tank filler tube cap cations must not be used.
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac- Refer to the “Specifications” section for in-
uum that might have built up in the fuel formation regarding wheel and tyre sizes.
tank. If you hear a hissing sound, wait un- l When fitting accessories, ensure that maxi-
til it stops before removing the cap. Oth- mum gross vehicle weight and maximum
erwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you axle weight are not exceeded.
or others.
Important points!
Due to large number of accessory and replacement
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it goes. parts of different manufactures available in the mar-
ket, it is not possible, not only for MITSUBISHI
MOTORS, but also for a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
CAUTION Authorized Service Point, to check whether the at-
tachment or installation of such parts affects the
l Do not tilt the gun. overall safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.
5. When the gun stops automatically, do not fill

with fuel any more.
04 OBKE12E1
General information
Even when such parts are officially authorized, for

example by a “general operators permit” (an ap-
Modification/alterations to the Genuine parts
praisal for the part) or through the execution of the electrical or fuel systems E00200500617
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengths
E00200400254
part in an officially approved manner of construc- to bring you a superbly crafted automobile offering
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has always manufactured
tion, or when a single operation permit following the highest quality and dependability.
safe, high quality vehicles. In order to maintain this
the attachment or installation of such parts, it can- Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts, de-
safety and quality, it is important that any accesso-
not be deduced from that alone, that the driving safe- signed and manufactured to maintain your
ry that is to be fitted, or any modifications carried
ty of your vehicle has not been affected. MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top per-
out which involve the electrical or fuel systems,
formance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts
should be carried out in accordance with
Consider also that there basically exists no liability are identified by this mark and are available at all
MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
on the part of the appraiser or the official. Only in MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
the case of parts (MITSUBISHI MOTORS original Points.
replacement or exchange parts as well as
MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine accessories) that CAUTION
are recommended and released by a MITSUBISHI l If the wiring interferes with any part of
MOTORS Authorized Service Point and that are at- the vehicle bodywork or improper instal-
tached or installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS lation methods are used, i.e. protective
Authorized Service Point, you can assume, that op- fuses not installed, etc.), electronic devi-
timal safety has been provided. The same also per- ces may be adversely affected, possibly re-
tains to modifications of MITSUBISHI vehicles sulting in an electrical fire or other fail-
with respect to the production specifications. For ures that may cause an accident.
your own safety, in such cases, you should only un-
dertake modifications according to the recommen-
dations of a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
OBKE12E1 05
General information
Used engine oils safety Disposal information for used

instructions and disposal batteries
information E00201300016
E00200600025
Your vehicle contains batteries
and/or accumulators.
Do not mix with general house-
WARNING hold waste.
l Prolonged and repeated contact may For proper treatment, recovery
cause serious skin disorders, including and recycling of used batteries,
dermatitis and cancer. please take them to applicable col-
l Avoid contact with the skin as far as pos- lection points, in accordance
sible and wash thoroughly after any con- with your national legislation
tact. and the Directives 2006/66/EC.
l Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil- By disposing of these batteries
dren. correctly, you will help to save
valuable resources and prevent
any potential negative effects on
Protect the environment human health and the environ-
It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. ment which could otherwise
Use authorized waste collection facilities, includ- arise from inappropriate waste
ing civic amenity sites and garages providing facili- handling.
ties for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in
doubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-
posal.
06 OBKE12E1
Locking and unlocking
Keys..............................................................................................1-02
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).....................1-03
Keyless entry system*..................................................................1-04
Doors............................................................................................1-06 1
Central door locks.........................................................................1-07
“Child-protection” rear doors (5-door models)............................1-08
Approach lamps*..........................................................................1-08
Backdoor.......................................................................................1-09
Security alarm system*.................................................................1-10
Electric window control................................................................1-15
Rear side/quarter window.............................................................1-17
Sunroof*.......................................................................................1-17
OBKE12E1
Keys WARNING
• Do not leave the key where it may be ex-
posed to high temperature or high humid-
E00300102038
The key fits all locks. ity.
l When taking a key on flights, do not
press any switches on the key while on l The engine is designed so that it will not
the plane. If a switch is pressed on the start if the ID code registered in the immobil-
Type 1
plane, the key emits electromagnetic izer computer and the key’s ID code do not
waves, which could adversely affect the match. Refer to the “Electronic immobilizer”
plane’s flight operation. section for details and key usage.
1 When carrying a key in a bag, be careful
that no switches on the key can be easily
pressed by mistake.
NOTE
l The key number is stamped on the tag as in-
dicated in the illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store
Type 2 the key and key number tag in separate pla-
ces, so that you can order a key in the event
the original keys are lost.
l The key is a precision electronic device with
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
the following in order to prevent damage.
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
top of the dashboard.
• Do not take the remote control transmit-
ter apart.
• Do not excessively bend the key or sub-
ject it to strong impacts.
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
• Keep away from magnetic objects such
as key rings.
• Keep away from devices that produce
magnetism, such as audio systems, com-
puters and televisions.
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.
1-02 OBKE12E1
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- • When the key contacts or is close to other

immobilizing keys (including keys of oth-
l Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these sys-
theft starting system) er vehicles) (Type C) tems may result in vehicle starting problems
E00300201423
and a loss of security protection.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to signifi-
cantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The
In cases like these, remove the object or l If you lose your key, order a key from your
additional key from the vehicle key. Then MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle
try again to start the engine. If the engine Point as soon as possible. To obtain a replace-
if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt
does not start, we recommend you to con- ment or extra spare key, take your vehicle
can only be achieved by using a key “registered” to
the immobilizer system.
tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
thorized Service Point.
and all remaining keys to your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. All the
1
keys have to be re-registered in the immobil-
NOTE izer computer unit. The immobilizer can reg-
l In the following cases, the vehicle may not ister up to 8 different keys for use.
be able to receive the registered ID code
from the registered key and the engine may
not start. CAUTION
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) l Don’t make any alterations or additions
• When the key grip contacts metal of an- to the immobilizer system; alterations or
other key (Type B) additions could cause failure of the immo-
bilizer.
OBKE12E1 1-03
Keyless entry system* NOTE To extend

E00300302085 l The indication lamp (3) comes on each time Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and back-
Press the remote control switch, and all doors (in- a switch is pressed. door using the UNLOCK switch (2), press the UN-
cluding the backdoor) will be locked or unlocked l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no LOCK switch twice rapidly to return the outside
as desired. It is also possible to operate the outside door (including the backdoor) is opened with- rear-view mirrors to their extended positions.
rear-view mirrors. in approximately 30 seconds: relocking will
automatically occur. NOTE
l It is possible to modify functions as follows:
1 For further information, please contact your
l The keyless entry system does not operate in
the following conditions:
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service • The key is left in the key cylinder.
Point. • The door (including the backdoor) is open.
• The time for automatic relocking can be
changed.
l The remote control switch will operate with-
in approximately 4 m from the vehicle. How-
• The confirmation function (blinking of ever, the operating range of the remote con-
the turn-signal lamps) can be set to oper- trol switch may change if the vehicle is loca-
ate only when the doors and backdoor are ted near a power station, or radio/TV broad-
locked or only when the doors and back- casting station.
door are unlocked.
• The confirmation function (this indicates
l If either of the following problems occurs,
1- LOCK switch the battery may be exhausted.
locking or unlocking of the doors and • The remote control switch is operated at
2- UNLOCK switch backdoor with the blink of the turn-signal
3- Indication lamp the correct distance from the vehicle, but
lamps) can be deactivated. the doors (including the backdoor) are
• The number of times the turn-signal not locked/unlocked in response.
To lock lamps are flashed by the confirmation • The indication lamp (3) is dim or does
Press the LOCK switch (1), and all doors (includ- function can be changed. not come on.
ing the backdoor) will be locked. When they are
For further information, please contact
locked with the room lamp switch at the middle po- Operation of the outside rear-view mir- your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
sition (DOOR), the room lamp and the turn-signal
lamps blink once.
rors ized Service Point. If you replace the bat-
tery yourself, refer to “Procedure for re-
To fold placing the remote control switch bat-
To unlock Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and back- tery” on page 1-05.
Press the UNLOCK switch (2), and all doors (in-
cluding the backdoor) will be unlocked. When they
door using the LOCK switch (1), press the LOCK l If your remote control switch is lost or dam-
switch twice rapidly to fold the outside rear-view aged, please contact your MITSUBISHI
are unlocked with the room lamp switch at the mid- mirrors. MOTORS Authorized Service Point for a re-
dle position (DOOR), the room lamp will be turned placement remote control switch.
on for approximately 15 seconds and the turn-sig-
nal lamps will blink twice.
1-04 OBKE12E1
l If you wish to add a remote control switch, remote control switch case and use it to open 4. Remove the remote control transmitter from
we recommend you to contact a the case. the remote control switch case. Then, open
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service the remote control transmitter using the meth-
Point. od described in step 3.
A maximum of 4 remote control switches are
available for your vehicle.
Procedure for replacing the remote

control switch battery 1
E00309500132
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
electricity from your body by touching a met-
al part such as doorknob of the room.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote con-
trol switch.
NOTE
l Be sure to perform the procedure with the
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the 5. Remove the old battery.
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when 6. Install a new battery with the + side (B) down.
you open the remote control switch case, the
switches may come out.
+ side
- side
3. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, in-

sert the clothcovered tip of a straight blade Coin type battery
(or minus) screwdriver into the notch in the CR1616
7. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.

8. Place the remote control transmitter in the re-
mote control switch case, then securely close
the remote control switch case.
9. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
OBKE12E1 1-05
10. Check the keyless entry system to see that it

works.
Doors To lock or unlock from inside the vehi-
E00300401177 cle
NOTE
l You may purchase a replacement battery at CAUTION
an electric appliance store.
l Make sure the doors are closed: driving
l A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- with doors not completely closed is dan-
ice Point can replace the battery for you if
1 you prefer.
l
gerous.
Never leave children in the vehicle unat-
tended.
l Be careful not to lock the doors while the
CAUTION key is inside the vehicle.
l When the remote control switch case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, To lock or unlock with the key
etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal 1- Lock
components. 2- Unlock
Pull the inside door handle towards you to open

the door.
To lock without using the key

Front door
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1-06 OBKE12E1
Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,

and while pulling the outside handle up (2), close
Central door locks Driver’s door with central door lock
E00300801692 switch
the door (3). Using the central door lock switch locks or unlocks
Rear door (5-door models)
NOTE all doors (including the backdoor).
l Each of the doors can be locked or unlocked
independently by using the inside lock knob.
l Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the central door
locking systems built-in protection circuit 1
and prevent the system from operating.
If this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute
before operating the central door lock switch
or the key.
Driver’s door with key (except for ve-

hicles with keyless entry system)
Using the key on the driver’s door locks or unlocks 1- Lock
all doors (including the backdoor). 2- Unlock
Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,
and close the door (2).
“Forgotten-key-prevention” mecha-
nism
E00300600273
If the key is in the ignition switch when you push
the lock knob forward with the driver’s door open,
the lock knob will automatically return to the un-
locked position.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
OBKE12E1 1-07
“Child-protection” rear doors (5- Approach lamps* NOTE

door models) E00306100195 l The lamps go off immediately if any of the
The lamps (A) in the bottom of each mirror come following actions is taken while the lamps
E00300900869
on to illuminate road surface while people are enter- are on.
ing or exiting the vehicle. • The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
• All of the doors (including the backdoor)
are locked using the central door lock func-
1 tion.
• All of the doors (including the backdoor)
are locked using the keyless entry system
(if so equipped).
1- Lock
2- Unlock
Child protection helps prevent the rear doors from These lamps turn on/off as follows:
being opened accidentally from the inside. l The lamps come on for approximately 15 sec-
If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear onds when all of the doors (including the back-
door cannot be opened using the inside handle, but door) are unlocked using the central door
only with the outside handle. lock function or the keyless entry system (if
If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the so equipped).
child protection mechanism does not function. l When any door or the backdoor is opened,
the lamp comes on for approximately 2 mi-
nutes.
CAUTION If all of the doors (including the backdoor)
are closed while the lamps are on, the lamps
l When driving with a child in the rear go off 30 seconds later.
seat, please use the child protection to pre-
vent accidental door opening which may
cause an accident.
1-08 OBKE12E1
Backdoor To lock or unlock from outside the ve- Vehicles without keyless entry system, if the back-
door is locked or unlocked by using the central
E00301300424 hicle (Except for vehicles with keyless
door lock switch, it can still be locked or unlocked
entry system) with the key.
WARNING
NOTE
l It is dangerous to drive with the back-
door open since carbon monoxide (CO) l Repeated continuous operating between lock
and unlock could cause the central door
gas can enter the cabin. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconscious- lock’s built-in protection circuit to prevent 1
ness and even death. the system from operating. If this occurs,
wait approximately 1 minute before operat-
ing the central door lock switch.
CAUTION l When the luggage compartment lamp is set
to the [•] position, the luggage compartment
lamp illuminates when the backdoor is
l When the backdoor is open, the rear-
opened and turns off when it is closed.
right combination lamp is obscured by
the spare wheel. 1- Lock
If the backdoor is opened while the vehi- 2- Unlock To open
cle is parked on the road, alert other road Pull the outside handle towards you to open the
users to the vehicle’s presence using a To lock or unlock from inside the vehi- backdoor.
warning triangle or other device as re- cle
quired by local legislation. The backdoor can be locked or unlocked by using
l When closing the backdoor, always en- the central door lock switch.
sure your or other person’s fingers can-
not be caught by the backdoor.
NOTE
l The backdoor is equipped with an oil damper
type backdoor stopper, enabling you to hold
the backdoor at a desired position.
l While opening or closing the backdoor, you
may feel slight resistance. This is a structural
feature of the backdoor stopper that supports
the backdoor and does not indicate any abnor-
mality.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
OBKE12E1 1-09
Backdoor stopper Security alarm system* l If the turn-signal lamps do not blink after the
locking and unlocking operation using the
Open the backdoor fully and then move the locking E00301500657
tube (A) to the LOCK position (B); this will ensure The security alarm system is designed to prevent un- keyless entry system, the security alarm sys-
that the backdoor remains in the fully opened posi- lawful entry into the vehicle. It will alert people tem may be malfunctioning.
tion. To subsequently release the stopper, move the nearby if a door, the backdoor, or the bonnet is Have the vehicle inspected at a
locking tube back to the UNLOCK position (C). opened when the vehicle has not been unlocked us- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
ing the keyless entry system. Point.
Also, the alarm will be activated if any of the fol- l In the following situations, the security
1 lowing occur. alarm system could be more likely to be acci-
dentally activated.
l Attempt an unlawful moving of the vehicle.
(the vehicle inclination detection function) • Using a car wash
l Detect a motion in the vehicle. (the interior • Taking the vehicle on a ferry
intrusion detection function) • Parking in an automated car park
l Disconnect the battery terminal. • Leaving someone or a pet in the vehicle
• Leaving a window, door, or the sunroof
open
The security alarm system is set to “active” when • Leaving an unstable object such as a stuf-
the vehicle leaves the factory. fed toy or accessory in the vehicle
When making changes to the settings, please fol- • Suffering a continuous impact or vibra-
low the procedure listed in the section titled “Chang- tion by hail, thunder, etc.
ing the system settings” on page 1-11.
l The sensitivity of the vehicle inclination de-
CAUTION tection function and the interior intrusion de-
tection function can be adjusted. For details,
l When closing the backdoor, be careful CAUTION please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
not to trap your hands. thorized Service Point.
l Before closing the backdoor, make sure l Do not modify or add parts to the securi-
that the locking tube (A) is in the UN- ty alarm system.
LOCK position (C). Closing the back- Doing so could cause the security alarm
door with the locking tube (A) in the to malfunction.
LOCK position (B) may damage the back-
door stopper, rendering the backdoor un- NOTE
able to be closed.
l The alarm system will not be activated if the
doors (including the backdoor) have been
locked using a key or the central door lock
switch (instead of the keyless entry system).
1-10 OBKE12E1
The security alarm has four modes: Also, if unlawful moving of the vehicle is attemp- Changing the security alarm settings
ted or a vehicle intrusion is detected, the alarm will E00301600212
System preparation mode (approx. 20 seconds) be activated. It is possible to set the security alarm to the “ac-
(The buzzer sounds intermittently, and the security tive” mode or “inactive” mode.
alarm indicator (A) blinks) Alarm activation Follow the procedure below.
The turn-signal lamps blink and the siren sounds 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
for approximately 30 seconds. Refer to “Alarm ac- 2. Place the lamp switch in the “OFF” position,
tivation” on page 1-14. and leave the driver’s door open.
1
NOTE
l The alarm will resume if unlawful actions
are taken again, even if the alarm has stopped.
System cancellation
It is possible to cancel the system activation during
the system preparation mode or the system armed
mode.
In addition, it is possible to cancel the alarm once it
has been activated.
The system preparation time extends from the Refer to “Cancelling the system” on page 1-13,
point at which all of the doors (including the back- “Cancelling the alarm” on page 1-14.
door) are locked by the keyless entry switch to the
point at which the system activation mode goes in-
to effect. NOTE
During this time, it is possible to temporarily open l When lending the vehicle to another person
a door without using the keyless entry system and or allowing the vehicle to be driven by some-
without causing the alarm to sound (for example, one who is unfamiliar with the security
when you forget something inside the vehicle or re- alarm system, be sure to give the person a
alize that a window is open). proper explanation of the security alarm sys-
tem or set the security alarm system to the “in-
System armed mode active” mode.
(The buzzer stops, and the security alarm indicator If a person who is unfamiliar with the securi-
continues to blink slowly) ty alarm system accidentally unlocked the ve-
Once the system preparation mode has ended, the hicle, causing the alarm to sound, the alarm
system armed mode starts. If an unlawful opening would be a nuisance to people nearby. 3. Pull the windscreen wiper and washer switch
of any of the doors (including the backdoor) or the towards you and hold it there.
bonnet is detected during the system armed mode,
the alarm will be activated to warn people around
the vehicle of an abnormal condition.
OBKE12E1 1-11
(Since the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” NOTE

position, washer fluid will not be sprayed.) l If anything with regard to making changes to
the security alarm system settings is hard to
understand, please consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
l Avoid leaving valuable items inside the vehi-
cle even when the security alarm system has
been set to the “active” mode.
1
Setting the system
E00301700503
Once the security alarm system has been set to the
The settings mode can be toggled by press- “active” mode, follow the procedure below to set
ing the UNLOCK switch. The mode can be the system to the system armed mode.
confirmed from the number of times the buz- 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
zer sounds. 2. Exit the vehicle and close all of the doors (in-
4. After approximately 10 seconds, the buzzer
cluding the backdoor) and the bonnet.
will make a sound. Keep the windscreen wip-
Number of times 3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the keyless en-
er and washer switch pulled towards you. Security alarm settings mode
the buzzer sounds try switch in order to lock all the doors (in-
(If the windscreen wiper and washer switch
cluding the backdoor).
was released, the setting change mode would 1 Alarm inactive
be cancelled. To start over, perform the pro-
cedure again from step 3.) 3 Alarm active
5. When the buzzer stops, with the windscreen
wiper and washer switch still pulled towards 6. Any of the following operations can be used
you, press the UNLOCK switch (A) on the to terminate the system settings change mode.
keyless entry switch to select the security • Releasing the windscreen wiper and
alarm settings mode. washer switch.
• Closing the driver’s door.
• Inserting the key into the ignition
switch.
• Placing the lamp switch in any posi-
tion other than “OFF”.
• Allowing 30 seconds to pass without
making any changes to the settings. By locking the vehicle using the keyless en-
try system, the system preparation mode is ac-
tivated. The buzzer sounds intermittently for
1-12 OBKE12E1
confirmation, and the security alarm indica- NOTE The buzzer will sound twice and the function will
tor (B) on the instrument panel blinks. l The security alarm system can be activated be activated.
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
system to the system armed mode while peo-
ple are riding in the vehicle.
l With the system in the system armed mode,
if any method other than the keyless entry sys- 1
tem is used (namely a key or the central door
lock switch) to unlock the vehicle and open
any of the doors (including the backdoor),
the room lamp does not illuminate.
To deactivate the vehicle inclination detection

NOTE function and the interior intrusion detection func-
tion
NOTE
l The system preparation mode is not activated E00312100204 l The function will be activated again using
when all of the doors (including the back- one of the following methods.
The vehicle inclination detection function and the
door) have been locked using a method other • Unlock the doors (including the back-
interior intrusion detection function can be deacti-
than the keyless entry system (namely a key door) using the keyless entry system.
vated when parking in automated car parks, when
or the central door lock switch). • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or
leaving pets in the vehicle or when leaving the ve-
l If the bonnet is open, the security alarm indi-
hicle with the windows slightly open. “ACC” position.
cator illuminates, and the system does not en-
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
ter the system armed mode. When the bonnet
2. Raise and hold the wiper and washer switch Cancelling the system
is closed, the system enters the system prepa-
to the “MIST” position for approximately 3 E00301800399
ration mode, and after approximately 20 sec-
seconds. The buzzer will sound once and the The following methods can be used to cancel the
onds the system enters the system armed
function will be deactivated. system when it is in the system preparation mode
mode.
or the system armed mode.
To activate the function again, raise and hold the l Pressing the UNLOCK switch on the keyless
4. The buzzer stops after approximately 20 sec- entry switch.
wiper and washer switch to the “MIST” position
onds, and when the blinking of the security l Turning the ignition switch to the “ON” or
for approximately 3 seconds.
alarm indicator starts to slow down, the sys- “ACC” position.
tem armed mode goes into effect. The securi- l Opening any of the doors (including the back-
ty alarm indicator continues to blink during door) when the system is in the system prep-
the system armed mode. aration mode, or inserting the key into the ig-
nition switch.
OBKE12E1 1-13
NOTE l If the UNLOCK switch is pressed and no NOTE

l If the bonnet is opened during the system prep- door is (including the backdoor) opened with- l The interior lamp will not come on while the
aration mode, the system preparation mode in 30 seconds, the doors will automatically re- alarm is sounding.
is suspended. The system returns to the sys- lock. In this case as well, the system prepara-
tem preparation mode when the bonnet is tion mode will go into effect.
closed. The time between pressing the UNLOCK Cancelling the alarm
E00302000356
l If the battery terminals are disconnected switch and automatic locking can be adjus- It is possible to halt the activation of an alarm us-
while the system is in the system preparation ted. Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- ing the following methods:
1 mode, the memory will be erased. thorized Service Point.
l Pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK switch on
l It is possible to register up to 4 remote con- the keyless entry switch.
trol switches. As long as they are registered, Alarm activation (After pressing the LOCK switch, the vehi-
any of the 4 remote control switches, other E00301900840 cle will lock if all the doors (including the
than the one used to activate the system, can When the system is in the system armed mode, the backdoor) are closed, after which the system
be used to cancel the system. alarm will be activated as follows if the vehicle is preparation mode will once again go into ef-
If you want to register additional remote con- unlocked and any of the doors (including the back- fect.)
trol switches, please contact a MITSUBISHI door) or bonnet is opened using a method other l Turning the ignition switch to the “ON” or
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. than pressing the UNLOCK switch on the keyless “ACC” position.
l The activation distance for the keyless entry entry switch.
system is approximately 4 m. 1. The alarm will be activated for approximate-
If it is not possible to lock or unlock the vehi- ly 30 seconds. The turn-signal lamps will NOTE
cle by pressing the switch at the correct dis- flash, and the siren will sound intermittently. l When the ignition switch is turned to the
tance or the security alarm system cannot be “ON” position, the buzzer sounds 4 times.
set or cancelled using the switch, the battery This operation indicates that the alarm was ac-
may need to be replaced. tivated while the vehicle was parked.
For further information, please consult a Please check the inside of the vehicle to con-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service firm that nothing was stolen.
Point. l Even if the battery is disconnected, the alarm
If you replace the battery yourself, refer to activation memory will not be erased.
“Procedure for replacing the remote control
switch battery” on page 1-05.
2. The alarm will resume if unlawful actions

are taken again, even if the alarm has stopped.
1-14 OBKE12E1
Electric window control WARNING

Press the switch down for opening the window,
and pull up the switch for closing it.
E00302200185
The electric windows can only be operated with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position.
l Before operating the electric window con-
trol, make sure that nothing can get trap- Passenger’s switch
ped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
Electric window control switch l Never leave the vehicle without removing
E00302301226
the key.
Each door window opens or closes while the corre-
l Never leave a child (or other person who
sponding switch is operated. might not be capable of safe operation of 1
the electric window control) in the vehicle
Driver’s switch (LHD) alone.
l The child may tamper with the switch at
the risk of its hands or head being trap-
ped in the window.
NOTE NOTE
l Repeated operation with the engine stopped l The rear door windows only open halfway.
will run down the battery. Operate the win-
dow switches only while the engine is running.
Lock switch
E00303100501
Driver’s switches When this switch is operated, the passenger’s
The driver’s switches can be used to operate all switches cannot be used to open or close the door
Driver’s switch (RHD) door windows. windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operating
the corresponding switch.
Press the switch down to open the window, and
pull up the switch to close it.
If the switch for the driver’s window is fully press-
ed down/pulled up, the door window automatically
opens/closes completely.
If you want to stop the window movement, operate
the switch lightly.
1- Driver’s door window Passenger’s switches

2- Front passenger’s door window The passenger’s switches can be used to operate
3- Rear left door window (5-door models) the corresponding passenger’s door windows.
4- Rear right door window (5-door models)
5- Lock switch
OBKE12E1 1-15
To unlock, press it once again. NOTE

l It is possible to prevent the driver’s door CAUTION
switches from being used to open and close l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
the front passenger’s door window and rear fore the window is fully closed. This al-
door windows (5-door models) while the lows the window to close completely.
lock switch is pressed in the “LOCK” position. Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
For details, we recommend you to consult a gers are trapped in the window.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
1 Point.
NOTE
Timer function l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
E00302400712 driving conditions or other circumstances
The door windows can be opened or closed for 30 cause the door windows to be subjected to a
seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the physical shock similar to that caused by a trap-
1- Lock ped hand or head.
2- Unlock “ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If the driver’s door is opened during this period, l If the safety mechanism is activated three or
the door window can be opened or closed for anoth- more times in a row, the safety mechanism
NOTE er 30 seconds. will be cancelled and the door window will
l The driver’s switch can always open or close However, once the driver’s door is closed, the win- not close correctly.
any door windows. dows cannot be operated. In such a case, the following procedure
should be implemented to rectify this situa-
Safety mechanism tion. If the window is open, repeatedly raise
WARNING E00302500218 the appropriate window switch until that win-
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing window, dow has been fully closed. Following this, re-
lA child may tamper with the switch at it will lower automatically. lease the switch, raise the switch once again
the risk of its hands or head being trap- Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head and hold it in this condition for at least 1 sec-
ped in the window. When driving with a or hand out of the window when closing a window. ond, then release it. You should now be able
child in the vehicle, please press the win- The lowered window will become operational after to operate all windows in the normal fashion.
dow lock switch to disable the passen- a few seconds.
ger’s switches.
WARNING
l If the safety mechanism is activated three
or more times successively, the safety
mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
injury could result.
1-16 OBKE12E1
Rear side/quarter window To close Sunroof*

E00302600091 Pull the lever, returning it to its original position E00302701015
and securing it in place. The sunroof can only be operated with the ignition
To open switch in the “ON” position.
1. Pull the lever towards you.
1- Tilt up
2- Close, Tilt down
2. Push the lever towards the outside of the ve- 3- Open
hicle.
3. Push the lever towards the rear of the vehicle To open, press the switch (3).
to secure it in place. To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (1) or
(2).
NOTE
l The sunroof automatically stops just before
reaching the fully open position.
Press the switch again to fully open it.
To close, press the switch (2).

To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (1) or
(3).
To tilt up, press the switch (1).

The rear sunroof raises for ventilation.
OBKE12E1 1-17
NOTE NOTE NOTE

l When the sunroof is tilted up, the sunshade l If the sunroof switch is operated with the l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
is automatically opened slightly. lock switch pressed, a buzzer sounds to indi- driving conditions or other circumstances
cate the sunroof cannot be opened or closed. cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-
l With the lock switch pressed, operation of cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped
To tilt down, press the switch (2).
the electric window control with switches oth- hand or head.
er than the driver’s door switches is also pre- l Avoid stopping the sunroof before it reaches
the opening or closing end during operations
1 WARNING vented.
in steps 3 and 4 above. If this should acciden-
l Do not put head, hands or anything else tally happen, repeat the process from step 1.
out of the sunroof opening while driving Safety mechanism
E00303800090
the vehicle. If a hand or head is trapped in the closing sunroof, 5. Following this action, it should be possible
l Never leave a child (or other person who it will reopen automatically. to operate the sunroof in the normal manner.
might not be capable of safe operation of Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head
the sunroof switch) in the vehicle alone. or hand out of the sunroof when opening or closing.
l Before operating the sunroof, make sure
that nothing is capable of being trapped
The opened sunroof will become operational after CAUTION
a few seconds.
(head, hand, finger, etc.). l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
If the safety mechanism should be activated 5 or fore the sunroof is fully closed. This al-
more times consecutively, normal closing of the sun- lows the sunroof to close completely.
Lock switch roof will be aborted. In such an event, the follow- Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
E00308900025
ing steps should be taken: gers are trapped in the sunroof.
When this switch is operated, the sunroof switch
cannot be used to open or close the sunroof. 1. Press the switch (2) repeatedly, setting the
To unlock, press it once again. sunroof in the tilt up condition. NOTE
2. Once the tilt up condition has been reached,
press and hold the switch (2) for a period of l The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fully open position.
at least 3 seconds. If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in
3. Press the switch (2) once again to fully close this position, wind throb is lower than with
the sunroof. the sunroof fully open.
4. After pressing the switch (3) to perform full
opening, press the switch (2) to fully close l When leaving the vehicle unattended, make
sure you close the sunroof and remove the ig-
the sunroof. nition key.
l Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
zen closed (after snow fall or during extreme
cold).
l Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the sun-
roof or roof opening edge.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1-18 OBKE12E1
l Release the switch as soon as the sunroof rea- Sunshade To close

ches the fully open or fully closed position. E00307900103 When switch (1) is pressed, the sunshade and the
l If the sunroof does not operate when the sun- Slide the sunshade manually to open and close it. sunroof close together.
roof switch is operated, release the switch
and check whether something is trapped by If the sunroof is stopped midway, the sunshade will
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, we recom- no longer be able to close together with the sun-
mend you to have the sunroof checked. roof. In such a situation, press switch (2) to fully
l Depending on the model of ski carriers or open the sunroof and then press switch (1).
roof carriers, the sunroof may make contact
with the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up.
1
NOTE
Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if such
a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed. l When the sunroof is tilted up, the sunshade
is automatically opened slightly.
l Be sure to close the sunroof completely
l Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-
when washing the vehicle or when leaving
ing the sunshade.
the vehicle.
l Be careful, not to put any wax on the weath- l The sunshade cannot be closed with the sun-
roof opened.
erstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof
Do not attempt to close the sunshade when
opening. If stained with wax, the weather-
strip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal CAUTION the sunroof is opened.
with the sunroof.
l Be careful that hands are not trapped
l After washing the vehicle or after it has when closing the sunshade.
rained, wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.
l Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the en-
gine stationary will run down the battery. Op-
erate the sunroof while the engine is running.
To open
When switch (2) is pressed, the sunshade and the
sunroof open together.
OBKE12E1 1-19
OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Seats..............................................................................................2-02
Seat arrangement..........................................................................2-03
Seat adjustment.............................................................................2-05
Front seats.....................................................................................2-05
Rear seats (3-door models)*/Second seats (5-door mod-
els)*..........................................................................................2-09
Third seat (5-door models)*.........................................................2-11
Head restraints..............................................................................2-11
2
Making a luggage area..................................................................2-12
Making a flat seat (Except for 3-door models equipped
with the power seat).................................................................2-18
Seat belts.......................................................................................2-20
Pregnant women restraint.............................................................2-22
Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system................2-23
Child restraint...............................................................................2-23
Seat belt inspection.......................................................................2-33
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag..............................2-33
OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Seats
E00400100820
1- Front seats l To get in and out of the third seat (5-door

l To adjust forward or backward ® p. 2-05 models) ® p. 2-10
l To recline the seatback ® p. 2-06 3-Third seat (5-door models)*
l To adjust seat cushion height ® p. 2-07 l To recline the seatback ® p. 2-11
l Lumbar support adjustment (Power type, driv-
er’s seat) ® p. 2-07
l Armrest ® p. 2-08
l To get in and out of the rear seat (3-door mod-
els, passenger’s seat) ® p. 2-08
l Heated seats* ® p. 2-08
2- Rear seats (3-door models)*/Second
seats (5-door models)*
l To recline the seatback ® p. 2-09
l Armrest ® p. 2-10
2-02 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Seat arrangement
E00400200687
By operating the front, rear/second or third seat select the desired seat arrangement.
3-door models 5-door models
Normal usage
Flat seat (Except for 3-door models equipped with

the power seat) ® p. 2-18
OBKE12E1 2-03
Seat and seat belts
Folding the rear seatbacks forward (3-door models) /

Folding the second seatbacks forward (5-door mod-
els) ® p. 2-12
2 Folding the rear seats (3-door models) / Folding the

second seats (5-door models) ® p. 2-13
How to stow large articles
Storage of the third seat ® p. 2-14 —
Removing the third seat ® p. 2-16 —
2-04 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Seat adjustment CAUTION Front seats

E00400300314 E00400400100
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortable
l Make sure the seat is adjusted by an To adjust forward or backward
and that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel, adult or with adult supervision for cor- E00400500055
switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision. rect and safe operation.
Manual type
l Do not place a cushion or the like be-
Pull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat for-
tween your back and the seatback while
WARNING driving. The effectiveness of the head re- ward or backward to the desired position, and re-
lease the adjusting lever.
straints will be reduced in the event of an
l Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
accident.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol and result in an accident. After ad- l When sliding the seats, be careful not to
justments are made, ensure the seating is
locked in position by attempting to move
catch your hand or foot.
2
the seat forward and rearward without us-
ing the adjusting mechanism.
l Do not allow people or children to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is not equip-
ped with seats and seat belts, and make
sure that everyone travelling in your vehi-
cle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or
in the case of a child is strapped in a child
restraint.
l To minimize the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision or sudden brak- WARNING
ing, the seatbacks should always be in the
almost upright position while the vehicle l To ensure the seat is locked securely, try
is in motion. The protection provided by to move the seat forward or backward
the seat belts may be reduced significant- without using the adjusting lever.
ly when the seatback is reclined. There is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the seat belt, resulting in serious in-
jury, when the seatback is reclined.
OBKE12E1 2-05
Seat and seat belts
Power type To recline the seatback Power type

Adjust the seat by operating the switch as indicated E00400600056 Adjust the seatback angle by operating the switch
by the arrows. as indicated by the arrows.
Manual type
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slight-
ly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and then lean
backward to the desired position and release the lev-
er. The seatback will lock in that position.
1- Adjustment forward 1- To move to forward direction

2- Adjustment backward 2- To recline rearward
NOTE NOTE
l To prevent the battery from running down, l To prevent the battery from running down,
operate the power seat with the engine run- operate the power type seat with the engine
ning. CAUTION running.
l The reclining mechanism of the seatback

is spring loaded, causing it to return to
the vertical position when the lock lever
is operated. When using the lever, sit
close to the seatback or hold it with your
hand to control its return motion.
2-06 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
To adjust seat cushion height NOTE

E00400700451
l To prevent the battery from running down,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
Manual type ning.
To adjust the seat cushion height, turn the dial as
shown in the illustration.
3- To move the whole seat cushion up and down 2

Lumbar support adjustment (Power
type, driver’s seat)
E00400800032
1- To move the front of the seat cushion up and A lumbar support adjustment is located in the seat-
down back of the driver’s seat. To adjust the lumbar sup-
1- To move the front of the seat cushion up port, operate the switch as indicated by arrows.
2- To move the front of the seat cushion down
2- To move the rear of the seat cushion up and

down 1- Strong
3- To move the rear of the seat cushion up 2- Weak
4- To move the rear of the seat cushion down
Power type
To adjust the seat cushion height, operate the
switch as indicated by arrows.
OBKE12E1 2-07
Seat and seat belts
NOTE Pull up the lever (A) or depress the pedal (B), tilt Heated seats*
l To prevent the battery from running down, the seatback forward. Then slide the entire seat for- E00401100797
operate the power seat with the engine run- ward. To return the seat, raise the seatback, then The heated seats can be operated with the ignition
ning. slide the entire seat backward until there is a switch in the “ON” position. Operate the switch as
“click” in a locked position. Adjust the seat position. indicated by arrows.
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the
Armrest heater is on.
E00400900118
Slide forward the centre console lid while pressing
the right upper lever (A).
WARNING
1 (HI)- Heater high (for quick heating).
l Do not drive the vehicle with the seatback
folded forward. The seat is not retained 2- Heater off.
To get in and out of the rear seat (3- with the seatback in this position, so seri-
3 (LO)- Heater low (to keep the seat warm).
door models, passenger’s seat) ous injuries could be suffered in the event
E00401000044 of hard braking or a collision.
The lever can be used to make getting in and out
easier. CAUTION
CAUTION l Switch off seat heaters when not in use.
l The reclining mechanism of the seatback l Operate in the high position for quick heat-
is spring loaded, causing it to return to ing. Once the seat is warm, set the heater
the vertical position when the lock lever to low to keep it warm. Slight variations
is operated. When using the lever, sit in seat temperature may be felt while us-
close to the seatback or hold it with your ing the heated seats. This is caused by the
hand to control its return motion. operation of the heater’s internal thermo-
stat and does not indicate a malfunction.
2-08 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
CAUTION Rear seats (3-door models)*/ To recline the seatback

E00402200157
Second seats (5-door models)* In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slight-
l If the following types of persons use the E00402000184
ly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and then lean
heated seats, they might become too hot
backward to the desired position and release the lev-
or receive minor burns (red skin, heat blis-
er. The seatback will lock in that position.
ters, etc.):
• Children, elderly or ill people
WARNING
• People with sensitive skin l When a person is sitting in the middle seat- 3-door models
• Excessively tired people ing position of the rear seats (3-door mod-
• People under the influence of alcohol els)/second seats (5-door models), pull up
or sleep inducing medication (cold the head restraint to a height at which it
l
medicine, etc.)
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
locks in position. Be sure to make this ad-
justment before starting to drive. Serious 2
stick pins, needles, or other pointed ob- injuries could otherwise be suffered as
jects into it. the result of an impact. Refer to “Head re-
l Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other ma- straints” on page 2-11. 5-door models
terial with high heat insulation properties
on the seat while using the heater; this
might cause the heater element to overheat
l When cleaning the seat, do not use ben-
zene, kerosene, petrol, alcohol, or other or-
ganic solvents; these might damage the
surface of the seat and also the heater ele-
ment.
l If water or any other liquid is spilled on
the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
attempting to use the heater. CAUTION
l Turn the heater off immediately if it ap- l The reclining mechanism of the seatback
pears to be malfunctioning during use. is spring loaded, causing it to return to
OBKE12E1 2-09
Seat and seat belts
NOTE Armrest
l Each seatback can be adjusted by the lever E00402400218 CAUTION
on its side. l When storing the armrest, push the arm-
For rear seats (3-door models)
l On 5-door models, each of the second seat’s
Press the button (A) at the top of the armrest and
rest securely to prevent it from falling
sidebacks (A) is foldable. When either side down while driving the vehicle.
of the seatback is reclined to a new position, allow the armrest to drop down.
its sideback automatically folds inward ac-
cordingly. NOTE
l Do not stand or sit on the armrest. It could
break.
2 To get in and out of the third seat (5-

door models)
E00402500163
Getting in and out of the third seat can be made easi-
ly by folding the second seat. Refer to “Folding the
rear seats (3-door models) / Folding the second
seats (5-door models)” on page 2-13.
For second seats (5-door models)

Lift the centre head restraint and then tilt the arm-
rest for use as illustrated.
2-10 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Third seat (5-door models)* Head restraints To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To low-
er the restraint, move it downward while pushing
E00402700149 E00403301149
To recline the seatback the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of the
E00402800124 arrow. After adjustment, push the head restraint
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slight-
ly, pull the seatback lock lever as shown in the illus-
WARNING downward and make sure that it is locked.
tration, and then lean backward to the desired posi- l Driving without the head restraints in
tion and release the lever. The seatback will lock in place can cause you and your passengers
that position. serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident, al-
ways make sure the head restraints are in-
stalled and properly positioned when the
seat is occupied. 2
l Never place a cushion or similar device
on the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To adjust height To adjust forward or backward (front

Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre seats)
of the head restraint is as close as possible to eye Tilt the head restraint towards you to adjust it for-
level to reduce the chances of injury in the event of ward. To adjust it backward, tilt the head restraint
collision. Any person too tall for the head restraint backward.
CAUTION to reach their seated eye level, should adjust the re-
l The reclining mechanism of the seatback straint as high as possible.
is spring loaded, causing it to return to
OBKE12E1 2-11
Seat and seat belts
To remove Making a luggage area

To remove the head restraints, lift the head re- E00403400013
straint with the height adjusting knob (A) pushed in.
To install CAUTION
Confirm that the head restraint is facing the correct
direction, and then insert it into the seatback while l Do not stack luggage above the seatback
height.
pressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direc- Secure the luggage firmly.
tion indicated by the arrow. Serious accidents could result due to un-
restrained objects entering the passenger
compartment during sudden braking.
2 l When folding, storing or removing the
seat, be sure not to catch your hand or leg.
CAUTION
l The head restraints for the seats differ in Folding the rear seatbacks forward (3-
shape and size. When installing head re-
straints, make sure the head restraints door models) / Folding the second seat-
are fitted in their respective seats. backs forward (5-door models)
E00403500232
The passenger and luggage compartments can be
joined by folding the rear (3-door models) / second
(5-door models) seatback forward. This is useful
for carrying long objects.
CAUTION To fold
l Confirm that the height adjusting knob 1. If your vehicle is equipped with a rear shelf (3-
(A) is correctly adjusted as shown in the door models) / cargo area cover (5-door mod-
illustration, and also lift the head re- els), remove it before performing the follow-
straints to ensure that they do not come ing steps. Refer to “Rear shelf (3-door mod-
out of the seatback. els)” on page 5-95 and “Cargo area cover (5-
door models)” on page 5-96.
2-12 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
2. Lift up the knob (A) behind the seatback, Push lightly on the seatback to confirm that it has To fold
then tilt the seatback forward. actually been secured. 1. If your vehicle is equipped with a rear shelf (3-
door models) / cargo area cover (5-door mod-
els), remove it before performing the follow-
ing steps. Refer to “Rear shelf (3-door mod-
els)” on page 5-95 and “Cargo area cover (5-
door models)” on page 5-96.
2. Lift up the knob (A) behind the seatback,
then tilt the seatback forward.
NOTE Folding the rear seats (3-door mod-

l Each seatback can be folded forward using
els) / Folding the second seats (5-door
the knob on its side.
models)
E00403700221
3. Push the seat until you hear a “click” and the To create luggage space, you can fold the rear (3-
seat locks securely. door models) / second (5-door models) seats.
If your vehicle is equipped with the third seat, by
folding the second seat, you can get in and out easier. 3. Lift the seat until you hear a “click”.
WARNING
l When driving the vehicle, do not allow
anyone to sit on the third seat if the sec-
ond seat is in the foldeddown position.
The second seat could tip rearward in the
event of hard braking or a collision, result-
ing in serious injuries.
To replace
Raise the seatback until it locks securely into place.
OBKE12E1 2-13
Seat and seat belts
To replace Push lightly on the seatback to confirm that 2. Stow the removed head restraints in the lug-
1. Hold the seat with your hand, then return the it has actually been secured. gage floor box with their front faces facing
seat to its original position while pushing the upward.
stopper (A).
Storage of the third seat

E00404100235 NOTE
2. Push the seat until you hear a “click” and the By folding the third seat into the luggage floor box, l Stowing the head restraints with their front
seat locks securely. large articles can be stored in the vehicle. faces facing downward would prevent the
third seat from being stowed.
To store
1. Remove the luggage floor board (A) and the 3. Pull up knob (C) on the side of the seatback,
head restraints (B). Refer to “Luggage floor then tilt the seatback forward.
box” on page 5-93 and “Head restraints” on
page 2-11.
3. Raise the seatback until it locks securely into

place.
2-14 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
4. Push lever (D) forward, then tilt the seatback 6. Fold down the stands (F).
forward until the seatback touches the seat CAUTION
cushion.
l Ensure that lever (E) is not operated
while the seat is occupied. The folding ac-
tion of the seat in such a situation could
result in an unexpected accident.
l When folding the seat, be sure not to
catch your hands between seat and lug-
gage floor box.
l When folding the seat away into the lug-
gage floor box, hold the seat by hand and
fold it slowly. If the seat is not held prop-
erly, it might fall under its own weight dur-
2
ing folding and pinch your hand.
7. Refit the luggage floor board.
To replace
CAUTION 1. Remove the luggage floor board. And then
raise the stands.
l Do not drive with luggage placed on the
2. Raise the seat forward until you hear a
forwardfolded seatback.
“click” and the seat locks securely.
5. Pull lever (E), fold the seat backward, and

store it into the luggage floor box.
3. Push knob (A) forward, and raise the seat-

back until it locks securely into place.
OBKE12E1 2-15
Seat and seat belts
After the operation, push lightly on the seat- 2. Pull up knob (A) on the side of the seatback, 4. Pull the seat lock lever (C).
back to confirm that it has actually been se- then tilt the seatback forward.
cured.
2
5. Fold the stands (D) towards you from the
3. Push lever (B) forward, then tilt the seatback seat side, while lifting the front end of the seat.
4. Refit the luggage floor board and head re- forward until the seatback touches the seat
straints. cushion.
Removing the third seat

E00404200177
To create more luggage space, you can remove the
third seat.
CAUTION
l For safety, do not allow children to re-
move or refit the seat.
l Be careful not to trap your hands or feet
when removing or refitting the seat. Also,
be careful not to drop or trip over the
seat. If necessary, have someone help you
remove it.
To remove
1. Remove the head restraints. Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 2-11.
2-16 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
6. Put down the front end of the seat to the 8. Hold the seat as shown in the illustration, re- To refit
floor. In this situation, the seat locking sys- move the seat by sliding it backward. 1. Push the seat’s mounting arms into the lug-
tem is unlocked automatically. gage compartment’s fixtures.
7. Remove the covers (E) by turning the knobs

(F) anticlockwise.
CAUTION 2. Confirm that the seat’s mounting arms are se-

cured by the hooks (A).
l Do not sit or place luggage on the re-
moved seat. Any weight placed on the fol-
ded seat could deform the seat mount-
ings, preventing the seat from being
locked securely onto the floor.
NOTE
l During the removal procedure, ensure that
both ends of the seat are moved evenly while
the seat is being pulled out. If this procedure
is not followed, the seat could catch on its se-
curing fixtures, making it difficult to remove.
G- Unlock
H- Lock
OBKE12E1 2-17
Seat and seat belts
3. Fold the stands forward from the seat side,

while lifting the front end of the seat.
Making a flat seat (Except for 3- 1. If your vehicle is equipped with a rear shelf (3-
door models) / cargo area cover (5-door mod-
4. Refit the covers on both sides of the luggage door models equipped with the els), remove it before performing the follow-
room. power seat) ing steps. Refer to “Rear shelf (3-door mod-
5. Push knob (B) forward, raise the seatback un- E00404300631 els)” on page 5-95 and “Cargo area cover (5-
til it locks securely into place. By removing the head restraints and fully reclining door models)” on page 5-96.
After the operation, push the seatback lightly the seatbacks of the seats, one large flat seat is ach- 2. Remove the head restraints from the front
to confirm that it has actually been secured. ieved. seats.
If your vehicle is equipped with the third seat
(5-door models), store the third seat into the
WARNING luggage floor box.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 2-11 and
2 l Never drive with passengers on the flat
seat. This is highly dangerous.
“Storage of the third seat” on page 2-14.
CAUTION
l To make a flat seat, stop the vehicle in a
safe place.
l Make sure the seat is adjusted by an
adult or with adult supervision for cor-
6. Refit the head restraints. rect and safe operation.
l When sliding the seat, be sure not to
catch your hand or leg.
l Do not walk around on top of the seats af-
ter they have been laid flat.
l To ensure the seats are locked securely, at- 3. Slide the front seats fully forward, then tip
tempt to move them back and forth. their seatbacks backward.
l Do not jump on, or impact the seatbacks On 5-door models, slide the front seats back-
heavily. ward until their seatbacks touch the second
l To raise the seatback, put a hand on the seat.
seatback and raise slowly. Never have a
child do this operation, or an unexpected
accident may result.
2-18 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Refer to “To adjust forward or backward” on NOTE Reverse the above procedure when returning
page 2-05 and “To recline the seatback” on l On 5-door models, each of the second seat’s the seat to the normal position.
page 2-06. sidebacks (A) is foldable. When either side
of the seatback is reclined to a new position, 3-door models
its sideback automatically folds inward ac-
cordingly.
5-door models
2
4. On 3-door models, remove the head re-

straints from the rear seat.
Recline the rear (3-door models) / second (5-
door models) seatback backward. Refer to 5. On 3-door models, store the front head re-
“To recline the seatback” on page 2-09. straints and rear centre head restraint be-
tween the front seats.
And store the rear outboard head restraints
on the side of the rear seat.
On 5-door models, store the front head re-
straints between the front seats.
The flat seat configuration is now complete.
OBKE12E1 2-19
Seat and seat belts
Seat belts WARNING NOTE

E00404800072 l You can check if the belt locks by pulling it
To protect you and your passengers in the event of forward quickly.
an accident, it is most important that the seat belts
l No modifications or additions should be
made by the user which will either pre-
are worn correctly while driving. vent the seat belt adjusting devices from To fasten
operating to remove slack, or prevent the 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
The front seat belts have a pretensioner system. seat belt assembly from being adjusted to the latch plate.
These belts are used the same way as a convention- remove slack.
al seat belt.
Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and force
l Never hold a child in your arms or on NOTE
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even l When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a
limiter system” on page 2-23. if you are wearing your seat belt. To do locked condition, pull the belts once forceful-
2 so risks severe or fatal injury to the child
in a collision or sudden stop.
ly and then return them. After that, pull the
belts out slowly once again.
WARNING l Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.
l Always place the shoulder belt over your l Always wear the lap portion of the belt 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a
shoulder and across your chest. Never over your hips. “click” is heard.
put it behind you or under your arm.
l One seat belt should be used by only one
person. Doing otherwise can be dangerous.
l The seat belt will provide its wearer with
maximum protection if the recliner seat-
back is placed in fully upright position.
When the seatback is reclined, there is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the belt, especially in a forward im-
pact accident, and may be injured by the
belt or by striking the instrument panel
or seatbacks.
l Seat belts should always be worn by ev-
ery adult who drives or rides in this vehi-
cle, and by all children who are tall
enough to wear seat belts properly.
3-point type seat belt (with emergency WARNING
Other children should always use proper locking mechanism)
E00404901243 l Never wear the lap portion of the belt
child restraint systems. This type of belt requires no length adjustment. across your abdomen. During accidents it
l Remove any twists when using the belt. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movement can press sharply against the abdomen
of the wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strong and increase the risk of injury.
shock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wear-
er’s body.
2-20 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt reminder/warning lamp Move the seat belt anchor down with the lock knob
WARNING E00409800338 (A) depressed. To move the anchor up, slide it with-
The seat belt warning lamp is located on the instru- out depressing the lock knob (A).
l The seat belts must not be twisted when
ment panel. A tone and warning lamp are used to
worn.
remind the driver to fasten the seat belt. Anchor down Anchor up
3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as de-

sired.
To unfasten
Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buck-
le.
2
WARNING
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion, the warning lamp will come on and a tone l When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set
it at a position that is sufficiently high so
will sound for about 6 seconds. If the driver’s seat
that the belt will make full contact with
belt remains unfastened for approximately 1 mi-
your shoulder but will not touch your neck.
nute later, the warning lamp will flash and the tone
sound intermittently (each 12 times) when the vehi-
cle is driven. If the driver subsequently unfastens
NOTE the seat belt while driving, the warning lamp and
tone will issue further warnings. And if the seat
l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold- belt remains unfastened, the warning lamp and tone
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could will issue further warnings each time the vehicle
damage the vehicle. starts moving from a stop. When the seat belt is fas-
tened, the warnings will stop.
Adjustable seat belt anchor (front

seats)
E00405000286
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
OBKE12E1 2-21
Seat and seat belts
Rear/second, third seat belt storage* Seat belt buckle storage Pregnant women restraint
E00405300029 Store the seat belt buckle in the storage pocket. E00405600064
When the seat belt is not in use, store it as shown
in the illustration.
Rear/Second seat
WARNING
3-door models
l Seat belts work for everyone, including
pregnant women. Pregnant women
should use the available seat belts. This
will reduce the likelihood of injury to
both the woman and the unborn child.
The lap belt should be worn across the
2 Third seat (5-door models) thighs and as snug against the hips as pos-
sible, but not across the waist. Consult
5-door models your doctor if you have any additional
questions or concerns.
Seat belt plate storage

After passing the belt through the rear notch (A), in-
sert the plate into the front notch (B).
2-22 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt pretensioner system and CAUTION Child restraint

force limiter system E00406401604
When transporting children in your vehicle, some
E00405700081 l If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con- type of child restraint system should always be
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat each sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point. used according to the size of the child. This is re-
have a seat belt equipped with a pretensioner system.
It is important to do so because unexpec- quired by law in most countries.
Pretensioner system ted activation of the pretensioner seat The regulations concerning driving with children in
E00405800747
belts could cause injuries. the front seat may differ from country to country.
The pretensioner system will retract their respec- You are advised to comply with the relevant regula-
tive seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the tions.
seat belt’s effectiveness, if there is a frontal impact NOTE
severe enough to injure the driver and/or front pas-
senger and the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
l The pretensioner seat belts will be activated
if the vehicle suffers a severe frontal impact, WARNING 2
“START” position. even if the seat belts are not worn.
l The pretensioner seat belts are designed to l When possible, put children in the rear
seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-
work only once. After the pretensioner seat
WARNING belts have been activated, we recommend
dren of all sizes and ages are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat rath-
you have them replaced by a MITSUBISHI
l To obtain the best results from your pre- MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
er than in the front seat.
tensioner seat belt, make sure you have ad- l Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
justed your seat correctly and wear your tute for a restraint system. Failure to use
seat belt properly. SRS warning lamp a proper restraint system can result in se-
E00405900083
vere or fatal injury to the child.
This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbags
and the pretensioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warn- l Each child restraint device or fixing is to
CAUTION ing lamp” on page 2-43.
l
be used only by one child.
When attaching a child restraint to the
l Installation of audio equipment or re-
Force limiter system rear seat, place the front seatbacks in the
pairs in the vicinity of the pretensioner E00406000153 upright position.
seat belts or floor console must be per- In the event of a collision, each force limiter sys- Otherwise, the child could be seriously in-
formed in line with MITSUBISHI tem will effectively absorb the load applied to the jured in the event of hard braking or a col-
MOTORS guidelines. It is important to seat belt to minimize the impact to the passenger. lision.
do so because the work could affect the
pretensioner systems.
OBKE12E1 2-23
Seat and seat belts
Caution for installing the child re- Use rearward facing child restraints in the rear seat
straint on vehicles with a front passen- or turn off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch. (Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page
ger airbag 2-36).
The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a
front passenger airbag.
Front passenger’s airbag ON
2
Infants and small children
E00406600641
When transporting infants and small children in
your vehicle, follow the instruction given below.
WARNING
WARNING lA REARWARD FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front
l Extreme Hazard! passenger seat if the front passenger’s air-
Do not use a rearward facing child re- bag has not been deactivated. The force
straint on a seat protected by an airbag in of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
front of it! serious injuries to the child. A rearward
facing child restraint should be used in
NOTE the rear seat.
l The labels may be in different positions de- l A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-
pending on the vehicle model. STRAINT should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible; if used in the front Instruction:
seat, adjust the seat to the most rearward l For small infants, an infant carrier should be
position. used. For small children whose height when
seated allows the shoulder belt to lie in con-
tact with the face or the throat, a child seat
should be used.
2-24 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
l The child restraint system should be appropri-

ate for the child’s weight and height and prop- WARNING
erly fit in the vehicle. For a higher degree of
safety: THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM l When the child restraint system is not in
use, keep your child restraint system se-
SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE REAR cured with the seat belt or remove it from
SEAT. the vehicle in order to prevent it from be-
l Before purchasing a child restraint system, ing thrown around inside the vehicle dur-
try installing it in the rear seat to make sure ing an accident.
there is a good fit. Because of the location of
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install NOTE
some manufacturer’s child restraint systems. l Depending on the seating position in the ve-
If the child restraint system can be pulled for- hicle and the child restraint system that you 2
ward or to either side easily on the seat cush- have, the child restraint can be attached us-
ion after the seat belt has been tightened, ing one of the following two locations:
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint • To the lower anchorage in the rear seat (3-
system. door models) / second seat (5-door mod-
els) ONLY if the child restraint has ISO-
FIX mountings (See page 2-31).
WARNING • To the seat belt (See page 2-32).
l When installing a child restraint system,
refer to the instructions provided by the Older children
manufacturer of the restraint system. Fail- E00406700147
ure to do so can result in severe or fatal Children who have outgrown the child restraint sys-
injury to the child. tem should be seated in the rear seat and wear com-
bination lap shoulder belt.
l After installation, push and pull the child
The lap portion of the belt should be snug and posi-
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is properly secured. tioned low on the abdomen so that it is below the
If the child restraint system is not instal- top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could in-
led securely, it may cause injury to the trude into the child’s abdomen during an accident
child or other occupants in the case of ac- and cause injury.
cident or sudden stops.
OBKE12E1 2-25
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

E00411400386
Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Mass group Size class Fixture Rear/second Outboard
Left side Right side
Carrycot F ISO/L1 X X
G ISO/L2 X X
0 - Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X
2 0+ - Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL*1, IL*2
D ISO/R2 X X
C ISO/R3 X X
I - 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X X
C ISO/R3 X X
B ISO/F2 IUF IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF, IL*3 IUF, IL*3
A ISO/F3 IUF IUF
II - 15 to 25 kg X X
III - 22 to 36 kg X X
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, prevent the head restraint from touching the child restraint system by removing it or adjusting its height.
Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:

l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems given in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
2-26 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
IL (Genuine part information)
Genuine part No. ECE No.

*1 MZ314393 (Child restraint system),
E1-04301146
MZ314394 (ISOFIX base)
*2 MZ314509 (Child restraint system)#,
E1-04301146
MZ314394 (ISOFIX base)
*2 MZ313045 E1-04301133
#: To be available in 2012
NOTE
2
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
OBKE12E1 2-27
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various seating positions

E00406801044
3-door models
Seating position
Front passenger Rear outboard
Mass group
Deactivated Air- Rear centre
Activated airbag Left side Right side
bag#1
0 - Up to 10 kg X X X X X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X L*1, L*2 L*1, L*2 L*1, L*2 L*1, L*2
2 I -9 to 18 kg L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4
II & III -15 to 36 kg L*5 L*5 L*5 L*5 L*5
#1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
CAUTION

l L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
L (Genuine part information)
Genuine parts No. ECE No.

*1 MZ314393 E1-04301146
*2 MZ314509#2 E1-04301146
*3 MZ313045 E1-04301133
*4 MZ314451 E1-04301203
*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169
2-28 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
#2: To be available in 2012
NOTE
l There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts to the Mass Group “0-Up to 10 kg”.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
5-door models
Seating position
Front passenger Intermediate Outboard 2
Mass group Intermediate
Deactivated Air- Rear outboard
Activated airbag Left side Right side Centre
bag#1
0 - Up to 10 kg X X X U U X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X L*1, L*2 L*1, L*2 U, L*1, L*2 U, L*1, L*2 L*1, L*2
I -9 to 18 kg L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4 L*3 U, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4
II & III -15 to 36 kg L*5 L*5 L*5 U, L*5 U, L*5 L*5
#1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
CAUTION
l When installing a “universal” category child restraint system on the intermediate outboard seat, adjust the seatback of the intermediate seat to its
most upright position.
l When installing a child restraint system that’s a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part for the mass group “0+ up to 13 kg” in a rear outboard
seating position, remove the head restraint from the rear outboard seating position and tip the rear outboard seatback fully rearward.

l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
l L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
OBKE12E1 2-29
Seat and seat belts
L (Genuine part information)
Genuine parts No. ECE No.

*1 MZ314393 E1-04301146
*2 MZ314509#2 E1-04301146
*3 MZ313045 E1-04301133
*4 MZ314451 E1-04301203
*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169
2 #2: To be available in 2012
NOTE
l There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts to the Mass Group “0-Up to 10 kg”.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
2-30 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Installing a child restraint system to Tether anchorage locations It is not necessary to retain the child restraint sys-
the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child re- There are 2 attachment points on the floor, located tem using the vehicle’s seat belts.
behind the rear seat (3-door models)/second seat (5-
straint mountings) and tether anchor- door models). These are for securing a child re-
age* straint system tether strap to both of the 2 rear (3-
E00408900387
door models)/second (5-door models) seating posi-
tions in your vehicle.
Lower anchorage location
Your vehicle’s rear seat (3-door models)/second
seat (5-door models) is fitted with lower anchorag-
es for attaching a child restraint system with ISO-
FIX mountings.
2
A- Child restraint system connectors
To install
1. Remove any foreign material in or around
the connectors and ensure the vehicle seat
belt is in its normal storage position.
2. Push the child restraint system’s connectors
WARNING (A) into the slit (B) in accordance with the in-
l Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings

The child restraint system is designed only for
seats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain the
child restraint system using the lower anchorages.
OBKE12E1 2-31
Seat and seat belts
structions provided by the child restraint sys- bracket (G) and tighten the top tether strap so 6. Push and pull the child restraint system in all
tem’s manufacturer. it is securely fastened. directions to be sure it is firmly secured.
To remove
Remove the child restraint in accordance with the
instructions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer.
Installing a child restraint system to a

3-point type seat belt (with emergency
locking mechanism)
E00408700428
2
3-door models
A- Connector
B- Slit
C- Vehicle seatback WARNING
D- Vehicle seat cushion
E- Lower anchorage l Do not latch the top tether strap hook to
any place, for example the luggage hook
(H), other than the tether anchorage
3. Remove the head restraint from the location bracket (I), or the child restraint system 5-door models
in which you wish to install a child restraint. could not be fastened securely, resulting
4. Open the cover from the tether anchorage in- in serious injury in the event of a collision.
stallation point by pulling it back with your
hand as illustrated.
5. Latch the top tether strap hook (F) of the
child restraint system to the tether anchorage
Installation:
1. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child re-
straint system. Make sure you hear a “click”
when you insert the latch plate in the buckle.
2. Remove all slack by using the locking clip.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in all direc-
tions to be sure it is secure.
2-32 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
WARNING Seat belt inspection Supplemental restraint system

E00406300475
l Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web- (SRS) - airbag
l For some types of child restraint, the lock- bing and for cracked or deformed metallic
E00407201407
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid The information written in this Supplemental Re-
personal injury during a collision or sud- parts. Replace the belt assembly if it is defec-
straint System (SRS) section contains important
den manoeuvre. tive.
points concerning the driver, front passenger, side
It must be fitted and used in accordance l A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral de-
and curtain airbags.
with the child restraint manufacturer’s in- tergent in warm water. After rinsing in water,
The SRS driver and front passenger airbags are de-
structions. let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt to signed to supplement the primary protection of the
The locking clip must be removed when bleach or re-dye the belts because this will af- driver and front passenger side seat belt systems by
the child restraint is removed. fect their characteristics. providing those occupants with protection against
head and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-se-
vere frontal collisions.
2
WARNING The SRS driver and front passenger airbags em-
l We recommend you to have all seat belt ploy a dual stage airbag system. The SRS driver
assemblies including retractors and at- and front passenger airbag is controlled by the im-
taching hardware inspected after any col- pact sensors (at the front of the vehicle) and the con-
lision. We recommend that seat belt as- trol unit (near the centre of the vehicle at floor level).
semblies in use during a collision be re-
placed unless the collision was minor and The SRS side airbag (if so equipped) is designed to
the belts show no damage and continue to supplement properly worn seat belts and provide
operate properly. the driver and front passenger with protection
l Do not attempt to repair or replace any against chest injury in certain moderate-to-severe
part of the seat belt assemblies; we recom- side impact collisions.
mend you to have this work done by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are de-
Service Point. Incorrect repair or replace- signed to supplement properly worn seat belts and
ment could reduce the effectiveness of the provide the driver and passenger with protection
belts and could result in serious injury in against head injuries in certain moderate-to-severe
the event of a collision. side impact collisions.
l Once the pretensioner has been activated,
it cannot be re-used. The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts; for
It must be replaced together with the re- maximum protection in all types of crashes and ac-
tractor. cidents, seat belts should ALWAYS be worn by ev-
eryone who drives or rides in this vehicle.
OBKE12E1 2-33
Seat and seat belts
How the Supplemental Restraint Sys- The airbags will operate only when the ignition
tem works switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. WARNING
The SRS includes the following components:
E00407300922
The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loud l Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or lean
head or chest close to the steering wheel
noise, and releases some smoke and powder, but or instrument panel. Do not put feet or
these conditions are not injurious, and do not indi- legs on or against the instrument panel.
cate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratory
problems may feel some temporary irritation from l Place all infants and small children in the
rear seat and properly restrained using
chemicals used to produce the deployment; open an appropriate child restraint system.
the windows after airbag deployment, if safe to do The rear seat is the safest place for in-
so. fants and children.
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment,
2 so there is little danger of obscured vision.
CAUTION
l Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid
speed. In certain situations, contact with
1- Airbag module (Driver)
inflating airbags can result in abrasions,
2- Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
light cuts, bruises, and the like.
3- Airbag module (Passenger)
4- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
WARNING
l IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
ERLY SEATED.
A driver or front passenger too close to WARNING
the steering wheel or instrument panel
during airbag deployment can be killed l Infants and small children should never
be unrestrained, stand up against the in-
or seriously injured. strument panel or be held in your arms
Airbags inflate very fast, and with great or on your lap. They could be seriously in-
force. jured or killed in a collision, including
If the driver and passengers are not prop- when the airbag inflates. They should be
erly seated and restrained, the airbags properly seated in the rear seat in an ap-
may not protect you properly, and could propriate child restraint system. See the
5- Side airbag modules* cause serious or fatal injuries when it in- “Child restraint” section of this owner’s
6- Curtain airbag modules* flates. manual.
2-34 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
Caution for installing the child re-

WARNING straint on vehicles with a front passen-
lA REARWARD FACING CHILD RE- ger airbag
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front E00408800331
passenger seat if the front passenger’s air- The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a
bag has not been deactivated. The force front passenger airbag.
of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child. A rearward
facing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
l A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-
Use rearward facing child restraints in the rear seat

STRAINT should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible; if it must be used in 2
or turn off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF the front passenger seat, adjust the seat
switch. (Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page to the most rearward position. Failure to
2-36.) do so could kill or cause serious injuries
to the child.
Front passenger’s airbag ON
WARNING
l Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child re-
straint on a seat protected by an airbag in
front of it!
NOTE
l The labels may be in different positions de-
pending on the vehicle model.
WARNING
l Older children should be seated in the
rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt,
with an appropriate booster seat if needed.
OBKE12E1 2-35
Seat and seat belts
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp To turn an airbag off
E00411500068 E00410600189
switch The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
E00410100070
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch can is located in the instrument panel.
be used to disable the front passenger’s airbag. If WARNING
you have a rearward facing child restraint system l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front • Always remove the key from the igni-
passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passen- tion switch before operating a front
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
to “To turn an airbag off” on page 2-36.) Failure to do so could adversely affect
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is lo- the airbag performance.
cated in the glove box.
2 • Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch after turning the ignition
switch from “ON” position to
“LOCK” position.
The SRS airbag system is designed to
The indication lamp normally comes on when the retain enough voltage to deploy the air-
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, and bag.
goes off a few seconds later. • Always remove the key from the front
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch af-
is turned OFF, the indication lamp will stay on to ter operating that switch. Failure to
show that the front passenger’s airbag is not opera- do so could lead to improper position
tional. When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF of the front passenger’s airbag ON-
switch is turned ON, the indication lamp goes off OFF switch.
to show that the front passenger’s airbag is opera- • Do not turn OFF the front passen-
tional. ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch except
when a rearward facing child re-
straint system is fitted to the front pas-
WARNING senger seat.
l Do not fit any accessory that makes the in-

dication lamp impossible to see, and do
not cover the indication lamp with a stick-
er. You would not be able to verify the sta-
tus of the passenger airbag system.
2-36 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and The front passenger’s airbag deploys at the same
WARNING turn the ignition to the “ON” position. The time as the driver’s airbag, even if the passenger
• If the indication lamp does not come front passenger’s airbag OFF indication seat is not occupied, and inflates at two different
on when the front passenger’s airbag lamp will stay on. rates according to the severity of the impact.
ON-OFF switch is turned OFF, do not
fit a rearward facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat. We
recommend you to have the system in-
spected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
• If the indication lamp remains on
when the front passenger’s airbag ON-
OFF switch is turned ON, do not al- 2
low anyone to sit on the front passen-
ger seat. We recommend you to have
the system inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
The front passenger’s airbag is now deactivated
and will not deploy until switched on again.
To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:
1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s air- Driver’s and passenger’s front airbag
bag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the system
“OFF” position. E00407400372
2. Remove the key from the key opening of the The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cov-
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. er in the middle of the steering wheel. The front pas-
senger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panel
above the glove box.
The driver’s airbag inflates at two different rates ac-
cording to the severity of the impact.
OBKE12E1 2-37
Seat and seat belts
Deployment of front airbags Because frontal collisions can easily move you out Examples of some typical conditions are shown in
E00407501279 of position, it is important to always properly wear the illustration.
your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you
The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY in a safe distance from the steering wheel and in-
when… strument panel during the initial stages of airbag de-
ployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fa-
tal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicle
are your primary means of protection in a collision.
The SRS airbags are designed to provide additional
protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safe-
ty of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear
2 your seat belts.
The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when…

With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehi- 1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-
cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shock row objects
to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehi- 2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck
1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at a cle body’s front area may deform significantly as it 3- Oblique frontal impacts
speed of approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) or absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the
higher front airbags may not deploy irrespective of the de- Because the front airbags do not protect the occu-
2- Moderate-to-severe frontal impact within the formation and damage to the vehicle body. pant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to al-
shaded area between the arrows ways properly wear your seat belts.
The front airbags will deploy if the severity of im-

pact is above the designed threshold level, compa-
rable to an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) colli-
sion when impacting straight into a solid wall that
does not move or deform. If the severity of the im-
pact is below the above threshold level, the front air-
bags may not deploy. However, this threshold
speed will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object that absorbs the impact by either
deforming or moving (for example, another station-
ary vehicle, pole or a guard rail).
2-38 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DE- Examples of some typical conditions are shown in
PLOY when… the illustration. WARNING
The front airbags are not designed to deploy in con- l Do not attach anything to the steering
ditions where they cannot typically provide protec- wheel padded cover, such as trim materi-
tion to the occupant. Such conditions are shown in al, badges, etc. It might strike and injure
the illustration. an occupant if the airbag inflates.
l Do not set anything on, or attach any-
thing to, the instrument panel above the
glove box. It might strike and injure an oc-
cupant if the airbag inflates.
2
1- Collision with an elevated median/island or
kerb
2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits
1- Rear end collisions the ground
2- Side collisions
3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Because the front airbags may deploy in certain
Because the front airbags do not protect the occu- types of unexpected impacts as shown in the illus-
pant in all types of collisions, be sure to always prop- tration that can easily move you out of position, it
erly wear your seat belts. is important to always properly wear your seat
belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe dis- WARNING
The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when… tance from the steering wheel and instrument panel l Do not attach accessories to, or put them
The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of the during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The in front of, the windscreen. These objects
vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe impact (under- initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful could restrict the airbag inflation, or
carriage damage). and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries if strike and injure an occupant if the air-
you contact it at this stage. bags inflate.
l Do not put packages, pets or other ob-
jects between the airbags and the driver
or front passenger. It could affect airbag
performance, or could cause injury when
the airbag inflates.
OBKE12E1 2-39
Seat and seat belts
The label shown here is attached to the seatbacks Deployment of side airbags and cur-
WARNING with a side airbag. tain airbags
l Right after the airbag inflation, several E00407701301
airbag system components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you could be burned. The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DE-
l The airbag system is designed to work on- SIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
ly once. Once the airbags have deployed, The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed
they will not work again. They must to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate-to-
promptly be replaced, and we recom- severe side impact to the middle of the passenger
mend you to have the entire airbag sys- compartment.
tem inspected by a MITSUBISHI The typical condition is shown in the illustration.
2 MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Side airbag system*

E00407600198
The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and Curtain airbag system*
front passenger seatbacks. E00409100243
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the The curtain airbags are contained in the front pil-
side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no lars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is de-
passenger in the front seat. signed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that
is impacted, even with no passenger in the front
seat or rear (3-door models)/second (5-door mod-
els) seat.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary

means of protection in a collision. The side airbags
and curtain airbags are designed to provide addition-
al protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safe-
ty of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear
your seat belts.
2-40 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOT Examples of some typical conditions are shown in Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not
DEPLOY when… the illustration. protect the occupant in all types of side collisions,
With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’s be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
body structure is designed to absorb the shock to
help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOT
body’s side area may deform significantly as it ab- DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
sorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the The side airbags and curtain airbags are not de-
side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy ir- signed to deploy in conditions where they cannot
respective of the deformation and damage to the ve- usually provide protection to the occupant. Typical
hicle body. Also, depending on the location of the conditions are shown in the illustration.
impact, the side airbags and curtain airbags may
not deploy simultaneously.
2
1- Side impacts in an area away from the passen-
ger compartment
2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle col-
lides with the side of vehicle
3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-
row object
1- Head-on collisions
2- Rear end collisions
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not

protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be
sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
4- Oblique side impacts

5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
OBKE12E1 2-41
Seat and seat belts
WARNING WARNING WARNING

l The side airbags and curtain airbags are l Do not place any objects near or in front l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
designed to supplement the driver and pas- of the seatback of either front seat. They ted object on the coat hook.
senger seat belts in certain side impacts. could interfere with proper side airbag in- If the curtain airbag was activated, any
Seat belts should always be worn proper- flation, and also could cause injury if such item could be propelled away with
ly, and the driver and passenger should thrown free by side airbag deployment. great force and could prevent the curtain
sit well back and upright without leaning l Do not place stickers, labels or additional airbag from inflating correctly. Hang
against the window or door. trim on the seatback of either front seat. clothes directly on the coat hook (without
l The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate They could interfere with proper side air- using a hanger).
with great force. The driver and passen- bag inflation. Make sure there are no heavy or sharp ob-
2 ger should not put their arms out of the
window, and should not lean against the
l Do not install seat covers on seats with
side airbags. Do not re-cover the seats
jects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
door, in order to reduce the risk of seri- with side airbags. They could interfere l Do not allow a child to lean against or
ous or possible fatal injury from the de- with proper side airbag inflation. close to the front door even if the child is
ploying side airbag and curtain airbag. l Do not attach a microphone (A) or any seated in a child restraint system.
other device or object around the part The child’s head should also not lean
where the curtain airbags activate such against or be close to the area where the
as on the windscreen, side door glass, side airbag and curtain airbag are loca-
front and rear pillars and roof side or as- ted. It is dangerous if the side airbag and
sist grips. When the curtain airbags in- curtain airbag inflate.
flate, the microphone or other device or Failure to follow all of these instructions
object will be hurled with great force or could lead to serious or fatal injury to the
the curtain airbags may not activate cor- child.
rectly, resulting in death or serious injury. l We recommend work around and on the
side airbags and curtain airbags system
to be done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
WARNING
l Do not allow any rear seat occupant to
hold onto the seatback of either front
seat, in order to reduce the risk of injury
from a deploying side airbag. Special
care should be taken with children.
2-42 OBKE12E1
Seat and seat belts
SRS warning lamp

E00407801142 WARNING WARNING
There is a Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”)
warning lamp on the instrument panel. The system
• The SRS warning lamp does not illu- l On vehicles equipped with side airbags,
minate when you start the vehicle. do not modify your front seats, centre pil-
checks itself and the lamp tells you if there is a prob-
• The SRS warning lamp does not go lar and centre console.
lem. When the ignition switch is turned to the
out after several seconds. It can adversely affect SRS performance
“ON” or “START” position, the warning lamp
• The SRS warning lamp illuminates and lead to possible injury. If you found
should illuminate for several seconds and then
while driving. any tear, scratch, crack or damage to the
should go out. This means the system is ready. If
seat fabric near the side airbag, the por-
an SRS airbag or pretensioner seat belt is not oper-
tion of the front and rear pillars and roof
ating properly, the warning lamp comes on and SRS servicing side rail, you should have the SRS inspec-
stays on.
2
E00407901390
ted by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbag
ized Service Point.
and the seat belt pretensioner system.
WARNING
NOTE
l We recommend any maintenance per-
formed on or near the components of the l When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
SRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHI to some other person, we urge you to alert
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. the new owner that it is equipped with the
Improper work on the SRS components SRS and refer the new owner to the applica-
or wiring could result in inadvertent de- ble section in this owner’s manual.
ployment of the airbags, or could render l If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
the SRS inoperative; either situation line with local legislation and contact a
could result in serious injury. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point to safely dismantle the airbag system.
l Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
nents. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
WARNING front bumper or body structure can ad-
versely affect SRS performance and lead
l If any of the following conditions occur, to possible injury.
the SRS and/or seat belt pretensioners l If your vehicle has sustained any damage,
are not working properly, and we recom- we recommend you to have the SRS in-
mend you to have it inspected by a spected to ensure it is in proper working
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized order.
Service Point immediately.
OBKE12E1 2-43
OBKE12E1
Instruments and controls
Instruments...................................................................................3-02
Indication and warning lamps.......................................................3-07
Indication lamps...........................................................................3-08
Warning lamps..............................................................................3-09
Centre information display*.........................................................3-11
Combination headlamps and dipper switch..................................3-31
Headlamp levelling.......................................................................3-33
Turn-signal lever...........................................................................3-35
Hazard warning flasher switch.....................................................3-35
Fog lamp switch............................................................................3-36
Wiper and washer switch..............................................................3-37 3
Wiper de-icer switch*...................................................................3-42
Rear window demister switch.......................................................3-42
Horn switch...................................................................................3-43
OBKE12E1
Instruments Tachometer Odometer/Tripmeter/Service remind-

E00500100241 E00500300458
The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min).
er
E00500600998
The tachometer helps you to obtain more economi- With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, od-
cal driving and also warns you of excessive engine ometer, tripmeter, and service reminder indications
speeds (Red zone). are given.
3 1-
2-
Speedometer (km/h or mph + km/h)
Tachometer
3- Tripmeter reset button/Daytime dipper button
4- Fuel gauge
5- Odometer/Tripmeter/Service reminder A- Odometer/Tripmeter/Service reminder
6- Water temperature gauge B- Reset button
CAUTION
l When driving, watch the tachometer to TRIP
make sure that the engine speed indica- ODO
tion does not rise into the red zone (exces-
sive engine rpm).
TRIP
ODO
Service
reminder
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehi-
cle has travelled.
3-02 OBKE12E1
Tripmeter NOTE Service reminder

The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled dur- l When disconnecting the battery terminal for
E00517700092
ing a particular trip or period. a long time, the memory of tripmeter display
There are two tripmeter displays: TRIP and TRIP and are cleared, and the dis-
. play returns to “0”.
TRIP can be used to measure the distance trav-
elled since the current trip began. At the same time,
TRIP can be used to measure the distance from
an intermediate location.
To switch the display between TRIP and TRIP
, press the reset button (B) less than 1 second.
NOTE
l If you do not push the button for about
10 seconds while the service reminder is
showing, the display will return to the odom-
The service reminder shows the number of months 3
(1) and driving distance (3) remaining until the
eter indication. next 12-monthly (15,000 km or 9,000 miles) inspec-
l The odometer, tripmeter, and service remind- tion. When the next inspection is nearly due, the dis-
er indications are given for 30 seconds after play shows “-----”. At this time, a spanner mark (2)
the ignition switch has been turned to the is shown for a few seconds whenever the ignition
“ACC” or “LOCK” position. switch is turned from the “OFF” position to the
l After the odometer, tripmeter, and service re- “ON” position.
minder indications have gone off, they come
back on for about 30 seconds if either of the
following actions takes place.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The reset button is pressed.
To reset the tripmeter
To return the display to “0”, press the reset button
(B) for more than 2 seconds. Only the currently dis-
played value will be reset.
OBKE12E1 3-03
1. The display shows the number of months For further information, we recommend you to con- 1. Push the reset button (D) to view the number
and driving distance remaining until the next sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service of months and driving distance remaining un-
inspection. Point. til the next inspection.
2. When the next inspection is nearly due, the 2. Give the reset button (D) a long push (at
display shows “-----”. Resetting the service reminder least two seconds to make the spanner mark
For further information, we recommend you With the ignition switch in the “OFF” position, it is (A) start flashing. (If you do not touch the re-
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- possible to reset the spanner mark (A) and “-----” set button for 10 seconds while the spanner
ized Service Point. At this time, a spanner indication (B). When they have been reset, the num- mark is flashing, the display will revert to its
mark is shown for a few seconds whenever ber of months and driving distance remaining until original indication.)
the ignition switch is turned from the “OFF” the next inspection are shown and the spanner 3. Give the reset button (D) a gentle push while
position to the “ON” position. mark (A) is no longer shown every time the igni- the spanner mark is flashing. The “-----” indi-
tion switch is turned from the “OFF” position to cation (B) will change to “cLEAr” (C).
the “ON” position. 4. The number of months and driving distance
remaining until the next inspection will be
shown.
3
CAUTION
l Daily and periodic inspections and main-
tenance are your responsibility. Be sure
to perform them to help prevent acci-
dents and breakdowns.
3. When the vehicle is inspected at a

NOTE
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service l It is not possible to reset the “-----” indica-
Point, the number of months and driving dis- tion (B) with the ignition switch in the “ON”
tance remaining until the next inspection will position.
be shown. l When a certain distance has been driven and
a certain period has elapsed after appearance
of the “-----” indication (B), the indication is
NOTE automatically reset and the number of
l The indicated distance decreases in steps of months until the next periodic inspection is
100 km or (100 miles). The indicated num- shown.
ber of months decreases in steps of one month.
l If you accidentally reset the display, consult
l It is possible to change the settings for the a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
service reminder. ice Point.
3-04 OBKE12E1
Fuel gauge l The fuel gauge will not give an accurate indi- NOTE
E00500700856 cation if the vehicle is refuelled with the igni- l On inclines or curves, due to the movement
The fuel gauge indicates the fuel level in the fuel tion switch in the “ON” position. of fuel in the tank, the low fuel warning lamp
tank when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. l When the engine on diesel-powered vehicles may indicate incorrectly.
fails to operate due to running out of fuel, it
may sometimes be difficult to start after refu-
eling. This is due to air entering the fuel sys- Water temperature gauge
E00500800408
tem. Therefore, air must be bled from the sys- The water temperature gauge indicates the engine
tem. (Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in
page 6-06.) the “ON” position.
Fuel lid mark
The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank fill-
er door is located on the right side of the vehicle.
Low fuel warning lamp
E00508100595
The warning lamp (A) illuminates when the fuel lev-
3
F- Full
E- Empty el is getting low (approx. 10 litres) with the igni-
tion switch in the “ON” position. Refuel as soon as
possible.
CAUTION
l For petrol-powered vehicles, do not drive
with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause damage to the cat-
alytic converter. CAUTION
l For diesel-powered vehicles, do not drive
l If the indication needle enters the H zone
with an extremely low fuel level; running
while the engine is running, it indicates
out of fuel could cause damage to the fuel
that the engine is possibly overheating. Im-
system.
mediately park your vehicle in a safe
place and make the necessary correc-
NOTE tions. (Refer to “Engine overheating” on
page 6-04.)
l When the vehicle has been refuelled, the point- While driving, care should always be tak-
er in the fuel gauge takes a short while to sta-
bilize. en to maintain the normal operating tem-
perature.
OBKE12E1 3-05
Daytime dipper button (meter illumi-

nation control)
E00508800097
Turn the dial to adjust the illumination (meter, mul-
ti centre display audio system’s control panel, heat-
er control panel, etc.) to the desired brightness.
Brightness
1- To reduce brightness
2- To increase brightness
NOTE
l The meter brightness stays memorized.
3-06 OBKE12E1
Indication and warning lamps

E00501502086
1- Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication lamps ® p. 3-08 15- “SONAR OFF” indication lamp* ® p. 4-52
2- Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 3-08 16- Diesel particulate filter (DPF) warning lamp* ® p. 4-15
3- Position lamp indication lamp ® p. 3-08 17- Diesel preheat indication lamp (diesel-powered vehicles) ® p. 3-08
4- Front fog lamp indication lamp* ® p. 3-08 18- Fuel filter indication lamp (diesel-powered vehicles) ® p. 3-08
5- Automatic headlamp levelling warning lamp* ® p. 3-34 19- Check engine warning lamp ® p. 3-10
6- High-beam indication lamp ® p. 3-08 20- Charge warning lamp ® p. 3-10
7- Active stability control function OFF indication lamp ® p. 4-43 21- Oil pressure warning lamp ® p. 3-10
8- Active stability control function indication lamp/Active traction control func- 22- Low fuel warning lamp ® p. 3-05
tion indication lamp ® p. 4-43, 4-44 23- 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp ® p. 4-26
9- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp ® p. 4-40 24- The rear differential lock indication lamp* ® p. 4-29
10- Brake warning lamp ® p. 3-09 25- Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 3-11
11- Supplement Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp ® p. 2-43 26- Service reminder ® p. 3-03
12- Seat belt warning lamp ® p. 2-21 27- Sports mode indicator (vehicles with A/T) ® p. 4-21
13- A/T fluid temperature warning lamp (vehicles with A/T) ® p. 4-22 28- Selector lever position indication lamps (vehicles with A/T, “N” indication
14- CRUISE indication lamp* ® p. 4-45 lamp is used also as A/T warning lamp) ® p. 4-20
OBKE12E1 3-07
Indication lamps Position lamp indication lamp

E00508900102
l When the engine has not been star-
ted within about 5 seconds after
E00501600012
This lamp illuminates with the lamp the diesel preheat indication lamp
Turn-signal indication lamps/ switch at “ ” or “ ” position went out, return the ignition
Hazard warning indication switch to the “LOCK” position.
lamps Then, turn the switch to the “ON”
Diesel preheat indication lamp position to preheat the engine
E00501700068
These indication lamps blink on and off (diesel-powered vehicles) again.
E00502300146
when a turn-signal lamp is operating. This indication lamp illuminates when l When the engine is warm, the die-
the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” sel preheat indication lamp does
position. As the glow plug becomes hot, not come on even if the ignition
NOTE
the lamp goes out and the engine can be switch is placed in the “ON” posi-
l If the blinking is too fast, the
tion.
cause may be a blown lamp bulb started.
or a faulty turn-signal connection.
3 When the hazard warning lamp switch is CAUTION Fuel filter indication lamp (die-
pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash
l If the diesel preheat indication sel-powered vehicles)
on and off continuously. lamp comes on after the engine E00509900239
is started, the engine speed may This indication lamp illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
High-beam indication lamp not rise above the idling speed
position and goes off after the engine
E00501800072 because of fuel freezing. In this
This indication lamp illuminates when case, keep the engine idling for has started. If it lights up while the en-
the high-beam is used. about ten minutes, then turn gine is running, it indicates that water
off the ignition switch and im- has accumulated inside the fuel filter; if
mediately turn it on again to this happens, remove the water from the
Front fog lamp indication fuel filter. Refer to “Removal of water
confirm that the diesel preheat
lamp* indication lamp is off. from the fuel filter (diesel-powered vehi-
E00501900132 cles only)” on page 6-06.
This indication lamp illuminates while When the lamp goes out, you can re-
the front fog lamps are on. sume driving. If it either does not go out
NOTE
l If the engine is cold, the diesel pre- or comes on from time to time, we rec-
Rear fog lamp indication lamp heat indication lamp is on for a lon- ommend you to have the vehicle inspec-
E00502000084
ger time. ted.
This lamp illuminates while the rear fog
lamp is on.
3-08 OBKE12E1
Warning lamps NOTE

CAUTION
E00502400017 l Depressing the brake pedal repeat-
edly may turn on the brake warn- ner when brake performance
Brake warning lamp (brake ing lamp, ABS warning lamp and has deteriorated.
warning buzzer) brake warning buzzer. It is normal • Depress the brake pedal
E00502501712
if the lamp goes out and the buz- harder than usual.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition zer stops sounding after a few sec-
switch is turned to the “ON” position, Even if the brake pedal
onds. moves down to the very end
and goes off after a few seconds.
Always make sure that the lamp goes off of its possible stroke, keep it
pressed down hard.
before driving.
With the ignition switch in the “ON” po-
CAUTION • Should the brakes fail, use
sition, the brake warning lamp illumi- engine braking to reduce
l In the situations listed below,
your speed and pull the park-
nates under the following conditions: brake performance may be com-
ing brake lever.
l When the parking brake lever has promised or the vehicle may be-
Depress the brake pedal to
been engaged.
l When the brake fluid level in the
come unstable if brakes are ap-
plied suddenly; consequently,
operate the stop lamp to
alert the vehicles behind you.
3
reservoir falls to a low level. avoid driving at high speeds or
l When the brake force distribution applying the brakes suddenly.
function or the brake system is not Furthermore, the vehicle NOTE
operating correctly. should be brought to a stop in a
safe location and to have it
l In certain cases immediately after
the engine has been started or
Brake warning buzzer checked. when the brake pedal is depressed
When there is a danger of brake perform- • The brake warning lamp repeatedly, a noise generated by
ance becoming compromised, a buzzer does not illuminate when operation of brake devices may be
will sound to alert the driver. If this buz- the parking brake is applied heard coming from the engine com-
zer should continue to sound, park your or does not turn off when partment. At this time, you may
vehicle in a safe place and we recom- the parking brake is re- feel a shock from the brake pedal
mend you to have it checked. leased. if you depress it. This type of
• The ABS warning lamp and noise or shock is normal and there
brake warning lamp illumi- is no need for concern. In fact,
nate at the same time. they indicate that the correspond-
For details, refer to “ABS ing devices are operating normally.
warning lamp” on page
4-40.
l The brake system uses brake fluid
pressurized by the pump.
• The brake warning buzzer Please refer to “Braking” on page
does not turn off. 4-37.
l The vehicle should be brought
to a halt in the following man-
OBKE12E1 3-09
Check engine warning lamp

E00502601696 CAUTION CAUTION
This lamp is a part of an onboard diag-
nostic system which monitors the emis- l If the lamp does not illuminate l If it illuminates while the en-
when the ignition switch is gine is running, there is a prob-
sions, engine control system or automat-
turned to the “ON” position, lem in the charging system. In
ic transmission control systems.
we recommend you to have the this case, immediately park
If a problem is detected in one of these
system checked. your vehicle in a safe place and
systems, this lamp illuminates.
Although your vehicle will usually be l If the lamp illuminates while we recommend you to have it
the engine is running, avoid checked.
drivable and not need towing, we recom-
driving at high speeds and we
mend you to have the system checked as
recommend you to have the sys-
soon as possible.
tem checked.
[Vehicles to comply with the Euro 3 and
Accelerator pedal and brake Oil pressure warning lamp
pedal response may be negative- E00502800529
Euro 4 regulation] This lamp illuminates when the ignition
ly influenced under these condi-
3 This lamp will also illuminate for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is
tions. switch is turned to the “ON” position,
and goes off after the engine has started.
turned to the “ON” position. If it does If it illuminates while the engine is run-
not go off after a few seconds, we recom- NOTE ning, the oil pressure is too low. Turn
mend you to have the vehicle checked. the engine off and have it inspected.
l The engine electronic control mod-
ule accommodating the onboard di-
[Vehicles to comply with the Euro 5] agnostic system has various fault
This lamp will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned “ON”, and goes
data (especially about the exhaust CAUTION
emission) stored.
off after the engine has started. If it does This data will be erased if a bat- l This warning lamp does not in-
not go off after the engine has started, tery cable is disconnected which dicate the amount of oil level in
we recommend you to have the system will make a rapid diagnosis diffi- the engine. This must be deter-
checked. cult. Do not disconnect a battery mined by checking the oil level
cable when the check engine warn- on the dipstick, while the en-
ing lamp is ON. gine is switched off.
CAUTION l If this lamp illuminates when
the engine oil level is not low,
l Prolonged driving with this have it inspected.
lamp on may cause further dam- Charge warning display
age to the emission control sys-
l If you continue driving with
E00502700472 low engine oil level or with this
tem. It could also affect fuel This lamp illuminates when the ignition warning lamp illuminated, en-
economy and drivability. switch is turned to the “ON” position, gine seizure may occur.
and goes off after the engine has started.
3-10 OBKE12E1
Door ajar warning lamp

E00503300635
Centre information display*
E00517800295
This lamp illuminates when a door or
the backdoor is either open or incomplete-
ly closed.
If the vehicle speed reaches approximate-
CAUTION
ly 8 km/h (5 mph) with a door or the back- l The driver should not operate the display
door open or incompletely closed, the while the vehicle is in motion.
warning lamp flashes 8 times and a buz-
zer simultaneously sounds 8 times as a
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” po-
warning.
sition, the screen switches on automatically.
CAUTION NOTE
l Placing a cellular phone in the monitor’s
l Before moving your vehicle,
check that the warning lamp is
small storage compartment may weaken the
phone’s reception. This does not indicate a 3
OFF. fault with the system.
l Use of wireless devices such as transceivers
or a cellular phone near the monitor may
NOTE
make the following condition on the display.
l On vehicles with keyless entry sys- This does not indicate a fault with the system.
tem, the lamp remains illuminated
• The screen goes dark temporarily.
for a certain period and then goes
• The compass may not show the correct di-
out automatically.
rection.
l Buzzer settings can be changed at
l Depending on the angle of view, you may
a your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
see reddish horizontal lines on the monitor.
Authorized Service Point to:
The lines are a characteristic of the vacuum
• No buzzer operation (buzzer
fluorescent display (VFD) used in the moni-
disabled)
tor. They do not indicate a fault.
• Continuous buzzer operation
OBKE12E1 3-11
Type 1 Type 2
3
1- Digital clock ® p. 3-20 6- Disc number 9- “ADJ” button
Indicates the time. Shows the disc number. When no disc is in- Used for adjusting the clock and for selecting
2- Electronic compass* serted, it does not show a disc number. settings displays.
This display shows the direction of the vehicle. 7- “INFO” button 10- Display for function buttons
3- Frozen road warning ® p. 3-17 Used to select various kinds of information This display shows the options available for
Gives an indication when the outside temper- for display. each function button.
ature is 3 °C or lower. 8- Function buttons
4- Outside temperature ® p. 3-17 Press this button to select options shown in
5- Centre information display indications the display.
Indicates details of each display.
3-12 OBKE12E1
Adjusting the time

E00518000047
Following modes are available for clock adjustment: NOTE Changing the information display
l For vehicles with MITSUBISHI genuine au- l Automatic clock adjustment does not take E00517900209
dio: place while a settings display is shown. Every time the “INFO” button is pressed lightly,
“Automatic mode” and “Manual mode” the display can be changed to the following:
l Except for vehicles with MITSUBISHI genu- Manual mode
ine audio: The manual mode is also available in case the auto-
“Manual mode” only matic mode shows the incorrect time when the ad-
jacent local RDS stations are located in a different
Automatic mode (MITSUBISHI genuine audio) time zone. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)” on
The automatic adjustment mode can set the local pages 5-17, 5-32.
time automatically by using the signal from the lo- It is possible to manually adjust the time.
cal RDS stations. In this mode, “CT” (A) (Clock Refer to “Changing the clock settings” on page
Time: sent with the RDS signal) is shown in the au- 3-20.
dio display.
OBKE12E1 3-13
1- Audio information ® p. 5-12

2- Average fuel consumption ® p. 3-15
3- Driving range ® p. 3-15
4- Average speed ® p. 3-16
5- Outside temperature ® p. 3-17
6- Altimeter ® p. 3-17
7- Barometer ® p. 3-18
8- Calendar ® p. 3-19
9- Clock-only ® p. 3-19
10- Blank ® p. 3-19
3-14 OBKE12E1
Average fuel consumption l When the average fuel consumption cannot l When you turn the ignition switch to the
E00518200238 be calculated, “--.-” will be shown. “ON” position about 4 hours (or more) after
The average fuel consumption during the period
since the last reset is shown in (A) and the momen-
l The average and momentary fuel consump- turning it from the “ON” position to the
tion change depending on the driving condi- “ACC” or “LOCK” position in the auto reset
tary fuel consumption in (C). The average value of tion (road condition, driving behavior, etc.). mode, the average fuel consumption indica-
the fuel consumption is graphed every 5 minutes The indications may differ from the actual tion will automatically be reset.
and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B). fuel consumption. Therefore, it is recommen-
When you press the “MANUAL” function button ded to use the indications as reference.
in the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed to Driving range
the manual reset mode. When you press the “AU-
l The unit indication can be changed to your de- E00518300066
sired setting {km/L, L/100 km, mpg (UK This value (A) shows the distance (in km or miles)
TO” function button in the manual reset mode, the GALLON), or mpg (US GALLON)}. that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the fuel
mode will be changed to the auto reset mode. Refer to “User customization” on page 3-25. tank. The driving range is graphed every 5 minutes
and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).
Resetting the average fuel consumption
Auto reset mode
Press the “RESET” function button to reset the aver-
age fuel consumption indication.
3
Manual reset mode
NOTE
l When the driving range is 50 km (30 miles)
or less, the display shows “----”.
NOTE When it is 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or more,
NOTE l The average fuel consumption can be reset “3,000 km” or “2,000 miles” will be shown.
separately for the auto reset mode and for the
l When you turn the ignition switch to the
manual reset mode.
l When the driving range cannot be measured,
“ON” position after turning it from the “ON” the display shows “----”.
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
in the manual reset mode, the auto reset
mode will automatically be selected.
OBKE12E1 3-15
l The driving range is shown based on the ac- NOTE NOTE

cumulated fuel consumption data, however, l Pressing the “RESET” function button will l When you turn the ignition switch to the
may be changed depending on the driving con- not reset the indication (C). “ON” position after turning it from the “ON”
dition (road condition, driving behavior, l It is possible to set the display unit to km or position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
etc.). If the battery terminals are disconnec- miles. in the manual reset mode, the auto reset
ted, the accumulated fuel consumption data Refer to “User customization” on page 3-25. mode will automatically be selected.
will be erased. It is recommended to use the l When the average speed cannot be calcula-
indication as reference. ted, “---” will be shown.
Average speed
l When the vehicle is fueled, the driving range E00518400139 l The average and momentary speed change de-
will be updated. However, if the amount of The average speed during the period since the last pending on the driving condition (road condi-
fueling is small, the indication may not be cor- reset is shown in (A) and the momentary speed in tion, driving behavior, etc.). The indications
rect. Therefore, fill up the tank as much as (C). The average value of the vehicle speed is graph- may differ from the actual speed. Therefore,
possible in case of fueling. ed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours it is recommended to use the indications as
l When the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope, are shown in (B). reference.
the value of the driving range may increase. When you press the “MANUAL” function button l The unit indication can be changed to your de-
3 This is caused by the fuel movement inside
the tank on the slope and is not deemed as a
in the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed to
the manual reset mode. When you press the “AU-
sired setting (km/h or mph).
Refer to “User customization” on page 3-25.
failure. TO” function button in the manual reset mode, the
mode will be changed to the auto reset mode. Resetting the average speed
Resetting the driving range Press the “RESET” function button to reset the aver-
Press the “RESET” function button to reset the driv- age vehicle speed.
ing range plotted in graph. Auto reset mode
Manual reset mode
3-16 OBKE12E1
NOTE Resetting the outside temperature When the outside air temperature drops below
l The average speed can be reset separately for Press the “RESET” function button to reset the about 3 °C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the out-
the auto reset mode and for the manual reset graph of the outside temperature. side air temperature symbol (A) flashes for about
mode. 10 seconds.
l When you turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position about 4 hours (or more) after
turning it from the “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position in the auto reset
mode, the average speed indication will auto-
matically be reset.
Outside temperature
E00518500071
The outside temperature is graphed every 5 mi-
nutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in
(A). The current outside temperature is shown in (B). 3
NOTE
l Depending on factors such as the driving con- CAUTION
ditions, the displayed temperature may vary
from the actual outside temperature. l There is a danger the road might be icy,
l It is possible to set the display unit to °C or °F. even when this symbol is not flashing, so
Refer to “User customization” on page 3-25. please take care when driving.
Frozen road warning
This shows the temperature outside the vehicle. Altimeter
E00518600056
The current elevation in units of 50 m (200 ft) is
shown in (A). The elevation is graphed every
5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown
in (B).
OBKE12E1 3-17
To adjust the elevation NOTE Barometer

It is possible to adjust the currently indicated eleva- l The elevation is determined from changes in
E00518700031
tion using the following function buttons: This display shows the atmospheric pressure at the
atmospheric pressure. Depending on weather
present location in (A). The atmospheric pressure
conditions, the indicated elevation may differ
values are graphed every 5 minutes and the data for
from the actual elevation. Variations in atmos-
up to 4 hours are shown in (B).
pheric pressure can cause different elevations
to be shown even in the same location. This
behavior does not indicate a fault. Use the in-
dication as a guide only.
Resetting the elevation
Press the “RESET” function button to reset the ele-
vation plotted in graph.
3
“+”- Adjustment of elevation
The elevation increases by 50 m
(200 ft) every time you lightly push Resetting the atmospheric pressure
the “+” button. Press the “RESET” function button to reset the at-
If you continue pressing the button mospheric pressure plotted in graph.
for about 2 seconds or more, the ele-
vation indication is fast-forwarded.
Then the setting is changed to the el-
evation selected.
“-”- Adjustment of elevation NOTE
The elevation decreases by 50 m
(200 ft) every time you lightly push l Pressing the “RESET” function button will
not reset the indication (C).
the “-” button.
If you continue pressing the button l It is possible to set the display unit to m or ft.
for about 2 seconds or more, the ele-
vation indication is fast-forwarded.
Then the setting is changed to the el-
evation selected.
3-18 OBKE12E1
NOTE Clock-only NOTE

E00518900017
l Pressing the “RESET” function button will
Only the clock is shown. The time notation can be l If you operate the audio system, the audio dis-
not reset the indication (C). play pops up.
changed to your desired setting. (12 hour/24 hour)
l It is possible to set the display unit to hPa,
mb, kPa, or inHg.
Selecting settings displays
E00519100061
Every time the “ADJ” button is pressed lightly, the
Calendar display can be changed to the following:
E00518800029
The date is shown. The calendar pattern can be
changed to your desired setting.
Refer to “Changing the calendar setting” on page
CAUTION
3-24. l The driver should not operate the display
while the vehicle is in motion.
l When operating the system, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe area.
3
Blank
E00519000015
The whole display can be turned into blank. In this
case, buttons remain illuminated.
1- Changing the clock settings ® p. 3-20

2- Adjusting the display brightness ® p. 3-21
3- Correcting the compass* ® p. 3-22
4- Changing the calendar setting ® p. 3-24
5- User customization ® p. 3-25
6- Adjusting the barometer ® p. 3-29
OBKE12E1 3-19
Changing the clock settings “H”- Adjust “hour”.

E00519200062
The indication increases by one hour, ev-
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the clock set-
ery time you lightly press the “H” func-
ting display.
tion button. If you continue pressing the
button for about 2 seconds or more, the
indication is fast-forwarded, and then the
setting is changed to the hour selected.
“M”- Adjust “minute”.
The indication increases by one minute,
every time you lightly press the “M” func-
tion button. If you continue pressing the
button for about 2 seconds or more, the
indication is fast-forwarded, and then the
setting is changed to the minute selected.
3 “SET”- To reset the minutes to zero.

The time is adjusted as described below
by pressing the function button “SET”.
2. It is possible to adjust the clock using the func-
tion buttons. l 10:30-11:29 · · · · change to 11:00
l 11:30-12:29 · · · · change to 12:00
In this occasion, the display flashes twice
and then the setting is changed.
3. After making the adjustment, press the “IN-

FO” button to select the information display.
3-20 OBKE12E1
NOTE 2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- “+”- To make the display brighter
l Vehicles equipped with the MITSUBISHI lect the setting you wish to adjust (daytime The display becomes brighter by one
Multi Communication System (MMCS) also or nighttime). Then press the “SELECT” func- step, every time you lightly press the
have a clock indication, but the time shown tion button. “+” function button. If you continue press-
by the MMCS may differ from that shown ing the button for about 2 seconds or
by the centre information display because dif- more, the indication is fast-forwarded.
ferent sources of data are used for automatic
“-”- To make the display darker
adjustment.
The display becomes darker by one step,
every time you lightly press the
Adjusting the display brightness “-” function button. If you continue press-
E00519300021
ing the button for about 2 seconds or
The display brightness can be adjusted at 13 levels
more, the indication is fast-forwarded.
for both daytime and nighttime.
l BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME “SET”- To set the brightness
The display brightness is adjusted when the Press function button “SET” to set the
light switch is in the “OFF” position.
l BRIGHTNESS FOR NIGHT TIME
new brightness. The display will flash
twice.
3
The display brightness is adjusted when the
light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” position. 3. Use the function buttons to adjust the bright-
ness. NOTE
l If you next wish to adjust the other adjust-
1. Press the “ADJ” button to show the bright- ment setting (daytime or nighttime), press
ness adjusting display. the “ADJ” button or “BACK” function button.
4. After adjustment, press the “INFO” button to

select the information display.
OBKE12E1 3-21
NOTE l Do not install ski racks, antennas, etc. which l The declination can be set at intervals of
l As the display brightness can be adjusted in are attached to the vehicle by means of a mag- 1 degrees, from 28 degrees west (W28) to
the center information display only, the bright- net. They affect the operation of the compass. 28 degrees east (E28).
ness inside the meter cannot be changed. l On vehicles equipped with the MITSUBISHI
Multi Communication System (MMCS), With a settings display showing, press the “ADJ”
Correcting the compass* even though the compass setting display is button and select “COMPASS VARIANCE”.
E00519400110 shown, correcting the compass will not be 1. Press the function button for “SELECT”.
This compass shows the direction of the vehicle by possible.
the 8 azimuth system.
Setting the declination
The declination is the difference between true
north (the direction of the geographic north pole)
and where a compass needle points to. Since the dec-
lination varies from place to place, it needs to be
set for each region. Otherwise the compass will not
show the correct direction.
3 Set the declination by the following steps:
2. Press the function button for “←” or “→” to

set the desired declination.
NOTE
l This system uses the earth’s magnetic field, Pressing “←” or “→” for more than 1 sec-
and so may not show the correct direction de- ond makes the value change rapidly.
pending on the traffic condition or in the fol-
lowing places where the earth’s magnetic
field is disrupted.
• Car parks located in buildings and tunnels
• Expressways and underground cables
• Area over the subway NOTE
• Transforming station l The default declination setting is 0 degrees.
• Areas along the railroad In accordance with the illustration, set the dec-
In these cases, the correct direction will be lination setting to the declination contour near-
displayed once the vehicle returns to a place est to a region where you drive the vehicule.
where the earth’s magnetic field is stable.
3-22 OBKE12E1
3. When the declination adjustment has been NOTE 3. Turn the vehicle slowly through 360 degrees
completed, press the “SET” function button. l If your vehicle has a sunroof, keep the sun- in a safe, open area with no buildings and oth-
roof closed when calibrating the compass. er vehicles.
Having the sunroof open when calibrating
the compass could render the compass un-
able to correctly show directions.
With a settings display showing, press the “ADJ”

button and select “COMPASS CALIBRATION”.
1. Press the function button for “SELECT”.
Setting the compass

The compass is usually calibrated automatically
3
when the vehicle is moving. At times when com- NOTE
plete calibration is not possible, no compass indica- l Ifyou wish to stop calibrating the compass
tions are given. Manually set the compass using the part-way through the procedure, press the “IN-
following procedure. FO” button or “ADJ” button.
2. Press the function button for “SELECT”.
OBKE12E1 3-23
NOTE Changing the calendar setting

l The “Completed the calibration”. message E00519500023
The date and the calendar indication patterns can
may be displayed even if you terminate the
turn before it is complete and return to the ve- be changed.
hicle’s original direction. The compass may Date setting
not be properly calibrated in this case, so you 1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the calendar
must turn the vehicle through at least setting display.
360 degrees.
4. The compass setting will finish automatical-

ly and the words “COMPASS CALIBRA-
TION COMPLETE” will appear on the
screen.
“→”- Select “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY”
you wish to change.
3 “YEAR”, “MONTH”, and “DAY” are
changed over by turns every time you
lightly press the “→” function button.
“+”- Change “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY”
you have selected.
The indication is changed to your de-
2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- sired date every time you lightly press
lect “CALENDAR ADJUST”. Then press the “+” function button.
the “SELECT” function button. If you continue pressing the button for
about 2 seconds or more, the indication
is forwarded.
“SET”- Determine the date.
NOTE
Press the “SET” function button. Then
l If your vehicle has a sunroof, do not open the
the display flashes twice and the setting
sunroof when checking the indicated direc-
tion after completing the turn. Opening the is changed.
sunroof could cause the azimuth bar shown
on the centre information display to freeze be- NOTE
cause of electromagnetic interference. Be l The year changes in the following sequence:
sure to check the indicated direction with the 2006 → 2007 → … 2099 → 2006.
sunroof closed. If the azimuth bar freezes, per- l You can return to the previous display by
form the compass calibration procedure again. pressing the “BACK” function button.
3. Use the function buttons to set the calendar.
3-24 OBKE12E1
4. After setting the date, press the “INFO” but- 2. Press function button “←” or “→” to select
ton to return to the information display. your desired indication pattern.
Type 1
NOTE
Type 2 l You can return to the previous display by
pressing the “BACK” function button.
Changing the calendar pattern
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the calendar
3
setting display. Press the “←” or “→” func- 4. After setting the calendar pattern, press the
tion button to select “CALENDAR PAT- “INFO” button to return to the information
TERN SELECT”. Then press the “SELECT” display.
Type 3
function button.
3. Press the function button “SET”. The display

will flash twice, and the indication pattern
will be updated.
User customization
E00519600095
You can set the indication of unit, language, and
the time notation.
In addition, you can return these settings to the fac-
tory default settings.
OBKE12E1 3-25
Selecting the item to set Push the function button “SELECT”. The set- 1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the user cus- ting display for your selected item will appear. lect “FUEL ECONOMY”. Then press the
tomization display. “SELECT” function button.
3 Changing display units

It is possible to change the display units for the fuel
2. Press the function button “←” or “→” to se- consumption, driving range, average speed, outside 2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
lect the item you wish to set. temperature, elevation, and atmospheric pressure lect “km/L”. Then press the “SET” function
• “UNIT”: Changing the unit as shown below. button. The display will flash twice, and the
• “LANGUAGE”: Changing the lan- display unit will be updated to the selected
guage km/L → L/100 km → mpg one.
• “12h ↔ 24h”: Changing the time for- FUEL ECONOMY (UK GALLON) → mpg
mat (US GALLON)
• “DEFAULT”: Resetting to factory set-
tings RANGE km → miles
SPEED km/h → mph
OUTSIDE TEM-
°C → °F
PERATURE
ELEVATION m → ft
BAROMETER hPa → mb → kPa → inHg
l Changing the display unit for fuel consump-

tion
NOTE
l You can return to the previous display by
3-26 OBKE12E1
3. After setting, press the “INFO” button to re- the display time notation will be updated to
turn to the information display. the selected one.
NOTE
Changing the language
It is possible to set the display language of the cen- 12-hour 24-hour
3
tre information display to English, Spanish, 2. After setting the language, press the “INFO”
French, German, or Italian (Portuguese). button to return to the information display.
Depending on the regions, this may be set to Italian
or Portuguese.
l To change the display language to English
1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-

lect “ENGLISH”. Then press the “SET” func-
tion button. The display will flash twice, and
then the setting is completed to the language
selected.
NOTE
Changing the time notation
It is possible to set the time notation to 12-hour or
24-hour.
1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
lect “12h TIME NOTATION” or “24h TIME
NOTATION”. Then press the “SET” func-
tion button. The display will flash twice, and
OBKE12E1 3-27
2. After setting the time notation, press the “IN- 1. Push the “SELECT” function button. 3. Press the “SELECT” function button.
FO” button to return to the information dis-
play.
3 Returning display items to their factory settings

2. Press the “←” function button to select
“YES”.
4. Once more press the “←” function button to
select “YES”.
You can return the setting of each item to the facto-
ry default settings.
NOTE
l The factory settings are as follows:
• Fuel consumption: L/100 km
• Driving range: km
• Average speed: km/h
• Outside temperature: °C
• Elevation: m
• Atmospheric pressure: hPa
• Display language: English
• Time notation: 12-hour
3-28 OBKE12E1
5. Press the “SET” function button. Adjusting the barometer 2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
E00524400020 lect the “BAROMETER ADJUST” display.
It is possible to adjust the barometer indication and Then press the “SELECT” function button.
return it to the factory setting.
NOTE
l It is not necessary to adjust the barometer be-
cause it has been adjusted at the factory.
However, if you wish, adjust it using an accu-
rate barometer.
To adjust the barometer
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the barome-
ter adjustment display.
6. The display shown below will appear, and

the display items will return to their factory 3
settings. 3. Adjust the barometer by pressing the func-
tion buttons.
NOTE
l If the battery terminals are disconnected, the
settings for the date and time may be erased.
If this happens, please set the date and time
again.
OBKE12E1 3-29
“+”- To adjust the barometer Resetting to the factory setting NOTE

Each gentle press of the “+” function but- 1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the barome- l Although the barometer value is changed to
ton will increase the indicated barometer ter adjustment display. the factory setting, a barometer unit you have
by 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the but- Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- selected is unchanged.
ton for about 2 seconds or longer, the in- lect the “BAROMETER DEFAULT” dis- l You can return to the previous display by
dication is fast-forwarded. play. Then press the “SELECT” function but- pressing the “BACK” function button.
ton.
“-”- To adjust the barometer
Each gentle press of the “-” function but- 3. After setting the barometer default, press the
ton will decrease the indicated barometer “INFO” button to return to the information
by 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the but- display.
ton for about 2 seconds or longer, the in-
dication is fast-forwarded.
“SET”- To set the barometer
Press the “SET” function button. The dis-
3 play will flash twice, and the new setting
will be established.
NOTE
pressing the “BACK” function button. 2. Press the “SET” function button. The display
will flash twice and the barometer indication
4. After setting the barometer adjust, press the will return to the factory settings.
“INFO” button to return to the information
display.
Care of the monitor
E00519700012
If the monitor becomes covered in fingerprints or
otherwise dirty, clean it with a soft and dry cloth.
NOTE
l Don’t use a wet cloth or abrasive cleaner as
this may cause damage.
3-30 OBKE12E1
Combination headlamps and OFF All lamps off NOTE

dipper switch Position, tail, licence plate and l The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
trol can be adjusted.
E00506001513 instrument panel lamps on
For further information, please contact your
Headlamps and other lamps go MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Headlamps Point.
on
l When the headlamps are turned off by the au-
NOTE Type 2 tomatic on/off control with the ignition
l Do not leave the lamps on for a long time Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. switch in the “ON” position, the front fog
while the engine is stationary (not running). lamps (if so equipped) and rear fog lamp also
A rundown battery could result. go off. When the headlamps are subsequent-
l When it rains, or when the vehicle has been ly turned back on by the automatic on/off con-
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be- trol, the front fog lamps also come on but the
comes foggy, but this does not indicate a func- rear fog lamp stays off. If you wish to turn
tional problem. the rear fog lamp back on, operate the switch
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers in- l
again.
Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automat-
3
side the lamp, we recommend you to have it ic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label
checked. to the windscreen.
Type 1
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
OFF All lamps off

With the ignition switch in the
“ON” position, headlamps, posi-
tion, tail, licence plate, and in-
strument panel lamps turn on
AUTO and off automatically in accord-
ance with outside light level.
All lamps turn off automatically
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position. l If the lamps do not turn on or off with the
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually op-
Position, tail, licence plate and erate the switch and we recommend you to
instrument panel lamps on have your vehicle checked.
Headlamps and other lamps go
on
OBKE12E1 3-31
Daytime running lamp* When you want to keep the lamps on: Dipper (High/Low beam change)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position l Turn the lamp switch in the “OFF” position E00506200055
and the lamp switch is set to the “OFF” position, while the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the
the low beam of the headlamps, tail lamps, etc., or “ACC” position. beam changes from high to low (or low to high)
will illuminate. l Turn on the lamps with the switch in the each time the lever is pulled fully (1). While the high-
“ ” or “ ” position again, then the beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the in-
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) au- lamps will remain on. strument cluster will also illuminate.
to-cutout function l Remove the ignition key.
E00532700178
l If the ignition key is turned to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position or removed from the igni- NOTE
tion switch, and without opening the driver’s l For further information, we recommend you
door for 3 minutes with the lamp switch in to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
the “ ” position, the lamps will turn off au- ized Service Point.
tomatically.
3 l If the ignition key is turned to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position or removed from the igni-
Lamp monitor buzzer
E00506100256
tion switch and the driver’s door is opened If the driver’s door is opened when the key is in the
within 3 minutes with the lamp switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from the
“ ” position, a buzzer will sound to warn ignition switch while the lamps are on, a buzzer
the driver that the lamps have not been will sound to remind the driver to turn off the lamps.
turned off, and these lamps will automatical- When the lamp auto-cutout function acts, the buz- Headlamp flasher
ly turn off. zer will stop automatically. E00506300128
The high-beams flash when the lever is pulled slight-
ly (2), and will go off when it is released.
NOTE When the high-beam is on, the high-beam indica-
l The lamp auto-cutout will not function when tion lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
the lamp switch is in the “ ” position
l When the ignition key has been turned to ei- NOTE
ther the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re-
moved from the ignition switch with the l The high-beams can also flash when the
lamp switch in the “ ” position, and the lamp switch is OFF.
lamp switch is returned to the “OFF” within l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
approximately 3 minutes, the auto-cutout set to high-beam, the headlamps are automat-
function will not be activated. ically returned to their low-beam setting
when the lamp switch is next turned to the
“ ” position.
3-32 OBKE12E1
Headlamp levelling CAUTION Switch position 0- Driver only/

E00517400015 Driver + 1 front passenger
Headlamp levelling switch* l Always perform adjustments before driv- Switch position 2- 5 passengers (including
E00517500553
ing. driver)
Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as
Except for vehicles with discharge headlamps it could cause an accident. Switch position 3- 5 passengers (including
The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending driver) + Full luggage load-
on the load carried by the vehicle. ing
The headlamp levelling dial can be used to adjust NOTE {Except for vehicles for
the headlamp illumination distance (when the low- l When adjusting the beam position, first put Russia, Ukraine and Ka-
er beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’ the dial in the “0” position (the highest beam zakhstan}
glare does not distract other drivers. position). Switch position 4- 5 passengers (including
Set the dial according to the following table.
driver) + Full luggage load-
3-door models ing
LHD {Vehicles for Russia, Uk-
Except for vehicles with only the front seats
raine and Kazakhstan} 3
Vehi- Driver + Full luggage load-
cle ing
condi-
Vehicles with only the front seats
tion
Switch “0” “0” “2” “3” “4”
RHD posi- or“4” Vehicle condi-
tion tion
●: 1 person
Switch position “0” “4”
: Full luggage loading
●: 1 person
: Full luggage loading
Switch position 0- Driver only

Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage load-
ing
OBKE12E1 3-33
5-door models Vehicles with only the front seats Automatic headlamp levelling warning lamp
The automatic headlamp levelling warning lamp
Except for vehicles with only the front seats should illuminate when the ignition switch is
Vehicle condi- turned “ON”, and should go off in a few seconds.
Vehi-
tion
cle
con-
dition Switch position “0” “4”
Switc “0” “0” “1” “2” “3” “3” ●: 1 person
h po- or“4”
sition : Full luggage loading
●: 1 person Switch position 0- Driver only

: Full luggage loading Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage load-
3 Switch position 0- Driver only/
ing
Driver + 1 front passenger

Automatic headlamp levelling*
E00517600017
Switch position 1- Driver + 1 front passenger

+ 2 passengers on third seat Vehicles with discharge headlamps CAUTION
This function automatically adjusts the illumina- l If the warning lamp stays on or does not
Switch position 2- 7 passengers (including tion distance of the headlamps according to the num- illuminate when the ignition switch is
driver) ber of people and the load in the vehicle. turned “ON”, it indicates that the auto-
Switch position 3- 7 passengers (including When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position matic headlamp levelling device is not
driver) + Full luggage load- and the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the il- functioning.
ing lumination distance of the headlamps is automati- We recommend you to have your vehicle
Driver + Full luggage load- cally adjusted when the vehicle is stopped. inspected.
ing
{Except for vehicles for
Russia, Ukraine and Ka-
zakhstan}
Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage load-
ing
{Vehicles for Russia, Uk-
raine and Kazakhstan}
3-34 OBKE12E1
Turn-signal lever • Sounding of a buzzer as the turn-signal

lamps flash.
Hazard warning flasher switch
E00506500928 E00506600440
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the ve-
the lever is operated with the ignition hicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency.
switch in the “ACC” position. The hazard warning flashers can always be operat-
• The turn-signal lamps 3-flash function ed, regardless of the position of the ignition key.
for lane changes can be deactivated.
• The time required to operate the lever for Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flash-
the 3-flash function can be adjusted. ers, all turn-signal lamps flash continuously.
To turn them off, push the switch again.
1- Turn-signals
When making a normal turn, use position 3
(1). The lever will return automatically when
cornering is completed.
2- Lane-change signals
When changing lanes, use position (2). It
will return to the neutral position when re-
leased.
Also, when you move the lever to (2) slight-
ly then release it, the turn-signal lamps and in- NOTE
dication lamp in the instrument cluster will
flash 3 times. l It is possible for a buzzer to sound with flash-
ing of the turn-signal lamps. For further infor-
mation, we recommend you to consult a
NOTE MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
l If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the Point.
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
out. We recommend you to have the vehicle
inspected.
l It is possible to activate the following func-
tions. For further information, we recom-
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
OBKE12E1 3-35
Fog lamp switch l In case of vehicles with Daytime Running

Lamp, the front fog lamp can be operated
Type 2
E00506700047
Front fog lamp switch* even if the lamp switch is set to the “OFF” LHD
E00508300571 position.
The front fog lamps illuminate only when the head-
lamps or tail lamps are on. Push the switch to turn
on the front fog lamps, and push the switch again
Rear fog lamp switch
E00508400123
to turn them off. The rear fog lamp illuminates only when the head-
The indication lamp in the instrument cluster will lamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) are on.
illuminate while the front fog lamps are on. Push the switch to turn on the rear fog lamp, and
push the switch again to turn it off.
RHD
LHD The indication lamp in the instrument cluster will
illuminate while the rear fog lamp is on.
Type 1
3
LHD
RHD
NOTE
l The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off
when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so
equipped) are turned off. To turn on the rear
RHD fog lamp again, push the switch again when
the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equip-
ped) turn on.
l In case of vehicles with Daytime Running
Lamp, the rear fog lamp can be operated
NOTE even if the lamp switch is set to the “OFF”
l The front fog lamps are automatically turned position.
off when the headlamps or tail lamps are
turned off. To turn on the front fog lamps
again, push the switch again when the head-
lamps or tail lamps turn on.
l Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may tem-
porarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
3-36 OBKE12E1
Wiper and washer switch If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear
window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has
To adjust intermittent intervals
E00507101191 With the lever in the “INT” (speed-sensitive) posi-
melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wip- tion, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by
er motor may be damaged. turning the knob (A).
CAUTION
l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass
may freeze, which may hinder visibility.
Warm the glass with the defroster or rear
window demister before using the washer.
Windscreen wipers
E00516900273
Except for vehicles with rain sensor

The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ig-
3
1- Fast
nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position. MIST- Misting function 2- Slow
The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off NOTE
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) l The speed-sensitive-operation function of the
windscreen wipers can be deactivated.
LO- Slow For further information, we recommend you
HI- Fast to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point.
Misting function
The misting function can be used when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
OBKE12E1 3-37
The wipers will operate once if the wiper lever is If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear Wiper operation under these conditions can scratch
raised to the “MIST” position and released. This op- window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has the windscreen and damage the wipers.
eration is useful when it is drizzling, etc. The wip- melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wip-
ers will continue to operate while the lever is held er motor may be damaged.
in the “MIST” position.
3
MIST- Misting function
Vehicles with rain sensor The wipers will operate once.
E00526400428 OFF- Off
The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ig-
nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position. AUTO- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically operate
depending on the degree of wetness on
the windscreen.
LO- Slow
HI- Fast
Rain sensor
Can only be used when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the rain
sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain (or snow,
other moisture, dust, etc.) and the wipers will oper-
ate automatically.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the wind-
screen is dirty and the weather is dry.
3-38 OBKE12E1
l In the following cases, the rain sensor may To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
CAUTION be malfunctioning. With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) posi-
Have the vehicle inspected at a tion, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of the
l With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service rain sensor by turning the knob (A).
tion and the lever in the “AUTO” posi-
tion, the wipers may automatically oper- Point.
ate in the situations described below. • When the wipers operate at a constant in-
If your hands get trapped, you could suf- terval despite changes in the extent of rain.
fer injuries or the wipers could malfunc- • When the wipers do not operate even
tion. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to though it is raining.
the “OFF” position or move the lever to l The wipers may automatically operate when
the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain things such as insects or foreign objects are
sensor. affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain
• When cleaning the outside surface of sensor or when the windscreen is frozen. Ob-
the windscreen, if you touch the rain jects affixed to the windscreen will stop the
sensor. wipers when the wipers cannot remove them.
• When cleaning the outside surface of
the windscreen, if you wipe with a
To make the wipers operate again, place the
lever in the “LO” or “HI” position.
3
cloth the rain sensor. Also, the wipers may operate automatically
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag- “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
• When using an automatic car wash.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind- netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lev- “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
screen. er in the “OFF” position.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain l Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
NOTE
sensor. ized Service Point when replacing the wind-
screen or reinforcing the glass around the sen- l It is possible to activate the following func-
sor. tions. For further information, we recom-
NOTE mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
l To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this • Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
operation of the wipers does not take place
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi- tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-
ent temperature is about 0 °C or lower. ation (vehicle-speed sensitive).
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
l Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-
or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put
any water-repellent coating on the wind- ation (except vehicle-speed sensitive).
screen. The rain sensor would not be able to Misting function
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and re-
might stop working normally. lease, to operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in mist or
drizzle.
OBKE12E1 3-39
The wipers will operate once if the lever is raised The wipers will operate once if the lever is moved On a vehicle equipped with the headlamp washer,
to the “MIST” position and released when the igni- to the “AUTO” position and the knob (A) is turned the headlamp washer operates together with the
tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. The in the “+” direction when the ignition switch is in windscreen washer the first time the windscreen
wipers will continue to operate while the lever is the “ON” position. washer is used if the headlamps are on.
held in the “MIST” position.
3
Windscreen washer
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, if E00507200528 CAUTION
the lever is moved to the AUTO position and The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the wind-
pulled towards you a little, the wipers operate once. screen by pulling the lever towards you. The wip- l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass
ers operate automatically several times while the
may freeze resulting in poor visibility.
washer fluid is being sprayed.
Heat the glass with the defroster or demis-
ter before using the washer.
3-40 OBKE12E1
Rear window wiper and washer NOTE Push the button once and the washer fluid will be
E00507300994
l To ensure a clear rearward view, the wiper sprayed on to the headlamps.
The rear window wiper and washer switch can be performs several continuous operations when
operated with the ignition switch in the “ON” or the reverse gear is engaged while the switch
“ACC” position. is in the “INT” position.
Following this continuous operation, the wip-
er will automatically switch to intermittent op-
eration.
l It is possible to activate the following func-
tions. For further information, we recom-
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
• Adjustment of the interval for intermit-
tent operation
• The wipers can be changed to continuous
operation by turning the knob at the end
of the lever twice to the --- (intermittent NOTE
3
operation) position. (Continuous opera- l If the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
INT- The wiper operates continuously for sev- tion mode) “ACC” position and the headlamps are on,
eral seconds then operates intermittently • Changing intermittent wiper operation to the headlamp washer operates together with
at intervals of about every 8 seconds. continuous wiper operation the windscreen washer the first time the wind-
screen washer lever is pulled.
OFF- Off
Headlamp washer switch*
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto E00510100231 Precautions to observe when using wip-
- the rear window when the knob is turned The headlamp washer can be operated when the ig-
fully in either direction. nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position and
ers and washers
E00507600027
The wipers operate automatically several the headlamps are on. l If the moving wipers become blocked by ice
times while the washer fluid is being or other deposits on the glass, the motor may
sprayed. burn out even if the wiper switch is turned to
OFF. If obstruction occurs, park your vehicle
in a safe place, turn off the ignition, and
clean the deposits from the glass so that the
wipers operate smoothly.
l Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry.
They may scratch the glass surface and the
blades wear out prematurely.
OBKE12E1 3-41
l Before using the wipers in cold weather,

check that the wiper blades are not frozen on-
Wiper de-icer switch* Rear window demister switch
E00507700103 E00507901030
to the glass. The motor may burn out if the The wiper de-icer switch can be operated with the The rear window demister switch can be operated
wipers are used with the blades frozen onto ignition switch in the “ON” position. with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
the glass. When the front wipers have frozen to the wind- Push the switch to turn on the rear window demis-
l Avoid using the washer continuously for screen at the parked positions, turning on this ter. It will be turned off automatically in about
more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the switch will heat the windscreen to make the wipers 20 minutes. To turn off the demister within
washer when the fluid reservoir is empty. operable. Press the switch and the deicer will oper- 20 minutes, push the switch again.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out. ate and turn on the indication lamp (A). The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the
l Periodically check the level of washer fluid demister is on.
in the reservoir and refill if required.
During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer reservoir. Failure to do so could re-
sult in loss of washer function and frost dam-
3 age to the system components.
NOTE
l The switch is automatically turned off after NOTE
operating for approximately 20 minutes. To l If your vehicle is equipped with wiper de-
turn off the switch while it is operating, press icer, when the rear window demister switch
the switch again. is pushed, the window glass becomes warm
and the wipers become operable. Refer to
“Wiper de-icer switch” on page 3-42.
l If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
rors, when the rear window demister switch
is pressed, the outside rear-view mirrors are
defogged or defrosted. Refer to “Heated mir-
ror” on page 4-11.
l The demister switch is not to melt snow but
to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the
demister switch.
3-42 OBKE12E1
l To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-

tery, do not use the rear window demister dur-
Horn switch
E00508000347
ing starting of the engine or when the engine Press the steering wheel on or around the “ ” mark.
is not running. Turn the demister off immedi-
ately after the window is clear.
l When cleaning the inside of the rear win-
dow, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along
the heater wires, being careful not to damage
the wires.
l Do not allow objects to touch the inside of
the rear window glass, damaged or broken
wires may result.
OBKE12E1 3-43
OBKE12E1
Starting and driving
Economical driving.......................................................................4-02 Rear-view camera*.......................................................................4-52

Driving, alcohol and drugs...........................................................4-02 Cargo loads...................................................................................4-56
Safe driving techniques................................................................4-03 Trailer towing...............................................................................4-57
Running-in recommendations.......................................................4-04
Parking brake................................................................................4-06
Parking..........................................................................................4-07
Steering wheel height adjustment.................................................4-08
Inside rear-view mirror.................................................................4-08
Outside rear-view mirrors.............................................................4-10
Ignition switch..............................................................................4-12
Steering wheel lock......................................................................4-13
Starting..........................................................................................4-14
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)*....................................................4-15
Manual transmission.....................................................................4-16
Automatic transmission INVECS-II Sports Mode 5A/T
4
(Intelligent & Innovative Vehicle Electronic Control
System II).................................................................................4-19
Super select 4WD II (SS4 II)........................................................4-24
Rear differential lock*..................................................................4-29
4-wheel drive operation................................................................4-32
Inspection and maintenance following rough road oper-
ation..........................................................................................4-35
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles..........................4-35
Braking.........................................................................................4-37
Brake assist system.......................................................................4-38
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).....................................................4-39
Power steering system..................................................................4-41
Active stability & traction control (ASTC)..................................4-41
Cruise control*.............................................................................4-45
Reversing sensor system*.............................................................4-49
OBKE12E1
Economical driving Speed Driving, alcohol and drugs

E00600100561 At higher vehicle speed, more fuel is consumed. E00600200067
For economical driving, there are some technical re- Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight release of Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the most fre-
quirements that have to be met. The prerequisite the accelerator pedal will save a significant amount quent causes of accidents.
for low fuel consumption is a properly adjusted en- of fuel. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even
gine. In order to achieve longer life of the vehicle with blood alcohol levels far below the legal mini-
and the most economical operation, we recommend Tyre inflation pressure mum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride
you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular inter- with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or
in accordance with the service standards. vals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road re- a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking cof-
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas and sistance and fuel consumption. In addition, low fee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober.
noise are highly influenced by personal driving hab- tyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear and driv- Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs af-
its as well as the particular operating conditions. ing stability. fect your alertness, perception and reaction time.
The following points should be observed in order Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driv-
to minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine as Load ing while under the influence of any of these medi-
well as to reduce environmental pollution. cations.
Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the lug-
gage compartment. Especially during city driving
Starting where frequent starting and stopping is necessary,
Avoid rapid acceleration and sudden starts; such op- the increased weight of the vehicle will greatly af- WARNING
eration will result in higher fuel consumption.
4 fect fuel consumption. Also avoid driving with un-
necessary luggage or carriers, etc., on the roof; the
l NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
Shifting increased air resistance will increase fuel consump- reflexes are slower and your judgment is
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine tion. impaired.
speed. Always use the highest gear possible.
The transfer shift lever should be set to “2H” when Cold engine starting
driving on normal roads and express ways to obtain Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.
best possible fuel economy. Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused by
keeping a hot engine running. After the engine is
City traffic started, commence driving as soon as possible.
Frequent starting and stopping increases the aver-
age fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traf- Air conditioning
fic flow whenever possible. When driving on con- The use of the air conditioning will increase the
gested roads, avoid use of a low gear at high en- fuel consumption.
gine speeds.
Idling
The vehicle consumes fuel even during idling.
Avoid extended idling whenever possible.
4-02 OBKE12E1
Safe driving techniques Carrying children in the vehicle

E00600300488 l Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
Driving safety and protection against injury cannot key in the ignition and children inside the ve-
be fully ensured. However, we recommend that hicle. Children may play with the driving con-
you pay extra attention to the following: trols and this could lead to an accident.
l Make sure that infants and small children are
Seat belts properly restrained in accordance with the
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and laws and regulations, and for maximum pro-
your passengers have fastened your seat belts. tection in case of an accident.
l Prevent children from playing in the luggage
Floor mats compartment. It is quite dangerous to allow
them to play there while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
l Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-
rectly laying floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle.
To prevent the floor mats from slipping
out of position, securely retain them us- 4
ing the hook etc.
Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal
or laying one floor mat on top of another
can obstruct pedal operation and lead to
a serious accident.
OBKE12E1 4-03
Running-in recommendations
E00600402324
During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km (620 miles), it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions as a guideline to aid long
life as well as future economy and performance.
l Do not race the engine at high speeds.
l Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged high-speed running.
l Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below.
Please note that the legal speed limits must be adhered to.
l Do not exceed loading limits.
l Refrain from towing a trailer.
Vehicles with M/T

Speed limit
Shift point 3000 models 3200 models
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
4 1st gear 30 km/h (19 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph)
2nd gear 50 km/h (31 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 45 km/h (28 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph)
3rd gear 85 km/h (53 mph) 45 km/h (28 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
4th gear 115 km/h (71 mph) 60 km/h (37 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (31 mph)
4-04 OBKE12E1
Vehicles with A/T

Speed limit
Shift point 3000 models 3200 models 3800 models
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1st gear 25 km/h (16 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph)
2nd gear 50 km/h (31 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 45 km/h (28 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph)
3rd gear 80 km/h (50 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 85 km/h (53 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph)
4th gear 115 km/h (71 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (31 mph) 125 km/h (78 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph)
170 km/h
5th gear 155 km/h (96 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 140 km/h (87 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph)
(106 mph)
CAUTION
l The “4LLc” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult surfaces. On vehicles
with A/T, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4LLc” range.
4
OBKE12E1 4-05
Parking brake NOTE

CAUTION
E00600501360 l Apply sufficient force to the parking brake
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the
stop, fully apply the parking brake lever sufficient-
l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
foot brake is released. guish when the parking brake is fully re-
ly to hold the vehicle. l If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle leased, the brake system may be abnormal.
stationary after the foot brake is released, Have your vehicle checked immediately.
To apply the parking brake have your vehicle checked immediately. For details, refer to “Brake warning
lamp” on page 3-09.
To release the parking brake
4 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,

then pull the lever up without pushing the but-
ton at the end of hand grip. 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
then pull the lever up slightly.
2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.
CAUTION 3- Lower the lever fully.
l When you intend to apply the parking

brake, firmly press the brake pedal to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop be-
CAUTION
fore pulling the parking brake lever. Pull- l Before driving, be sure that the parking
ing the parking brake lever with the vehi- brake is fully released and brake warning
cle moving could make the rear wheels lamp is off.
lock up, thereby making the vehicle unsta- If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
ble. It could also make the parking brake parking brake, the brake will be overhea-
malfunction. ted, resulting in ineffective braking and
possible brake failure.
4-06 OBKE12E1
Parking NOTE When leaving the vehicle

E00600601097 l If your vehicle is equipped with A/T, be sure Always remove the key from the ignition switch
To park the vehicle, fully engage the parking to apply the parking brake before moving the and lock all doors (including the backdoor) when
brake, and then move the gearshift lever to 1st or selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If leaving the vehicle unattended.
“R” (Reverse) position for vehicles with M/T, or you move the selector lever to the “P” Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.
set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) position on (PARK) position before applying the parking
A/T vehicles. brake, it may be difficult to disengage the se-
lector lever from the “P” (PARK) position
Parking on a hill when next you drive the vehicle, requiring ap-
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow these plication of a strong force to the selector lev-
procedures: er to move from the “P” (PARK) position.
Parking on a downhill slope Parking with the engine running

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and move Never leave the engine running while you take a
the vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gently short sleep/rest, or you open or close a gate or ga-
touches the kerb. rage door, etc. Also, never leave the engine run-
Apply the parking brake and place the gearshift lev- ning in a closed or poorly ventilated place.
er into the “R” (Reverse) position (with M/T) or
the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position
(with A/T). WARNING 4
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
l Leaving the engine running risks injury
or death from accidentally moving the
Parking on an uphill slope gearshift lever (on M/T vehicles) or the se-
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and lector lever (on A/T vehicles) or the accu-
move the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gen- mulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the pas-
tly touches the kerb. senger compartment.
Apply the parking brake and place the gearshift lev-
er into the 1st position (with M/T) or the selector lev-
er into the “P” (PARK) position (with A/T). Where you park
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
WARNING
l Do not park your vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry grass
or leaves can come in contact with a hot
exhaust, since a fire could occur.
OBKE12E1 4-07
Steering wheel height adjustment Inside rear-view mirror To adjust the vertical mirror position
E00600700222 E00600800702 It is possible to move the mirror up and down to ad-
1. Release the tilt lock lever while holding the Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making any just its position.
steering wheel up. seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired height. rear of the vehicle.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pulling
the tilt lock lever fully upward.
Type 1
Type 2
To adjust the mirror position

Type 3 It is possible to move the mirror up/down and left/
4 A- Locked
right to adjust its position.
B- Release
WARNING
l Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while you are driving the vehicle. WARNING
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirror while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.
Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the view

through the rear window.
4-08 OBKE12E1
To reduce the glare Type 2 Type 3

When the headlamps of the vehicles behind you are When the headlamps of the vehicles behind you are
Type 1 very bright, the reflection factor of the rear-view very bright, the reflection factor of the rear-view
The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare. mirror is automatically changed to reduce the glare.
used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from
the headlamps of vehicles behind you during night
driving.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po- When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
1- Normal
sition, the reflection factor of the mirror is automat- sition, the green indicator (1) illuminates and the re- 4
ically changed. flection factor of the mirror is automatically
2- Anti-glare changed.
NOTE
l Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner NOTE
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity l Do not hang any items on, or spray glass clean-
could result. er on the sensors (2) on the front and back
side, as reduced sensitivity could result.
l If you want to stop automatic mode, press
the switch (3) and the indicator will go off.
To return to automatic mode, press the
switch again or turn the ignition key to the
“ON” position after turning to “LOCK” or
“ACC” position.
OBKE12E1 4-09
Outside rear-view mirrors WARNING

1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the mir-
ror whose adjustment is desired.
E00600900484
l The sense of distance that you get from

Compound curved-surface mirror* an object you see on the inner side of the
On the driver’s side, a compound curved-surface mirror boundary line differs from the
mirror is used, while on the front passenger’s side, sense of distance that you get from an ob-
a single curved-surface mirror is used. ject you see on the outer side.
An object you see on the outer side of the
boundary line of the mirror will look far-
ther away than actually is as compared
with an object you see on the inner side.
To adjust the mirror position

E00601000105
The outside rear-view mirrors can be operated L- Left outside mirror adjustment
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” R- Right outside mirror adjustment
position.
2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or
4 1- Compound curved-surface mirror WARNING
down to adjust the mirror position.
1- Up
2- Single curved-surface mirror 2- Down
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view 3- Right
mirrors while driving. This can be danger- 4- Left
While the single curved-surface mirror has a fixed ous.
curvature, the compound curved-surface mirror has 3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle posi-
Always adjust the mirrors before driving. tion (•).
different curvatures between the inner and outer l Your vehicle is equipped with convex
sides of the boundary line (A). type mirrors. Please take into considera-
The inner side of the boundary line provides the tion, that objects you see in the mirror Retracting and extending the outside
same vision as that available from an ordinary door will look smaller and farther away com- mirrors
mirror. pared to a normal flat mirror. E00618200011
However, the outer side of the boundary line pro- Do not use this mirror to estimate dis- The outside mirrors can be folded in towards the
vides a wider angle of vision compared to an ordi- tance of following vehicles when changing side window to prevent damage when parking in
nary door mirror. lanes. narrow areas.
4-10 OBKE12E1
Automatic extension of mirrors

CAUTION CAUTION If the engine is stopped and started with the mirrors
retracted, the mirrors automatically extend for safe-
l Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror l It is possible to retract and extend the mir- ty when the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h
folded in. The lack of rearward visibility rors by hand. After retracting a mirror us-
normally provided the mirror could lead ing the mirror retractor switch, however, (19 mph).
to an accident. you should extend it by using the switch
again, not by hand. If you extended the
Heated mirror*
E00601200312
Retracting and extending the mirrors using the mirror by hand after retracting it using To demist or defrost the outside rear-view mirrors,
mirror retractor switch the switch, it would not properly lock in press the rear window demister switch.
With the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” po- position. As a result, it could move be- The indication lamp (C) will illuminate while the
sition, push the mirror retractor switch to retract cause of the wind or vibration while you demister is on.
the mirrors. Push it again to extend the mirrors to are driving, taking away your rearward The heater will be turned off automatically in about
their original positions. visibility. 20 minutes.
After placing the ignition switch in the “LOCK” po-
sition, it is possible to retract and extend the mir- NOTE
rors using the mirror retractor switch for about
30 seconds. l Be careful not to get your hands trapped
while a mirror is moving.
l If you move a mirror by hand or it moves af-
ter hitting a person or object, you may not be 4
able to return it to its original position using
the mirror retractor switch. If this happens,
push the mirror retractor switch to place the
mirror in its retracted position and then push
the switch again to return the mirror to its orig-
inal position.
l If the battery voltage is low and you start the
engine while extending the mirrors, the mir-
rors may stop part-way. If this happens, push
the mirror retractor switch to retract the mir-
rors and then push the switch again to extend
them.
l When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from re-
peated pushing of the retractor switch as this
action can result in burn-out of the mirror mo-
tor circuits.
OBKE12E1 4-11
Ignition switch NOTE NOTE

E00601401702 l For vehicles equipped with Daytime Run- l If the interior lamp switch is in the “( )” po-
ning Lamps, when the ignition switch is in sition, the ignition switch illumination will
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T the “ON” position, the headlamp low beams not come on.
etc. are turned on. l It is possible to adjust the period of ignition
Refer to “Headlamps” on page 3-31. switch illumination (the period until the igni-
l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic tion switch illumination goes off). For de-
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code tails, we recommend you to consult a
which the transponder inside the key sends MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
must match the one registered in the immobil- Point.
izer computer. l If the illumination period of the room & map
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page lamps or rear personal lamps (the period un-
1-03. til these lamps go off) is adjusted, the period
of ignition switch illumination (the period un-
Ignition switch illumination til the ignition switch illumination goes off)
In the situations listed below, the ignition switch il- will automatically be changed at the same
LOCK lumination comes on to facilitate insertion or remov- time.
The engine is stopped and the steering wheel al of the ignition key. If the illumination period of the room & map
locked. The key can only be inserted and removed lamps or rear personal lamps is set to zero (in
l When any door or the backdoor is opened,
4 in this position. the ignition switch illumination comes on. other words, the illumination keep-on func-
When it is closed, the ignition switch illumi- tion is deactivated), the ignition switch illu-
ACC nation becomes steadily dimmer until com- mination will not come on when the ignition
The engine is stopped, but the electrical devices pletely going off about 15 seconds later. switch is removed.
such as the radio and cigarette lighter can be operat- l When the ignition key is removed with all For details, we recommend you to consult a
ed. the doors and the backdoor closed, the igni- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
tion switch illumination comes on and stays Point.
ON on for about 15 seconds.
The engine is running, and all the vehicle’s electri-
cal devices can be operated. The ignition switch illumination immediately goes
off if any of the following actions is taken while it
START is on.
The starter motor operates. After the engine has star- l All the doors and the backdoor are closed,
ted, release the key and it will automatically return and the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
to the “ON” position. position.
l All the doors and the backdoor are locked us-
ing the central door lock function.
l All the doors and the backdoor are locked us-
ing the keyless entry system (if so equipped).
4-12 OBKE12E1
To remove the key

CAUTION Steering wheel lock
For vehicles with a M/T, when removing the key, E00601500298
push the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it l Do not remove the ignition key from the
depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position, ignition switch while driving. The steer- To lock
and remove it. ing wheel will be locked, causing loss of Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
control. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
Vehicles with M/T l If the engine is stopped while driving, the
brake servomechanism will cease to func- To unlock
tion and braking efficiency will deterio- Turn the key to the “ACC” position while moving
rate. Also, the power steering system will the steering wheel slightly right and left.
not function and it will require greater
manual effort to operate the steering.
l Do not leave the key in the “ON” position
for a long time when the engine is not run-
ning, doing so will cause the battery to be
discharged.
l Do not turn the key to the “START” posi-
tion when the engine is running, doing so
For vehicles with an A/T, when removing the key,
could damage the starter motor.
4
first set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion, and then turn the key to the “LOCK” position,
and remove it.
Vehicles with A/T

CAUTION
l Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
In some countries, it is prohibited to leave
the key in the vehicle when parked.
OBKE12E1 4-13
Starting Starting the engine (petrol-powered ve- NOTE

E00601600811 hicles) lA ticking noise may be heard after starting
E00601701994 the engine. This is not an abnormal condi-
Tips for starting The starting procedure is as follows: tion. The noise will disappear after a short
l Do not operate the starter motor continuous- 1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt. time of engine running.
ly longer than 10 seconds; doing so could 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. If the ticking noise continues after the engine
run down the battery. If the engine does not 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal. is warmed up, we recommend you to have
start, turn the ignition key back to “LOCK” 4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T). your vehicle checked.
position, wait a few seconds, and then try 5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lev-
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter mo- er in the “N” (Neutral) position. Using the MIVEC engine
tor still turning will damage the starter mech- On vehicles with A/T, make sure the selector The MIVEC engine automatically switches its in-
anism. lever is in the “P” (PARK) position. take-valve control between a low-speed mode and
a high-speed mode in accordance with driving con-
ditions for maximum engine performance.
WARNING Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T
l Never run the engine in a closed or poor- NOTE
ly ventilated area any longer than is nee- l To protect the engine, the high-speed mode
ded to move your vehicle in or out of the may not be selected while the engine coolant
4 area. Carbon monoxide gases are odour-
less and can be fatal.
temperature is low. In such a case, the engine
revolutions do not rise to over 5,000 rpm
even if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
CAUTION Starting the engine (diesel-powered ve-

hicles)
l Never attempt to start the engine by push- E00601800086
ing or pulling the vehicle. 1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
l Do not run the engine at high rpm or
6. After turning the ignition key to the “ON” po-
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
drive the vehicle at high speed until the en- 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
gine has had a chance to warm up. sition, make certain that all warning lamps
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal (M/T).
are functioning properly before starting the
l Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
engine.
5. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshift lev-
gine starts to avoid damaging the starter er in the “N” (Neutral) position.
motor. 7. Turn the ignition key to the “START” posi-
tion without depressing the accelerator pedal,
l If your vehicle is equipped with a turbo-
and release it when the engine starts.
charger, do not stop the engine immedi-
ately after high-speed or uphill driving.
First allow the engine to idle to give the
turbocharger a chance to cool down.
4-14 OBKE12E1
On vehicles with A/T, make sure the selector

lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
7. Turn the ignition key to the “START” posi-
tion without depressing the accelerator pedal,
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)*
E00619800027
and release it when the engine starts. The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is a device that
captures most of the particulate matter (PM) in the
Fuel injection amount learning proc- exhaust emissions of the diesel engine. The DPF au-
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T tomatically burns away trapped PM during vehicle
ess (diesel-powered vehicles) operation. Under certain driving conditions, howev-
E00616000044
To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise low, er, the DPF is not able to burn away all of the trap-
the engine very occasionally performs a learning ped PM and, as a result, an excessive amount of
process for the fuel injection amount. PM accumulates inside it.
The engine sounds slightly different from usual
while the learning process is taking place. The
change in the engine sound does not indicate a fault. WARNING
l The DPF reaches very high temperatures.
Do not park your vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry grass
or leaves can come in contact with a hot
6. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position. exhaust system since a fire could occur.
The diesel preheat indication lamp will first
illuminate, and then after a short time go out, 4
indicating that preheating is completed.
CAUTION
NOTE l Do not use any type of fuel or engine oil
l If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi- that is not specified for your vehicle. Al-
cation lamp is on for a longer time. so, do not use any moisture-removing
l When the engine has not been started within agent or other fuel additive. Such substan-
about 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indi- ces could have a detrimental effect on the
cation lamp went out, return the ignition key DPF.
to the “LOCK” position. Then, turn the key Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 02 and
to the “ON” position to preheat the engine “Engine oil” on page 8-04.
again.
l When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat
indication lamp does not come on even if the NOTE
ignition key is placed in the “ON” position. l To minimize the likelihood of excessive ac-
Start the engine by turning the ignition key cumulation of PM, try to avoid driving for
right to the “START” position. long periods at low speeds and repeatedly
driving short distances.
OBKE12E1 4-15
DPF warning lamp

CAUTION Manual transmission
The DPF warning lamp comes on or flashes in the E00602000072
event of an abnormality in the DPF system. Provi- The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever
l You do not have to continuously drive ex- knob. Be sure to always fully depress the clutch ped-
ded the DPF system is working normally, the DPF actly as indicated above. Always strive to
warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is drive safely in accordance with road con- al before attempting to shift the lever.
turned to the “ON” position and goes off a few sec- ditions.
onds later.
If the DPF warning lamp flashes dur-
ing vehicle operation
Flashing of the DPF warning lamp indicates an ab-
normality in the DPF system. Have the system in-
spected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
CAUTION
l Continuing to drive with the DPF warn-
4 ing lamp flashing could result in engine
trouble and DPF damage. CAUTION
If the DPF warning lamp comes on dur-
ing vehicle operation l Do not move the gearshift lever into re-
verse while the vehicle is moving for-
Steady illumination of the DPF warning lamp ward; doing so will damage the transmis-
shows that the DPF has not been able to burn away sion.
all of the trapped PM and that, as a result, an exces-
sive amount of PM has accumulated inside it. To en-
l Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving as this will cause premature
able the DPF to burn away the PM, try to drive the clutch wear or damage.
vehicle as follows:
l With the needle of the water temperature
gauge stabilized in roughly the middle of the
scale, drive for about 20 minutes at a speed
of at least 40 km/h (24 mph).
If the DPF warning lamp subsequently stays on, con-

tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point.
4-16 OBKE12E1
CAUTION
l If the clutch is engaged suddenly while
the engine revolution is high, an extreme-
ly large load will be applied instantaneous-
ly to the power train, possibly leading to
the breakage of that component. Please en-
sure, therefore, that the clutch pedal is al-
ways applied in a slow yet firm manner.
Your vehicle has a special feature to pro-
tect the power train from damage; the en-
gine is controlled in such a way that exces-
sive increase in engine revolution is pre-
vented in situations where the accelerator
pedal is depressed while the gearshift lev-
er is in the 1st position and the clutch ped-
al has been depressed.
NOTE 4
l If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
clutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas-
ier to make.
l To shift into reverse from the 5th gear, move
the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tion, and then shift it into reverse.
OBKE12E1 4-17
Possible driving speed

E00610801382
Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and damage the engine.
Speed limit
Shift point 3000 models 3200 models
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1st gear 45 km/h (28 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph)
2nd gear 80 km/h (50 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
3rd gear 125 km/h (78 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph)
5th gear is an overdrive ratio and its use reduces engine speed below that of the 4th gear. Use 5th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.
4-18 OBKE12E1
Automatic transmission The individual gears are selected automatically, de-

pending on the position of the gear selector lever,
In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions,
and is equipped with a lock button (A) to avoid in-
INVECS-II Sports Mode 5A/T the speed of the vehicle and the position of the ac- advertent selection of the wrong gear.
(Intelligent & Innovative Vehicle celerator pedal.
The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate (1)
Electronic Control System II) and the manual gate (2).
E00603200101
Designed for optimum control and equipped with
adaptive control capabilities, the electronically con-
trolled transmission optimally matches gear shifts
to almost all driving and road conditions.
CAUTION
l This system is strictly intended to provide
supplementary functions. When travel-
ling downhill under certain conditions or
immediately after starting off when the au-
tomatic transmission is cold, no automat-
ic shiftdown may be made. The driver 4
should shiftdown to a lower gear to use en-
gine braking. Try to drive safely at all time.
NOTE
l During running-in period or immediately af-
ter reconnection of the battery cable, there
may be a case where gear shifts are not made
smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty trans-
mission.
Gear shifts will become smooth after the trans- The lock button must be pushed while
mission has been shifted several times by the the brake pedal is depressed to move the
electronic control system. selector lever.
The lock button must be pushed to move
Selector lever operation the selector lever.
E00603300522
The transmission has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse The lock button need not be pushed to
gear. move the selector lever.
OBKE12E1 4-19
Selector lever position indication lamps “N” NEUTRAL

WARNING E00603500247 At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po- the same as the neutral position on a M/T, and
l If the lock button is always pushed to op- sition, the indication lamps in the instrument panel should only be used when the vehicle is stationary
erate the selector lever, the lever may be
illuminate to show the position of the selector lever for an extended length of time during driving, such
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
(i.e. “PARK”, “DRIVE”, “REVERSE”, etc.). as in a traffic jam.
or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
to push the lock button when performing
the operations indicated by in the illus-
tration. WARNING
l Always depress the brake pedal when l Never move the selector lever to the “N”
shifting the selector lever into a gear (NEUTRAL) position while driving. A se-
from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU- rious accident could occur since you
TRAL) position. could accidentally move the lever into the
Never put your foot on the accelerator ped- “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position
al while shifting the selector lever from or you will lose engine braking.
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) po- l On a gradient the engine should be star-
sition. ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
4 NOTE l Always keep your right foot on the brake
pedal when shifting into or out of “N”
l If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, Selector lever positions (Main gate)
E00603800400 (NEUTRAL), to minimize the risk of loss
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the of control.
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” PARK
“P” (PARK) position.
This position locks the transmission to prevent the “D” DRIVE
vehicle from moving. The engine can be started in This position is for normal driving. The transmis-
this position. sion automatically selects a suitable gear for your
speed and acceleration.
“R” REVERSE Engine braking is automatically applied when nec-
This position is to back up. essary, depending on road conditions.
CAUTION CAUTION
l Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” l Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is tion from the “R” (REVERSE) position
in motion to avoid transmission damage. while the vehicle is in motion to avoid
transmission damage.
4-20 OBKE12E1
Sports mode l When driving away on a slippery road, push

E00603901176 CAUTION the selector lever forward into the
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, “+ (SHIFT UP)” position. This causes the
sports mode is selected by gently pushing the selec- l In sports mode, the driver must execute
transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which
upward shifts in accordance with prevail-
tor lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position into the is better for smooth driving away on a slip-
ing road conditions, taking care to keep
manual gate (A). To return to “D” range operation, pery road. Push the selector lever to the
the engine speed below the red zone.
gently push the selector lever back into the main “- (SHIFT DOWN)” side to shift back to the
gate (B). l By rapidly moving the selector lever back-
ward (SHIFT DOWN) twice, it is possible 1st gear.
In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly sim- to skip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd
ply by moving the selector lever backward and for- or 5th to 3rd. Since sudden engine braking Sports mode indicator
E00612300254
ward. In contrast to a manual transmission, the and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss
of traction, however, downshifts must be In sports mode, the currently selected position is in-
sports mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator dicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru-
pedal depressed. made carefully in accordance with the ve-
hicle’s speed. ment panel.
NOTE
l In sports mode, only the 5 forward gears can
SHIFT UP be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle,
move the selector lever to the “R” (RE- 4
VERSE) or “P” (PARK) position as required.
l To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an up-
shift when the selector lever is moved to the
SHIFT DOWN “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
+ (SHIFT UP) engine, the transmission may refuse to per-
Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. form a downshift when the lever is moved to
the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain NOTE
- (SHIFT DOWN) vehicle speeds. l When sports mode is selected, the “D” indi-
Pull the lever backward once to shift down one l In sports mode, downward shifts are made au- cator goes off.
gear. tomatically when the vehicle slows down.
When the vehicle stops, the 1st gear is auto-
matically selected.
OBKE12E1 4-21
When a malfunction occurs in the A/T When the A/T fluid temperature warning lamp Operation of the A/T
E00615100035 comes on E00604200560
When the “N” indication lamp blinks E00615300109
E00615200023 When the A/T fluid temperature warning lamp
When the “N” indication lamp (A) blinks with the
“D” (DRIVE) position or “Sports mode” being se-
comes automatic transmission fluid temperature be-
comes abnormally high. Normally the warning
CAUTION
lected, the A/T may be malfunctioning. lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned l Before selecting a gear with the engine
to the “ON” position, and then will go out after a running and the vehicle stationary, fully
few seconds. depress the brake pedal to prevent the ve-
hicle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as
the gear is engaged, especially when the
engine speed is high, at fast idle or with
the air conditioning operating, the brakes
should only be released when you are
ready to drive away.
l Depress the brake pedal with the right
foot at all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
4 l
ment delay in case of an emergency.
Operating the accelerator pedal while the
other foot is resting on the brake pedal
CAUTION will affect braking efficiency and may
cause premature wear of brake pads.
l If the “N” indication lamp blinks while
CAUTION l To prevent sudden acceleration, never
driving in the “D” (DRIVE) position or
race the engine when shifting from the
“Sports Mode”, the A/T safety device l If the lamp comes on, reduce the engine “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
may be operating due to a malfunction. speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area.
We recommend you to have your vehicle Then set the selector lever to “P” (PARK)
l Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi-
inspected as soon as possible. position and idle the engine until the warn- tions.
ing lamp goes off. When the warning Never coast downhill backward with the
lamp goes off, resume normal driving. If selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or
the warning lamp does not go off, we rec- sports mode position or coast forward
ommend you to have your vehicle inspec- with the selector lever in the “R” (RE-
ted. VERSE) position.
The engine may stop and the unexpected
increase in brake pedal effort and steer-
ing wheel weight could lead to an accident.
4-22 OBKE12E1
DRIVING DOWNHILL NOTE

CAUTION When travelling down steep grades, the computer l On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
may automatically select a lower gear. This func- brake before moving the selector lever to the
l Do not race the engine with brake pedal tion assists engine braking efforts, reducing the
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
This can damage the A/T. need for using the service brakes. tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
Also, when you depress the accelerator applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
Waiting
pedal while holding down the brake ped- E00604600245
cult to disengage the selector lever from the
al with the selector lever in the “P” For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals, “P” (PARK) position when next you drive
(PARK), “N” (NEUTRAL) or “D” the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
(DRIVE) position, the increase in engine with the service brake. force to the selector lever to move from the
revolutions may be limited. For longer waiting periods with the engine running, “P” (PARK) position.
place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) po-
sition and apply the parking brake, while holding When the A/T makes no speed change
Passing acceleration the vehicle stationary with the service brake. E00604800348
E00604500156
If the transmission does not change speeds while
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) posi-
driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough
tion, push the accelerator to the floor. The automat-
ic transmission will automatically downshift. CAUTION speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
that there is something unusual happening in the
l Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill transmission, causing a safety device to activate.
NOTE using the accelerator pedal (without us- We recommend you to have your vehicle checked 4
l In “Sports mode”, downshifts do not take ing the brake pedal). Always apply the as soon as possible.
place when the accelerator is depressed all parking brake and/or service brakes. 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving uphill,
the way to the floor. shift the selector lever into 2nd gear of the
Parking “Sports mode”.
Uphill/downhill driving E00604700161 This method might not work depending on
E00610500089 To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete the transmission malfunction.
stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then 2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road,
DRIVING UPHILL
move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. move the selector lever back to “D” (DRIVE).
The transmission may not upshift to a higher gear
If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, al-
if the computer determines the current speed can-
ways switch off the engine and remove the ignition
not be maintained once a higher gear is engaged.
key.
For smoother vehicle performance, if you release
the throttle while climbing a steep grade, the trans-
mission may not upshift. This is normal, as the com-
puter is temporarily preventing shifting. After reach-
ing the top of the hill, normal gear shift function
will resume.
OBKE12E1 4-23
Super select 4WD II (SS4 II) Shift lever position and 2WD/4WD op- 2WD/4WD
E00605700067 eration indication lamp Transfer shift lever operation in- Driving con-
Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can E00605800127 position dication ditions
be made by operating the transfer shift lever (A). lamp
Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate posi- 2WD/4WD
tion according to the road surface conditions. In ad- Transfer shift lever operation in- Driving con- When driv-
dition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp in- position dication ditions ing up or
dicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Refer lamp down steep
to “2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on page Low range hills, on
4-26. centre differ- rough or
When driv- 4LLc ential lock muddy roads
Rear-wheel
2H ing on dry engaged 4- (especially
drive
Vehicles with M/T paved road. wheel drive when in-
creased tor-
The basic po- que is re-
sition for su- quired).
per select
Full-time 4- 4WD II. : Illuminate
4H : Remain off
wheel drive When driv-
4 Vehicles with A/T
ing on dry
paved or slip-
pery roads. CAUTION
When driv- l The “4LLc” range gives maximum tor-
Centre dif-
ing on que for low-speed driving on steep slopes,
ferential lock
4HLc rough, sand as well as sandy, muddy, and other diffi-
engaged 4-
or snow cov- cult surfaces. On vehicles with A/T, do
wheel drive
ered roads. not exceed speeds of approximately
70 km/h (43 mph) in “4LLc” range.
: Illuminate
: Remain off
4-24 OBKE12E1
Transfer shift lever operation

CAUTION E00605900072
The transfer shift lever is operated by pushing it
l Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc” down and sliding it to the desired position.
or “4LLc” position on dry paved roads
and highways. Doing so may result in ex-
cessive tyre wear, increased fuel consump-
tion, and possible noise generation. It
may also increase the differential oil tem-
perature, which may damage the drive sys-
tem. Further, the drive train will be sub-
jected to excessive loading, resulting in oil
leakage, component seizure, or other seri-
ous problems. On dry paved roads and
highways, drive the vehicle in “2H” or
“4H” only.
Procedure
To shift from To
Vehicles with M/T Vehicles with A/T 4
2H 4H The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle
The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is
is either moving or stationary.
4H 2H or 4HLc either moving or stationary.
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever
to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the
to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfer
transfer shift lever.
shift lever.
When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be
4HLc 4H When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be
steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”
steered straight ahead, and release the accelerator pedal be-
(DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal be-
fore operating the transfer shift lever.
fore operating the transfer shift lever.
4HLc 4LLc Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and
operate the transfer shift lever. Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
4LLc 4HLc Keep depressing the clutch pedal while the 2WD/4WD op- TRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift lever.
eration indication lamp continues to blink.
NOTE
l Shiftingof the lever among “2H” ↔ “4H”
↔ “4HLc” should only be done at speeds be-
low 100 km/h (62 mph).
OBKE12E1 4-25
l When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in cold 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp “2H” ↔ “4H”
weather while the vehicle is in motion, the E00606000113
transmission gear may make some noise. In Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation
cold weather, try to shift the gear while the tion indication lamp
vehicle is stopped.
l When the lever is shifted between “2H” ↔
“4H” or “4H” ↔ “4HLc” while the vehicle
is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indica-
tion lamp blinks while the selection is in proc- 2H
ess. Drive slowly and normally after confirm-
ing that the lamp is illuminated. Refer to
“2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on
page 4-26.
l Do not move the selector lever while the 2WD/
4WD operation indication lamp is blinking.
A- Front wheel lamp
l On vehicles with cruise control, when the lev-
B- Centre differential lock lamp
er is shifted among “2H” ↔ “4H” ↔
“4HLc” while the cruise control is activated, C- Rear wheel lamp
the transfer gear may make some noise. D- Low-range centre differential lock lamp
Drive mode switching
4 When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
in progress
CAUTION the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp shows

the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation in-
l Do not operate the transfer shift lever dication lamp illuminates at each transfer shift lev-
while the rear wheels of the vehicle are er position as follows:
slipping on snow or ice.
4H
: Blink
: Illuminate
: Remain off
4-26 OBKE12E1
“2H” ↔ “4HLc” “4H” ↔ “4HLc” “4HLc” ↔ “4LLc”
Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation Transfer shift 2WD/4WD operation indication
tion indication lamp tion indication lamp lever position lamp
2H 4H 4HLc
Drive mode
Drive mode switching Drive mode switching switching in
in progress in progress progress 4
4HLc 4HLc 4LLc
: Blink : Blink : Blink

: Illuminate : Illuminate : Illuminate
: Remain off : Remain off : Remain off
OBKE12E1 4-27
NOTE l If the front and rear wheel lamps blink rapid-

l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp ly (twice per second) when you attempt to
blinks while the selection is in process. Take make a “4HLc” ↔ “4LLc” selection, the se-
the following precautions when the indica- lection cannot be made. Stop the vehicle and
tion lamp is blinking. release the accelerator pedal. Next, hold
• Keep the steering wheel in the straight down the clutch pedal (with M/T) or place
ahead position while making range selec- the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) po-
tions. If you attempt to drive forward sition (with A/T) and make the range selec-
with the steering wheel turned, gear rat- tion again.
tling may occur and the desired range
may not actually be selected.
• If the front wheel and/or centre differen-
tial lock lamps continue blinking after a
“2H” ↔ “4H” ↔ “4HLc” selection has
been made with the vehicle moving, hold
the steering wheel in the straight ahead po-
sition and slowly depress the accelerator
pedal several times.
• If, after a “4HLc” ↔ “4LLc” selection
4 has been made, the front and rear wheel
lamps continue blinking and the desired
range is not actually selected, return the
transfer shift lever to its previous posi-
tion. Place the steering wheel in the
straight ahead position, drive the vehicle CAUTION
forward, and release the accelerator ped- l If a problem is detected in the transfer sys-
al. Next, hold down the clutch pedal tem, a safety device will activate. The
(with M/T) or place the selector lever in front and rear wheel lamps will go out,
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with A/T) the centre differential lock lamp will
and make the range selection again. blink, and transfer shifting will become
impossible. Park your vehicle in a safe
place, turn off the engine for a few mo-
ments. Restart the engine.
The lamps should resume normal opera-
tion. If the lamps continue to blink, we rec-
ommend you to have the vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
4-28 OBKE12E1
Rear differential lock* 3. To deactivate the rear differential lock, press

the rear differential lock switch (2).
The rear differential lock indication
E00606200043 lamp
If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehicle be- E00606300233
comes stuck and cannot be freed even using When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
4-wheel drive, the rear differential lock switch (A) sition, the rear differential lock indication lamp (A)
can be used to activate the rear differential lock for in the meter cluster illuminates for a few seconds
extra traction. then indicates the rear differential lock’s operating
status (activated or deactivated).
CAUTION
l Operate the rear differential lock switch
after the wheels are stopped. Operating 4
the switch with the wheels turning may
Operating the rear differential lock cause the vehicle to dart in unexpected di-
1. Move the transfer shift lever to “4LLc” or rections. NOTE
“4HLc” position.
2. To activate the rear differential lock, press
l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp al-
so illuminates for a few seconds when the ig-
the rear differential lock switch (1). NOTE nition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
l The rear differential lock does not operate Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indication
when the transfer shift lever is in “4H” or lamp” on page 4-26.
“2H” position. The status of the rear differential lock (result-
l When the rear differential is locked with the ing from depression of the rear differential
transfer shift lever in “4LLc” or “4HLc” po- lock switch) is shown by blinking or steady
sition, changing the shift lever to “4H” or illumination of the rear differential lock indi-
“2H” position makes the rear differential un- cation lamp.
lock automatically.
OBKE12E1 4-29
The operation state of 2WD/4WD operation NOTE • If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph)
rear differential lock indication lamp l The indication lamp blinks while the rear dif- or lower, turn the steering wheel from
ferential lock is being switched between its side to side until the indication lamp illu-
activated and deactivated conditions. When minates steadily. If the vehicle is stuck in
the switching operation is complete, the indi- soft ground, make sure the area around
Rear differential lock cation lamp is either illuminated steadily or the vehicle is clear then repeatedly at-
deactivated not illuminated. tempt to drive forward and backward.
l The active stability & traction control The switching operation will be comple-
(ASTC) and anti-lock brake system (ABS) ted and the indication lamp will illumi-
functions are suspended while the rear differ- nate steadily.
ential lock is activated. ASTC indication
lamp, Active Stability Control function OFF
indication lamp, ABS warning lamp and CAUTION
brake warning lamp are illuminated while
these functions are suspended. It does not in- l If a problem is detected in the rear differ-
ential lock system, a safety device will ac-
dicate a problem. When the rear differential
tivate. The centre differential lock lamp,
lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and
front and rear wheel lamps will go out,
Switching in progress function again.
the rear differential lock indication lamp
Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-09,
4 “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-40, “ASTC
will blink, and the rear differential lock
will deactivate. Park your vehicle in a
indication lamp” on page 4-42, “Active sta-
safe place, turn off the engine for a few
bility control function OFF indication lamp”
moments. Restart the engine.
on page 4-43.
It is safe to continue driving if the lamps
l If the indication lamp continues blinking af-
resume normal operation. If the rear dif-
ter the switch has been pressed to deactivate
ferential lock indication lamp blinks
the rear differential lock, hold the steering
when the rear differential lock is reactiva-
Rear differential lock ac- wheel in the straight ahead position then slow-
ted, we recommend you to have the vehi-
tivated ly depress and release the accelerator pedal
cle checked as soon as possible.
several times.
l If the indication lamp continues blinking af-
: Blink ter the switch has been pressed to activate
: Illuminate (steady) the rear differential lock, bear in mind the fol-
: Remain off lowing instructions:
• If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph)
or higher, decelerate to a speed of 6 km/h
(4 mph) or lower. The switching opera-
tion will be completed and the indication
lamp will illuminate steadily.
4-30 OBKE12E1
When one of the wheels has fallen in a ditch When getting out of snow
When the vehicle is unable to get going because
one of the wheels is on the snow and the other on a
paved road.
Examples of effective use of the rear

differential lock
E00606400045 When driving on rocky roads
When the vehicle is unable to move because one of
the wheels is suspended in the air.
CAUTION Examples of incorrect use of the rear
l Use the rear differential lock only as an differential lock 4
E00606500046
emergency measure when the vehicle is
stuck and cannot be freed with the trans-
fer shift lever in “4LLc” or “4HLc” posi-
tion. Deactivate the rear differential lock WARNING
immediately after using it. l If the “4LLc” or “4HLc” position is selec-
ted along with the rear differential lock,
the following phenomena appear and it is
very dangerous.
Please be sure to release the rear differen-
tial lock on normal roads.
• If the rear differential lock is used by
mistake when driving on a paved
road: With the rear differential lock
on, the power to drive the vehicle
straight ahead becomes very strong,
which may make it difficult to turn
the steering wheel.
OBKE12E1 4-31
WARNING 4-wheel drive operation

E00606600627
By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehi-
l If the rear differential lock is used by mis- cle are rigidly connected with each other. This im-
take except when making an emergency
escape on snow or frozen road: It be- proves the traction characteristics. When turning
comes difficult to make a steady turn. sharp corners or moving forward and backward re-
peatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, which
l In the case where the condition of the
is felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel drive vehicle
road is different for the right tyre to
drive from the left tyre (such as one tyre can accelerate more quickly and smoothly.
on a paved road and the other on ice), di- However, note that the braking distance is not short-
rection of the vehicle may change abrupt- er than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle.
ly when engine braking or accelerating. When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow,
Do not use the rear differential lock ex- mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehi-
WARNING cept when making an emergency escape
on a snow or frozen road, but drive with
cle correctly.
l If the rear differential lock is used by mis- 4WD. NOTE

take when turning a curve or making a
right or left turn at a crossing or the like: l The driving posture should be more upright
and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust the
The vehicle is unable to make a turn and
4 may go straight ahead.
seat to a good position for easy steering and
pedal operation. Be sure to wear the seat belt.
l After driving on rough roads, check each
part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly
with water. Refer to the “Vehicle care” sec-
tion and “Inspection and maintenance follow-
ing rough road operation” on page 4-35.
Driving on dry paved road and highway

Select the “2H” or “4H” position to drive on the
dry paved road. Especially on dry highway, never
select the “4HLc” or “4LLc” position.
4-32 OBKE12E1
Driving on sandy or muddy roads

CAUTION Set the transfer shift lever to the “4HLc” or “4LLc” WARNING
l Selecting the “4HLc” or “4LLc” position position and then gradually depress the accelerator l When attempting to rock your vehicle out
to drive on dry paved road will increase pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on the of a stuck position, be sure that the area
the fuel consumption with possible noise accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and drive around the vehicle is clear of people and
generation and early tyre wear. at low speed. physical objects. The rocking motion may
It may also increase the differential oil cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
temperature, resulting in possible dam- ward or backward, causing injury or dam-
age to the driving system. CAUTION age to nearby people or objects.
Further, the drive train will be subjected
to excessive loading, possibly leading to l Do not force the vehicle or drive reckless-
ly on sandy surfaces. In comparison with NOTE
oil leakage, component seizure, or other
normal road surfaces, the engine and oth- l Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and turn-
serious faults.
er drive-system components are put un- ing; such operations could result in the vehi-
der excessive strain when driving on such cle becoming stuck.
Driving on snowy or icy roads a surface, and this could lead to accidents. l If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or mud-
Set the transfer shift lever to the “4H” or “4HLc” l If any of following conditions occur while dy roads, it can often be moved with a rock-
position in accordance with the road conditions, the vehicle is being driven, immediately ing motion. Move the selector lever rhythmi-
and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for park your vehicle in a safe place and fol- cally between the “D” (DRIVE) and “R” (RE-
a smooth start. low these procedures:
• The needle in the temperature gauge
VERSE) position (with M/T, between 1st and 4
Reverse), while applying slight pressure to
NOTE approaches the overheating zone. the accelerator pedal.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on
l The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is
page 6-04.
l It is recommended to start the vehicle with
recommended. parking brake partially, but not completely,
• A/T fluid temperature warning lamp applied by slightly pulling the parking brake
l In order to ensure that the anti-lock brake sys-
illuminates.
tem (ABS) will operate correctly in situa- lever.
Refer to “When the A/T fluid temper- After the vehicle has become free, do not for-
tions where tyre chains have been fitted,
ature warning lamp comes on” on get to release the parking brake.
drive in the “4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc” position.
page 4-22.
l Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, l If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddy
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- conditions, the use of tyre chains is recom-
ing (downshifting). mended. Because the extent of muddy condi-
tions is difficult to judge and the vehicle
could become bogged down very deeply, op-
CAUTION eration should be at a low speed. If possible,
get out of the vehicle and check the condi-
l Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera- tions ahead before proceeding.
tion, and sharp turning; such operations
could cause skidding and spinouts.
OBKE12E1 4-33
l Driving over roads in coastal areas or roads NOTE 1. Check depths of a stream and geographical
on which anti-skid preparations have been l When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes features before attempting to cross a stream
spread can cause rust on the vehicle; wash are applied suddenly because of an obstacle and ford the stream where the water is as shal-
the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible af- encountered, control of the vehicle could be low as practicable.
ter such use. lost. Before descending the slope, walk it 2. Cross at a place where the water is less than
down and confirm the path. 70 cm deep.
Climbing sharp grades l Before descending a grade, it is necessary to 3. Set the transfer shift lever to the “4LLc” po-
Set the transfer shift lever to the “4LLc” position to choose the appropriate gear. Avoid changing sition.
maximize the engine torque. gears or depressing the clutch while descend- 4. Drive slowly at a speed of approximately
ing the grade. 5 km/h (3 mph) to avoid splashing too much
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible water.
WARNING to the operator for any damage or injury
caused or liability incurred by improper and
l Go straight up. Do not try to traverse
across a steep slope.
negligent operation of a vehicle. All techni- CAUTION
ques of vehicle operation described herein de-
l If you begin to lose traction, ease off the pend on the skill and experience of the opera- l Do not attempt to cross a stream at a
accelerator pedal and gently turn the place where the water is more than 70 cm
tor and other participating parties and any de-
steering wheel alternatively left and right deep.
viation from the recommended operation in-
to regain adequate traction again. structions above is at their own risk. l Cross a stream temporarily for emergen-
4 cies and avoid doing so for a long period
of time.
NOTE Turning sharp corners l After crossing a stream, apply the brakes
l Choose as smooth a slope as possible with When turning a sharp corner in the “4HLc” or to be sure they are functioning properly.
few stones or other obstacles. “4LLc” position at low speed, a slight difference in If the brakes are wet and not functioning
l Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk steering may be experienced similar to as if the properly, dry them out by driving slowly
it up to confirm that the vehicle can handle brakes were applied. This is called tight corner brak- while lightly depressing the brake pedal.
the grade. ing and results from each of the 4 tyres being at a Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully.
different distance from the corner.
Descending sharp grades The phenomenon is peculiar to 4-wheel drive vehi-
Set the transfer shift lever to the “4LLc” position, cles. If this occurs, either straighten the steering NOTE
use the engine brake (downshifting) and descend wheel, or change to rear-wheel drive. l Because the inside of the vehicle is flooded
slowly. with water when crossing at a place where
Crossing a stream the water is more than 50 cm deep, we recom-
4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily water- mend you to have your vehicle inspected.
WARNING proof. If the electrical circuits become wet, further
operation of the vehicle will be impossible; there-
l Frequent crossing of streams can adversely af-
fect the life span of the vehicle; we recom-
l Avoid snaking down a sharp grade. De- fore, avoid crossing streams unless absolutely nec- mend you to take the necessary measures to
scend the grade as straight as possible. essary. If crossing a stream is unavoidable, use the prepare, inspect, and repair the vehicle.
following procedure:
4-34 OBKE12E1
Inspection and maintenance Cautions on handling of 4-wheel CAUTION

following rough road operation drive vehicles
E00606700048 E00606800401 l Always use tyres of the same size, same
After operating the vehicle in rough road condi- type, and same brand, and which have no
tions, be sure to perform the following inspection Tyres and wheels wear differences. Using tyres which differ
and maintenance procedures: Since the driving torque can be applied to the 4 in size, type, brand or the degree of wear
l Check that the vehicle has not been damaged wheels, the performance of the vehicle when oper- will cause excessive loading, resulting in
by rocks, gravel, etc. ating in 4-wheel drive is greatly affected by the con- possible damage to the drive system.
l Carefully wash the vehicle with water. dition of the tyres.
After washing, drive the vehicle slowly Towing
while lightly depressing the brake pedal in or- Pay close attention to the tyres. If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have
der to dry out the brakes. If the brakes still l Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer to it done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
do not function properly, we recommend you “Tyres and wheels” on page 9-12. ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.
to have the brakes checked as soon as possible l Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of the In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a
l Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog- same size and type. tow truck.
ging the radiator core. When replacement of any of the tyres or l The engine runs but the vehicle does not
l After crossing a stream, be sure to have the wheels is necessary, replace all of them. move or abnormal noise is produced.
following items inspected at a MITSUBISHI l All tyres should be rotated whenever the l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals
MOTORS Authorized Service Point and take
the necessary measures.
wear difference between the front and rear
tyres is recognizable.
that oil or some other fluid is leaking. 4
• Check the brake system and, if necessary,
have it serviced. Only when you cannot receive a towing service
• Check the engine, transmission, transfer, from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
Good vehicle performance cannot be expected if ice Point or commercial tow truck service, tow
and differential oil or grease level and tur- there is a difference in wear between tyres. Refer to
bidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it indi- your vehicle carefully in accordance with the in-
“Tyre rotation” on page 8-14. structions given in “Towing” on page 6-15.
cates water contamination. Replace it
with new oil or grease. l Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly.
• Grease the propeller shaft. l If the tyre inflation pressure is inappropriate,
• Check the inside of the vehicle. If ingress the transfer gear may make some noise and
of water is found, dry the carpet etc. shock while changing the drive mode.
• Inspect the headlamps. If the headlamp
bulb is flooded with water, we recom-
mend you to have it drained.
OBKE12E1 4-35
If you can shift the transfer shift lever to the “2H” position. Clutch operation
CAUTION Quick or slight clutch engagement made while the
l Be sure to shift the transfer shift lever to engine is running at high speed will cause damage
the “2H” position. Never try to tow with to the clutch and transmission because the tractive
the transfer shift lever in the “4H”, force is very great.
“4HLc” or “4LLc” positions and with Operate the pedal slowly and positively.
any of the wheels on the ground (Type A
or B). This could result in damage to the
vehicle’s driving system, or the vehicle
could become separated from the tow
truck and unexpected accident might re-
sult. If you cannot shift the transfer shift
lever to “2H” position or the transmission If you cannot shift the transfer shift lever to the “2H”
is malfunctioning or damaged, transport position.
the vehicle with all the wheels on a car-
riage (Type C or D) as illustrated.
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive vehicle
WARNING
l Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the vehicle.
The tyre on the ground may turn and the
vehicle may roll off the jack.
4-36 OBKE12E1
Braking CAUTION WARNING

E00607001524
All the parts of the brake system are critical to safe-
ty. We recommend you to have the vehicle
l Bring the vehicle to halt in a safe location l If the power assist is lost or if either
by applying the brakes gently. Applying brake hydraulic system stops working
checked at regular intervals according to the serv- the brakes rapidly or driving at high properly, have your vehicle checked im-
ice booklet. speed may make the vehicle unstable. mediately.
CAUTION NOTE Warning lamp

l Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may l The brake warning lamp illuminates to indi-
l Avoid driving habits that cause heavy turn on the brake warning lamp, ABS warn- cate a fault in the braking system. Read
braking and never “ride” the brakes by ing lamp and brake warning buzzer. (The “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-09.
resting your foot on the brake pedal ASTC indication lamp and Active Stability l On vehicles with the rear differential lock,
while driving. Control function OFF indication lamp also the active stability & traction control
It causes brake overheating and fade. turn on.) It is normal if the lamp goes out (ASTC) and anti-lock brake system (ABS)
and the buzzer stops sounding after a few sec- functions are suspended while the rear differ-
Brake system onds. ential lock is activated. ASTC indication
lamp, Active Stability Control function OFF
The service brake is divided into two brake circuits l In certain cases immediately after the engine
indication lamp, ABS warning lamp and
so that when one brake circuit fails, the other is has been started or when the brake pedal is
available to stop the vehicle. In this situation, even depressed repeatedly, a noise generated by op- brake warning lamp are illuminated while
these functions are suspended. It does not in-
4
if the brake pedal moves down to the very end of eration of brake devices may be heard com-
its possible stroke, keep depressing the brake pedal ing from the engine compartment, or the dicate a problem. When the rear differential
down harder than usual; stop driving as soon as pos- brake pedal vibration may be felt. This type lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and
sible and have the brake system repaired. of noise or vibration is normal and there is function again.
For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page no need for concern. In fact, it indicates that Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-09,
3-09. the corresponding devices are operating nor- “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-40, “ASTC
mal. indication lamp” on page 4-42, “Active sta-
bility control function OFF indication lamp”
Power brakes on page 4-43.
The power brakes use brake fluid pressurized by
the pump to power-assist the brake. If the brake sys- WARNING When brakes are wet
tem fails during driving, the brake warning lamp
comes on and a buzzer sounds continuously. In this l Do not turn off the engine while your ve- Check the brake system while driving at a low
hicle is in motion. If you turn off the en- speed immediately after starting, especially when
case, the brake may not work properly. gine while driving, the power assistance
If this buzzer should continue to sound, park your the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.
for the braking system will stop working A film of water can be formed on the brake discs
vehicle in a safe place and have the system checked. and your brakes will not work effectively.
Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-09. and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy
rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is
washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driv-
ing slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.
OBKE12E1 4-37
When driving downhill Brake assist system l When the anti-lock brake system warning
lamp is illuminated, the brake assist system
It is important to take advantage of the engine brak- E00627000376
ing by shifting to a lower shift position while driv- The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers is not functioning.
ing on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly when it
brakes from overheating. is necessary to do so (such as in emergency stop sit-
uations) and provides greater braking force.
WARNING If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes

will be applied with more force than usual.
l Do not leave any objects near the brake
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; do-
ing so could prevent the full pedal stroke
that would be necessary in an emergency.
CAUTION
Make sure that the pedal can be operated l The brake assist system is not a device de-
freely at all times. Make sure the floor signed to exercise braking force greater
mat is securely held in place. than its capacity. Make sure to always
keep a sufficient distance between vehi-
cles in front of you without relying too
Brake pads much on the brake assist system.
l Avoid hard braking situations.
4 New brakes need to be broken-in by moder-
ate use for the first 200 km (125 miles). NOTE
l The disc brakes are provided with a warning l Once the brake assist system is operational,
device which emits a shrieking metallic it maintains great braking force even if the
sound while braking if the brake pads have brake pedal is lightly released.
reached their wear limit. To stop its operation, completely remove
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads re- your foot from the brake pedal.
placed immediately. l When the brake assist system is in use while
driving, you may feel the brake pedal at-
tempt to resist, the pedal moves in small mo-
WARNING tions in conjunction with the operation noise,
or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vi-
l Driving with worn brake pads will make brate. This occurs when the brake assist sys-
it harder to stop, and can cause an acci-
dent. tem is operating normally and does not indi-
cate faulty operation. Continue to firmly de-
press the brake pedal.
4-38 OBKE12E1
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) l Operation of ABS is not restricted to situa-

tions where brakes are applied suddenly. CAUTION
E00607101248
Environmental conditions can have an effect on This system may also operate to prevent
braking. During sudden braking when there is wheel lock when you are driving over man- l Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehi-
snow, ice, oil, water etc. on the road surface, a skid holes, steel road-work plates, or the vehicle cle. It cannot for instance avoid accidents
may occur. In this situation, steering control and is driven over steps or level differences in that may result from excessive speed on
braking effectiveness is reduced and the stopping the road, road markings, or other surfaces bends or following another vehicle too
distance is increased. The vehicle may also go into which are difficult for the wheels to grip. closely or aquaplaning. It should remain
an uncontrolled spin. l When the ABS is activated, you may feel the the driver’s task to observe safety precau-
The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking dur- brake pedal pulsation and the vibrations of tions to judge speeds and brake applica-
ing braking, thus maintaining directional stability, the vehicle body and steering wheel. You tions correctly in such conditions.
ensuring controllability and providing optimum may also hear a characteristic noise. At this
braking force. time, you may feel as if the pedal attempts to l Be sure to use tyres of the same type and
size on 4 wheels.
resist being depressed. If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may
Driving hints This is a normal result of the ABS operation, not function normally.
and does not indicate a problem.
l Always maintain the same distance from the In this situation, to let the ABS work for l Never install a limited-slip differential,
vehicle in front of you as you would for a ve- which is not a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
hicle not equipped with ABS. you, just hold the brake pedal down more genuine part, as the ABS may not func-
Compared with vehicles not fitted with ABS, firmly. Do not pump the brake. This will
your vehicle may require a longer stopping result in reduced braking performance.
tion normally.
We recommend you to consult a 4
distance in the following cases: l When the engine starts and after starting to MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads. drive, you might hear operation noise from Service Point.
• Driving with tyre chains installed. the engine compartment or feel a shock from
• Driving on roads where the road surface the brake pedal. This is normal. The ABS is
is pitted or has other differences in sur- performing self-check.
face height. l The ABS will operate after the vehicle has ac-
• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor driv- celerated to a speed in excess of approximate-
ing surfaces. ly 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when
the vehicle decelerates to a speed below
l In order to ensure that the ABS will operate
about 5 km/h (3 mph).
correctly in situations where tyre chains have
been fitted, drive in the “4H”, “4HLc”, or
“4LLc” position.
OBKE12E1 4-39
ABS warning lamp NOTE If the warning lamp illuminates while

E00607200532
The ABS warning lamp should illuminate when the
l Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may driving
turn on the brake warning lamp, ABS warn- E00607300416
ignition switch is turned “ON”, and should go off ing lamp and brake warning buzzer. (The
in a few seconds. ASTC indication lamp and Active Stability If only the ABS warning lamp illuminates
Control function OFF indication lamp also l Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
turn on.) It is normal if the lamp goes out Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
and the buzzer stops sounding after a few sec- Restart the engine and check to see whether
onds. the lamp goes out after a few minutes driv-
l On vehicles with the rear differential lock, ing; if it then remains off during driving,
the active stability & traction control there is no problem.
(ASTC) and anti-lock brake system (ABS) However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it
functions are suspended while the rear differ- lights up again when the vehicle is driven,
ential lock is activated. ASTC indication we recommend you to have the vehicle
lamp, Active Stability Control function OFF checked as soon as possible.
indication lamp, ABS warning lamp and l The ABS warning lamp can illuminate if the
brake warning lamp are illuminated while battery voltage is insufficient when the en-
these functions are suspended. It does not in- gine is started. In this case, it does not indi-
dicate a problem. When the rear differential cate an ABS fault.
4 CAUTION lock is disengaged, these lamps go out and Charge the battery by allowing the engine to
function again. idle for a while.
l If the warning lamp stays on or does not Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-09, If the battery has been charged but the ABS
illuminate when you start the vehicle, it in- “ASTC indication lamp” on page 4-42, “Ac- warning lamp continues to illuminate or illu-
dicates that the ABS is not functioning tive stability control function OFF indication minates intermittently, we recommend you
and that only the standard brake system lamp” on page 4-43. to have the vehicle inspected.
is in operation. (In this condition the stand-
ard hydraulic brake system will still func- If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning
tion.) We recommend you to have your ve- lamp illuminate at the same time
hicle inspected as soon as possible. l The ABS and brake force distribution func-
tion will not work, so hard braking could
make the vehicle unstable.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and we rec-
ommend you to have it checked.
4-40 OBKE12E1
Inspection following snowy road oper- Power steering system Active stability & traction control
ation E00607400260
(ASTC)
E00618300012 The power steering system operates while the en-
E00613800230
After driving on snowy roads, remove any snow gine is running. It helps reduce the effort needed to The active stability & traction control (ASTC)
and ice which may have become adhered to the turn the steering wheel.
takes overall control of the anti-lock brake system,
wheel areas. The power steering system has mechanical steering
Active Stability Control function and active trac-
When doing this, be careful not to damage the capability in case the power assist is lost. If the pow-
tion control function to maintain the vehicle’s sta-
wheel speed sensors (A) and cables located at each er assist is lost for some reason, you will still be
bility and traction. Please read this section in con-
wheel on vehicles equipped with an ABS. able to steer your vehicle. If the power assist is junction with the pages on the anti-lock brake sys-
lost, you will notice it takes much more effort to tem, Active Stability Control function and active
steer and that there is much more “free play” in the
Front traction control function.
steering wheel. If this happens, take your vehicle to
an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 4-39
Active stability control function ® p. 4-43
Active traction control function ® p. 4-44
WARNING
l Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Stopping the engine would make CAUTION
the steering wheel extremely hard to
turn, possibly resulting in an accident. l Do not over-rely on the ASTC. Even 4
when the ASTC is operating, there are lim-
its to how far it can ensure vehicle stabili-
ty; reckless driving may lead to accidents.
Rear CAUTION Always drive carefully, taking account of
the road conditions.
l Do not leave the steering wheel turned all
the way in one direction. This can cause l Be sure to use the same specified type and
damage to the power steering system. size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise,
there is a possibility that the ASTC will
not work properly.
NOTE
l An operation noise may be emitted from the
engine compartment in the following situa-
tions. The sound is associated with checking
the operations of the ASTC. At this time,
you may feel a shock from the brake pedal if
OBKE12E1 4-41
you depress it. These do not indicate a mal- Active traction control function indication To reactivate the Active Stability Control function,
function. lamp ® p. 4-44 press the ASC OFF switch again. It is strongly rec-
• When the ignition switch is set to the ommended that the Active Stability Control func-
“ON” position. tion normally be kept activated.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while af-
ter the engine is turned on.
l When the ASTC is activated, you may feel a
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
ing sound from the engine compartment.
This indicates that the system is operating nor-
mally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
l When the anti-lock brake system warning
lamp is illuminated, the ASTC is not active.
l On vehicles with the rear differential lock,
the ASTC and ABS functions are suspended
while the rear differential lock is activated.
ASTC indication lamp, Active Stability Con- ASC OFF switch
trol function OFF indication lamp, ABS warn- E00620500095
ing lamp and brake warning lamp are illumi- The Active Stability Control function is automati-
4 nated while these functions are suspended. It
does not indicate a problem. When the rear
cally activated when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position. You can deactivate the system
differential lock is disengaged, these lamps by pressing the ASC OFF switch when the vehicle
go out and function again. is stationary.
Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-09,
“ABS warning lamp” on page 4-40, “Active
stability control function OFF indication
CAUTION
lamp” on page 4-43. l For safety, operate the ASC OFF switch
with the vehicle stationary.
ASTC indication lamp
E00618000035
The ASTC indication lamp shows the operating sta-
tus of the Active Stability Control function and ac-
tive traction control function. For details, see these
sections of this owner’s manual:
Active stability control function indication

lamp ® p. 4-43
4-42 OBKE12E1
Driving hints NOTE If the indication lamps stay on or do not illuminate

E00618100036
l The Active Stability Control function does when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand or not operate when the transfer shift lever is in sition, we recommend you to have your vehicle in-
fresh snow with the transfer shift lever in the “2H”, the “4LLc” position. spected.
“4H”, or “4HLc” position, you may find that opera- When the Active Stability Control function
tion of the ASTC prevents the engine speed from in- is operating with the transfer shift lever in indication lamp blinks when the Active Stability
creasing in response to depression of the accelera- the “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc” position, moving Control function is operating.
tor pedal. If this happens and the vehicle remains the shift lever to the “4LLc” position makes indication lamp illuminates when the Active Sta-
stuck as a result, place the transfer shift lever in the the Active Stability Control function deacti- bility Control function is deactivated by either of
“4LLc” position or turn the Active Stability Con- vate automatically. the following operations:
trol switch OFF. The vehicle will then be easier to
extricate. (Brake control of the active traction con-
l On vehicles with rear differential lock, the Ac- l The ASC OFF switch is pressed to deacti-
tive Stability Control function does not oper- vate the system.
trol function is still working to prevent wheel spins ate when the rear differential lock is activated.
when ASC OFF switch “OFF” or “4LLc” position
l The transfer shift lever is placed in the
“4LLc” position.
selected.)
Active stability control function indication lamp
E00614000183
NOTE CAUTION
l If the vehicle speed increases to about
l When indication lamp blinks, the Ac-
120 km/h (75 mph) with the Active Stability
Control function deactivated, the Active Sta- tive Stability Control function is operat-
ing, which means that the road is slippery
4
bility Control function automatically starts op-
erating. To subsequently stop the Active Sta- or that your vehicle’s wheels are spinning
bility Control function, stop the vehicle and excessively. If this happens, drive slower
press the ASC OFF switch again. with less accelerator input.
l If a fault occurs in the device, the ABS
warning lamp or and indication
Active stability control function lamps illuminate as warning. Park your
E00613900097
The Active Stability Control function is designed vehicle in a safe place and stop the en-
to help maintain the vehicle’s control in slippery gine. Then, start the engine again and
conditions, or during rapid steering manoeuvres. It check whether the ABS warning lamp or
Active stability control function indica- and indication lamps go out.
works by controlling the engine output and brake tion lamp
on each wheel. If the ABS warning lamp or and in-
Active stability control function OFF indication lamps remains lit even after the
dication lamp engine has been started, we recommend
you to have your vehicle checked.
The indication lamps should illuminate when the ig-
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position and
should go off after a few seconds.
OBKE12E1 4-43
NOTE When the active Traction Control System operates,

l Immediately after reconnection of the battery CAUTION the active traction control function indication lamp
cable, the indication lamp will illuminate (1) blinks and the indication lamp for the wheel (2)
l If the temperature in the braking system being subjected to antispin control also blinks.
and the Active Stability Control function will increases excessively due to continuous
stop operating. If the vehicle is driven and brake control on a slippery road surface,
the indication lamp goes off, the Active a warning buzzer will sound intermittent-
Stability Control function will again start op- ly to warn the driver. If driving continues
erating. in spite of the buzzer and the tempera-
If the indication lamp illuminates again or il- ture in the braking system increases fur-
luminates even though the battery has not ther, the indication lamp will illumi-
been disconnected, an insufficient battery nate, the warning buzzer will sound con-
voltage or other problems may be the reason. tinuously for approximately 3 seconds,
We recommend you to have your vehicle in- and active traction control function oper-
spected. ation will be suspended to protect the brak-
ing system. (Normal operation of the vehi-
Active traction control function cle will not be affected.) If the vehicle is
E00614100041 stopped and the indication lamp goes Example indication: Active traction control func-
The active traction control function maintains trac- off, the active traction control function tion controlling front-right wheel
4 tion on slippery road surfaces by automatically con-
trolling the engine output and applying the brakes
will start operating again.
so the driving wheels are prevented from spinning. NOTE

The active traction control function automatically Active traction control function indication lamp l In the event of a fault in the Active Stability
E00614200127
turns ON when the ignition switch is turned to the Control function, the and indication
The indication lamp (1) should illuminate when lamps illuminate. As a result, an indication
“ON” position.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position of the active traction control function is limi-
and should go off after a few seconds. ted to flashing of the indication lamp for the
If the indication lamp stays on or does not illumi- wheel (2) being subjected to antispin control.
nate when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, we recommend you to have your vehicle
inspected.
4-44 OBKE12E1
CAUTION Cruise control* Cruise control switches

E00609100519
Cruise control is an automatic speed control system
l If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
that keeps a set speed. It can be activated at about
switch in the “ON” position and only the
front wheels or only the rear wheels 40 km/h (25 mph) or more.
raised off the ground, the active traction
control function may operate, resulting in
an accident. When towing the vehicle CAUTION
with the front wheels raised, keep the ig-
nition switch in the “LOCK” or “ACC” l When you do not wish to drive at a set
speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.
position. When towing the vehicle with
the rear wheels raised, keep the ignition l Do not use cruise control when driving
conditions will not allow you to stay at
switch in the “ACC” position. the same speed, such as in heavy traffic
Refer to “Towing” on page 6-15. or on roads that are winding, icy, snow- A- “ON OFF” switch
covered, wet, slippery, on a steep down- Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
hill slope.
l On vehicles with M/T, do not move the B- “COAST SET” switch
gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) posi- Used to reduce the set speed and to set the de-
tion while driving at a set speed without
depressing the clutch pedal. The engine
sired speed. 4
will run too fast and might be damaged. C- “ACC RES” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to
the original set speed.
NOTE
l Cruise control may not be able to keep your D- “CANCEL” switch
speed on uphills or downhills. Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
l Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed. NOTE
l Your speed may increase to more than the l When operating the cruise control switches,
set speed on a steep downhill. You must use press the cruise control switches correctly.
the brake to control your speed. As a result, The set speed driving may be deactivated au-
the set speed driving is deactivated. tomatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.
To activate
E00609300553
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, press the “ON OFF” switch (A) to turn
OBKE12E1 4-45
on the cruise control. The “CRUISE” indica- 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired When you reach your desired speed, release the
tion lamp in the meter cluster will come on. speed, then press and release the “COAST switch. Your new cruising speed is now set.
SET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE” indica-
tion lamp is illuminated. The vehicle will
then maintain the desired speed.
To increase your speed in small amounts, press the

“ACC RES” switch for less than about 1 second
and release it.
4 NOTE Each time you press the “ACC RES” switch, your
vehicle will go about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
l When you release the “COAST SET”
NOTE switch, the vehicle speed will be set.
l If the cruise control is on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” po-
sition, cruise control will be on automatically
To increase the set speed
E00609400482
the next time you start the engine. The There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
“CRUISE” indication lamp will also be on.
l If the battery voltage is insufficient, the mem- “ACC RES” switch
ory data for the cruise control may be erased. Press and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C) while
As a result, the “CRUISE” indication lamp driving at the set speed, and your speed will then
may not come on when you restart the engine. gradually increase.
If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switch
once again to turn on the cruise control.
4-46 OBKE12E1
Accelerator pedal When you reach your desired speed, release the Brake pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal,
pedal to reach your desired speed and then press which disengages the cruise control, then press the
the “COAST SET” switch (B) and release the “COAST SET” switch (B) and release the switch
switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed.
speed.
To slow down your speed in small amounts, press

the “COAST SET” switch for less than about 1 sec-
ond and release it.
Each time you press the “COAST SET” switch,
your vehicle will slow down by about 1.6 km/h
4
To decrease the set speed
E00609500412 (1 mph).
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
“COAST SET” switch

Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will slow
down gradually.
OBKE12E1 4-47
To temporarily increase or decrease To deactivate

the speed E00609700632 WARNING
The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:
E00619500037
l Press the “ON OFF” switch (A) (Cruise con- l On vehicles with A/T, although the set
speed driving will be deactivated when
To temporarily increase the speed trol will be turned off)
shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normal- l Press the “CANCEL” switch (D). never move the selector lever to the “N”
ly. When you release the pedal, you will return to l Depress the brake pedal. (NEUTRAL) position while driving.
your set speed. You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated as

follows:
l When the engine speed rises and approaches
the tachometer's red zone (the red-coloured
part of the tachometer dial).
CAUTION
4 l When the set speed driving is deactivated
automatically in any situation other than
The set speed driving is deactivated automatically those listed above, there may be a system
To temporarily decrease the speed
in any of the following ways. malfunction.
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To
return to the previously set speed, press the “ACC l When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehi- Press the “ON-OFF” switch to turn off
cles with M/T). the cruise control and have your vehicle
RES” switch (C). Refer to “To resume the set
speed” on page 4-49. l When your speed slows to about 15 km/h inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
(9 mph) or more below the set speed because Authorized Service Point.
of a hill, etc.
l When your speed slows to about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or less.
l When the active stability & traction control
(ASTC) starts operating. Refer to “Active Sta-
bility & Traction Control (ASTC)” on page
4-41.
4-48 OBKE12E1
To resume the set speed

E00609800460
Reversing sensor system* Corner and back sensor locations
E00618500014
E00615500055
If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condi- This system operates when you are backing the ve- There are two corner sensors (A) at the corners of
tion described in “To deactivate” on page 4-48, hicle. It uses corner and back sensors to detect an the rear bumper, and two back sensors (B) in the
you can resume the previously set speed by press- obstacle and sounds a buzzer to inform you of the spare wheel garnish.
ing the “ACC RES” switch (C) while driving at a approximate distance to the obstacle.
speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.
CAUTION
l The reversing sensor system assists you in
determining the approximate distance be-
tween the vehicle and an obstacle located
behind the vehicle. It has limitations in
terms of detectable areas and objects,
and may not properly detect some ob-
jects. Therefore, do not place excessive
confidence in the reversing sensor system
and operate the vehicle as carefully as
you would do with a vehicle not equipped
with this system.
Obstacle detection areas
E00615600261
4
Under either of the following conditions, however, l Make sure to check the surroundings The detection areas of the corner and back sensors
using the switch does not allow you to resume the with your own eyes to ensure safety. Do are limited to those shown in the illustration. Be-
previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the not operate the vehicle by relying on the cause the back sensors are built in the overhanging
speed setting procedure: reversing sensor system alone. area of the vehicle (spare wheel garnish), the sen-
l The “ON OFF” switch is pressed. sors are unable to detect low or thin obstacles, or
obstacles on the bottom of the spare wheel garnish
l The ignition switch is turned OFF. or the bottom of the centre of the rear bumper.
l “CRUISE” indication lamp is turned OFF. Thus, make sure to check the surroundings as you
operate the vehicle in a safe manner.
Reversing sensor system detection areas

Depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with
a towing bar, you can change the reversing sensor
system between the standard mode and the towing
bar mode. The towing bar mode changes the sys-
tem to exclude the area in which the towing bar is
mounted from the detection areas.
OBKE12E1 4-49
Vehicles without a towing bar NOTE

The detection areas are within approximately l If the rear bumper or the spare wheel garnish CAUTION
50 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 150 cm (B) has been exposed to an impact, the corner or • The vehicle is too close to an obstacle.
from the back sensors. back sensors may fail and prevent the system • The sensors or surroundings have
from functioning properly. We recommend been wiped by hand, or stickers or ac-
you to have your vehicle inspected. cessories have been attached.
l The sensors do not detect objects located in l The reversing sensor system may not prop-
the area directly below or near the bumper. If erly detect the following:
the height of an object is lower than the moun- • Objects that are thin, such as wire
ted position of the corner or back sensors, nets or ropes.
the sensors may not continue detecting it • Objects that absorb sound waves,
even if they detected it initially. such as snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp
For information on how to change the detection angle.
areas, please refer to “Changing the detection • Objects with a smooth surface, such
areas” on page 4-52. as glass.
• Objects that are low, such as kerb-
Vehicles with a towing bar stones.
4 The detection areas are within approximately CAUTION
50 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 150 cm (B)
from the back sensors. The non-detection areas (C) l The reversing sensor system may not op- NOTE
are within approximately 20 cm (D) from the bump- erate properly under the following condi- l The buzzer may sound lower than the normal
er. tions: warning sound when the reversing sensor sys-
• The sensors or surroundings are cov- tem is receiving ultrasonic noise from other
ered with ice, snow, or mud. sources, but this is not a malfunction. The buz-
• The sensors are frozen. zer will stop sounding and the system will re-
• The system receives ultrasonic noise turn to normal operation after the noise is no
from other sources (the horns of other longer received.
vehicles, motorcycle engines, brakes,
radios, pouring rain, splashing water,
tyre chains, etc.).
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold
(while the vehicle is parked for a long
period of time under a blazing sun or
in cold weather).
• The vehicle tilts significantly.
• The vehicle is driven on a rough road
(with a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy
surface).
4-50 OBKE12E1
To operate It will flash in case there is a malfunction in the sys- • Setting when towing bar is not equipped
E00615700581 tem. For details, refer to ““SONAR OFF” indica- When the gearshift lever is moved to the
To operate the system, move the gearshift lever to tion lamp” on page 4-52. “R” (Reverse) position (with M/T) or the
the “R” (Reverse) position (with M/T) or the selec- selector lever is moved to the “R” (RE-
tor lever to the “R” (REVERSE) position (with VERSE) position (with A/T), the revers-
A/T) while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- ing sensor system will operate even if cor-
tion. To stop the operation, push the “SONAR” ner sensor operation was stopped by push-
switch. ing the “SONAR” switch.
• Setting when towing bar is equipped
LHD When reversing sensor system operation
was stopped by pushing the “SONAR”
switch, the reversing sensor system will
not operate until the engine has been stop-
ped even if the gearshift lever is moved
to the “R” (Reverse) position (with M/T)
or the selector lever is moved to the “R”
(REVERSE) position (with A/T).
To return the system to the operating state, push To resume reversing sensor system opera-
RHD
the “SONAR” switch again. When the system re- tion, push the “SONAR” switch or stop
turns to the operating state, the buzzer sounds once
and the “SONAR OFF” indication lamp turns off.
and restart the engine, and then move the
gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) posi-
4
tion (with M/T) or the selector lever to
NOTE the “R” (REVERSE) position (with A/T).
l The “SONAR OFF” indication lamp flashes Warning for obstacles
once when the ignition switch is turned to
If there is an obstacle behind the vehicle, a warning
the “ON” position.
buzzer sounds to indicate the distance between the
The “SONAR OFF” indication lamp will illumi- vehicle and the obstacle.
The warning buzzer sounds when the system de-
nate to indicate that the system has stopped operat- Corner sensor
tects an obstacle during operation.
ing.
Vehicle to obstacle dis-
NOTE tance
Warning sound cycle
l After pushing the “SONAR” switch, revers-
ing sensor system operation differs accord- Approx. 50 to 40 cm Intermittent
ing to the detection area setting. Approx. 40 to 20 cm Fast intermittent
Within approx. 20 cm Continuous
OBKE12E1 4-51
Back sensor (vehicles without a towing bar) Vehicles without a towing bar Rear-view camera*
While the operation of the system is stopped at the E00618400198
Vehicle to obstacle dis- “SONAR” switch, push the “SONAR” switch ap- The rear-view camera is a system that shows the
Warning sound cycle
tance proximately 3 seconds or more, and release it. The view behind the vehicle on a screen of the
Approx. 150 to 80 cm Intermittent buzzer sounds once to indicate that the detection MITSUBISHI Multi Communication System
area has been changed. (MMCS) or the inside rear-view mirror.
Approx. 80 to 40 cm Fast intermittent
Within approx. 40 cm Continuous NOTE
l The detection area will not change if you CAUTION
Back sensor (vehicles with a towing bar) keep the “SONAR” switch pushed for 10 sec-
onds or more.
l The rear-view camera is an assistance sys-
tem that enables the driver to check for
Vehicle to obstacle dis-
Warning sound cycle obstacles behind the vehicle. Its range of
tance
“SONAR OFF” indication lamp view is limited, so you should not overly
Approx. 150 to 120 cm Intermittent E00615900075 depend on it. Please drive just as careful-
In case there is a malfunction in the reversing sen- ly as you would if the vehicle did not have
Approx. 120 to 60 cm Fast intermittent sor system, the “SONAR OFF” indication lamp the rear-view camera.
Within approx. 60 cm Continuous will flash and the warning buzzer will sound for ap- l Be sure to visually confirm safety around
proximately 5 seconds. Even after the buzzer has the vehicle with your own eyes. Do not de-
4 stopped sounding, the indication lamp will contin- pend entirely on the rear-view camera.
CAUTION ue flashing until the system reverts to the normal
state. We recommend you to have your vehicle in-
spected. Range of view of rear-view camera
l The distances given are to be used for ref- The range of view of the rear-view camera is limi-
erence only, as errors may be caused by
various factors, such as temperature, hu- ted to the area shown in the illustrations. Because
midity, or the shape of the obstacles. the camera is built in the overhanging area of the
vehicle (spare wheel garnish), it cannot show the
bottom of the spare wheel garnish and the right be-
Changing the detection areas hind the vehicle (rear bumper and backdoor).
E00615800032 When reversing, be sure to visually confirm safety
The detection areas can be changed as follows: around the vehicle.
Vehicles with a towing bar
While the operation of the system is stopped at the
“SONAR” switch, push the “SONAR” switch ap-
proximately 3 seconds or more, and release it. The
buzzer sounds twice to indicate that the detection
area has been changed.
4-52 OBKE12E1
Location of rear-view camera

The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into the CAUTION
spare wheel garnish.
l The line (red) shows the point approxi-
mately 50 cm behind the rear extremity
of the rear bumper.
Be careful because the spare wheel gar-
nish overhangs for approximately 30 cm
behind the rear extremity of the rear
bumper.
NOTE
How to use the rear-view camera l If you press any of the buttons on the
MITSUBISHI Multi Communication System
When you place the shift lever in the “R” (Re-
(MMCS) control panel while the screen is
verse) position (on vehicles with M/T) or selector
showing the view from the rear-view camera,
lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position (on vehicles
the screen indication will change to the one
Range of view of rear-view camera with A/T) with the ignition switch in the “ON” po-
for that button.
sition, the view behind the vehicle will automatical-
l Because the rear-view camera has a special
ly appear on the screen of the MITSUBISHI Multi
Communication System (MMCS) or the inside rear-
lens, the lines on the ground between parking 4
spaces may not look parallel on the screen.
view mirror. When you move the shift lever or se-
lector lever to any other position, the screen will re- l In the following situations, the screen indica-
tion may be difficult to see. There is no ab-
turn to its original indication.
normality.
• Low light (night time)
• When the light of the sun or the light
CAUTION from a vehicle’s headlamps shines direct-
l The rear-view camera has a special lens ly into the lens
that can make objects shown on the l If the camera is hot and is then cooled by
screen appear to be closer or further rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This
away than they actually are. phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.
l It is not possible to fully see obstacles when
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami-
nated by water droplets, snow, mud or oil,
wipe off the contamination, taking care not
to scratch the lens.
l Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-
ing them could lead to a camera malfunction.
OBKE12E1 4-53
• Do not subject the camera to physical NOTE • When there is an upward slope at the back.
shock. l When the vehicle is tilting because of the num-
• Do not apply wax to the camera. ber of people in the vehicle, the weight and
• Do not splash the camera with boiling wa- positioning of luggage, and/or the condition
ter. of the road surface, the lines in the view
• Do not disassemble the camera. from the rear-view camera may not be accu-
rately positioned relative to the actual road.
Reference lines on the screen l The reference lines for distance and vehicle
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear bump- width are based on a level, flat road surface.
er (A) are displayed on the screen. In the following cases, objects shown on the
l Red line (B) indicates approximately 50 cm screen will appear to be farther off than they
behind the rear bumper. actually are.
l Two Green lines (C) indicate approximately • When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
20 cm outside of the vehicle body. down with the weight of passengers and A- Actual objects
l Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- luggage in the vehicle. B- Objects shown on the screen
tance from the rear bumper.
l The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are intended to indicate the distance to
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
4 This may make the distance to a projecting
object shown on the screen differ from the ac-
tual distance to the projecting object. Do not
use them as a guide for distances to solid ob-
jects.
Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order
Check surroundings for safety. of distance. The point A and B actually are
the same distances from the vehicle, and the
A- Actual objects point C is farther off than the point A and B.
1- Approximately at the rear edge of the rear B- Objects shown on the screen
bumper
2- Approximately 100 cm
3- Approximately 200 cm
4-54 OBKE12E1
To permanently set the non- display mode 4. Press the switch until the desired language ap-
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position. pears on the display.
Each time you press the switch, the language
will change to the next one. When the warn-
CAUTION ing text flashes, setting is completed.
l For safety reasons, do not perform follow-

ing operations with the engine running.
Check surroundings for safety. 2. Put the shift lever (manual transmission) or
the selector lever (automatic transmission) in
the “R” position.
3. Press and hold down the switch (1) (for
To change the indication on the screen about 15 seconds).
of the inside rear-view mirror While you keep the switch pressed, the or-
E00631300022
ange indicator (2) comes on. When the im-
It is possible to turn off the screen of the inside rear-
age goes off, the non-display mode setting is
view mirror and change the language of the warn-
completed.
ing messages on the screen.
To change the language of warning text(3) 4
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
CAUTION
l For safety reasons, do not perform follow-
ing operations with the engine running.
2. Put the shift lever (manual transmission) or

the selector lever (automatic transmission) in
the “R” position.
3. Press and hold down the switch (1) to enter
To temporarily set the non- display mode language selection mode (for 6 to 11 seconds).
If you press the switch (1) while the image appears In this mode, the image appears and the
on the display, it goes off temporarily. green indicator (2) comes on.
To return to display mode, press the switch again
or turn the ignition key to the “ON” position after
turning to “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
OBKE12E1 4-55
Cargo loads Roof carrier mounting brackets* Roof carrier precaution

E00609901224
Cargo loads precautions CAUTION

l Make sure that the weight of the luggage
CAUTION does not exceed the allowable roof load.
If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this
l When loading luggage, be careful to the may cause damage to the vehicle.
following. 3-door models The roof load is the total allowable load
• Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage on the roof (the weight of the roof carrier
compartment whenever possible. plus the weight of luggage placed on the
• Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not roof carrier).
to be unbalanced in weight. For specific figures, please refer to “Max-
• Do not place cargo or luggage on the imum roof load” on page 9-07 .
5-door models
instrument panel. l When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle,
Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage please make sure to drive slowly and
on the front passenger’s seat or the avoid excessive manoeuvres such as sud-
rear seats. den braking or quick turning.
4 Having the driver’s vision blocked,
and your cargo being thrown inside
In addition, place the luggage on the car-
rier so that its weight is distributed even-
the cabin if you suddenly have to ly with the heaviest items on the bottom.
brake can cause a serious accident or When installing the roof carrier, use the brackets Do not load items that are wider than the
injury. (A). The brackets (A) are located under each roof roof carrier.
drip moulding (B). The additional weight on the roof could
raise the vehicle’s centre of gravity and af-
Loading a roof carrier fect vehicle handling characteristics.
NOTE As a result, driving errors or emergency
l We recommend you to use a genuine manoeuvres could lead to a loss of control
CAUTION MITSUBISHI roof carrier, since the brackets and result in an accident.
to be used have a special shape. For details,
l Use a roof carrier that properly fits your we recommend you to consult a l Before driving and after travelling a
vehicle. short distance, always check the load to
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service make sure it is securely fastened to the
Do not load luggage directly onto the roof. Point.
For installation, refer to the instruction roof carrier.
manual accompanying the roof carrier. Check periodically during your travel
that the load remains secure.
4-56 OBKE12E1
NOTE Trailer towing Towing bar mounting specifications

l To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel E00610000550 See the following table for fixing points (A) for the
economy, remove the roof carrier when not In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when hav- towing bar.
in use. ing a trailer towing device mounted that meets all
l Before using an automatic car wash, remove relevant regulations in your area, consult a
the roof carrier. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
l Be sure that adequate clearance is main- The regulations concerning the towing of a trailer
tained for raising the sunroof (if so equip- may differ from country to country. You are ad-
ped) when installing a roof carrier. vised to obey the regulations in each area.
CAUTION
l Danger of Accident!
A towing bar should be fitted according
to MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
When you are going to tow a trailer,
move the transfer shift lever to “4H” posi-
tion.
Selecting the “2H” drive may increase the
differential oil temperature, resulting in
4
possible damage to the driving system.
Further, the drive train will be subjected
to excessive loading possibly leading to oil
ous faults.
Maximum towable weight with brake

and maximum trailer-nose weight
Never exceed the maximum towable weight with
brake and the maximum trailer-nose weight as lis-
ted in the specifications. (Refer to “Vehicle
weight” on page 9-07 .)
If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than
1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight by
10 % of the gross combination weight for every in-
crease of 1,000 m above sea-level, as the engine out-
put is lowered owing to decrease in atmospheric
pressure.
OBKE12E1 4-57
3-door models 5-door models *: For vehicles with only front seats,
80 km/h (50 mph) should be applied in-
1 512.5 mm 797 mm stead of 100 km/h (62 mph).
2 564 mm 564 mm It is also recommended that you obey the lo-
cal regulations in case driving speed with a
3 8 mm 8 mm trailer is limited to less than 100 km/h
4 124 mm 179 mm (62 mph).
l To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, de-
5 131 mm 131 mm press the brake pedal lightly at first and then
6 44 mm 44 mm more strongly.
l To make full use of engine braking, change
7 55 mm 55 mm to a lower gear before descending a slope.
8 — 149 mm
Additional precautions for vehicles equipped with
9 139 mm 138 mm A/T
10 473 mm 491 mm The 2nd gear (in sports mode) is recommended on
slopes or at low speed. Use the 1st gear (in sports
11 499.7 mm 499.7 mm
mode) in mountainous areas in order to make better
12 538 mm 538 mm use of engine braking and to assist the brake sys-
4 13 — 547 mm
tem. However, be sure that the speed does not ex-
ceed the maximum speed limit for the selected gear.
14 576.3 mm 576.3 mm
Item 8, 13: 5-door models only
Item 10: at kerb weight
NOTE
l The values under item 10 are applicable to un-
laden vehicles. These values can also be var-
ied depending on the tyre size, optional equip-
ment and suspension conditions.
Operating hints
l Do not let the clutch slip (vehicles with M/T
only) and do not increase the engine speed
more than necessary when starting.
l Be sure that the driving speed does not ex-
ceed 100 km/h (62 mph)* for trailer operation.
4-58 OBKE12E1
For pleasant driving
Ventilators....................................................................................5-02 Rear shelf (3-door models)*.........................................................5-95

Front automatic air conditioning..................................................5-03 Cargo area cover (5-door models)*..............................................5-96
Rear air conditioning*..................................................................5-10 Convenient hooks (5-door models)*............................................5-96
Important operation tips for the air conditioning..........................5-11 Luggage hooks..............................................................................5-97
Air purifier (with deodorizing function).......................................5-12 Coat hooks....................................................................................5-97
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*................5-12 Installation position for warning triangle.....................................5-98
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD autoch-
anger*.......................................................................................5-26
To play tracks from USB device*................................................5-43
To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)..........................................................5-53
To use the external audio input function*....................................5-56
To listen to a disc in the rear-seat display (vehicles
with rear-seat display)..............................................................5-57
Steering wheel remote control switch*........................................5-57
Error codes....................................................................................5-59
Error codes (iPod).........................................................................5-61
Error codes (USB memory device)..............................................5-63
5
Handling of compact discs...........................................................5-65
Antenna.........................................................................................5-66
Link System*................................................................................5-67
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface*.............................................................5-67
USB input terminal*.....................................................................5-82
Sun visors.....................................................................................5-84
Ashtray*........................................................................................5-85
Cigarette lighter*..........................................................................5-86
Accessory socket..........................................................................5-86
Interior lamps................................................................................5-87
Storage spaces...............................................................................5-91
Cup holder....................................................................................5-94
OBKE12E1
Ventilators Rear ventilators (5-door models)* Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the
knob (B).
E00700100373
Front ventilators
4- Roof ventilators Roof ventilators

5- Rear floor ventilators Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the
knob (C) either left or right.
1- Centre ventilators (from under the second seat)
2- Side ventilators
6- Rear floor ventilators
3- Floor ventilators*
(from the centre console box) (from side of the third seat)
5 Air flow and direction adjustments
NOTE E00700200619
l Do not place beverages on top of the instru-

ment panel. If they splash into the air condi- Front ventilators
tioning ventilators, they could damage the sys- The ventilator can be opened and closed with the di-
tem. al (A).
( ) - Open
( ) - Close
5-02 OBKE12E1
NOTE Front automatic air conditioning

l The cool air from the ventilators may appear E00702400165
as a mist. The front air conditioning can only be used while
This is due to moist air being suddenly the engine is running.
cooled by the air conditioning. This will
clear after a few moments.
OBKE12E1 5-03
Control panel
E00702500922
1- Temperature control dial

2- Demister switch
5 3-
4-
MODE switch
OFF switch
5- Blower speed selection dial
6- AUTO switch
7- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-42
8- Air selection switch
9- Rear fan switch* ® p. 5-10
10- Air conditioning switch
11- Temperature display
12- Mode selection display
13- Rear blower operation display
14- Front blower speed display
5-04 OBKE12E1
NOTE The selected blower speed will be shown by the NOTE

l There is an interior air temperature sensor front blower speed display (A). l While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(A) in the illustrated position. the temperature of the air from the heater
Never place anything on top of the sensor, will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
since doing so will prevent it from function- even if you have selected warm air with the
ing properly. dial.
Air selection switch

E00703400436
To change the air selection, simply press the air se-
lection switch.
l Outside air: Indication lamp (A) is OFF
Outside air is introduced into the passenger
compartment.
1- Increase l Recirculated air: Indication lamp (A) is ON
2- Decrease Air is recirculated inside the passenger com-
partment.
Temperature control dial
E00703000403
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anti-
Blower speed selection dial clockwise. The selected temperature will be shown
E00702800198
Select the blower speed by turning the blower by the temperature display (A).
speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise. 5
The blower speed will gradually increase as the di-
al is turned to the right.
OBKE12E1 5-05
AUTO switch Push the switch again to switch it off.

CAUTION E00702600011
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the operation in-
l Normally, use the outside position to keep dication lamp (A) illuminates and the mode selec- CAUTION
the windscreen and side windows clear tion (except for “ ”), blower speed adjustment,
and quickly remove fog or frost from the
windscreen.
recirculated/outside air selection, temperature ad- l When using the air conditioning, the
justment and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all idling speed may slightly increase as the
If high cooling performance is desired, or controlled automatically. air conditioning compressor is switched
if the outside air is dusty or otherwise con- on/off automatically. While the vehicle
taminated use the recirculation position. with an A/T is stationary, fully depress
Switch to the outside position periodically the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
to increase ventilation so that the win- from creeping.
dows do not become fogged up.
l Use of the recirculation position for exten-
ded time may cause the windows to fog up. NOTE
l If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning opera-
NOTE tion indication lamp (A) blinks. Stop the ve-
l If you press the AUTO switch to select auto- hicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, then
matic control after manually switching be- restart the engine. If the air conditioning op-
tween outside air and recirculated air, the air eration indication lamp does not blink, there
selection will also be automatically controlled. is no problem. If it does blink, we recom-
Air conditioning switch mend you to have it checked.
5 E00703500886
Push the switch to turn the air conditioning on, indi-
l Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
cation lamp (A) will come on. and the operation indication lamp (A) blinks
temporarily. In this case there is nothing
wrong. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn
off the engine, then restart the engine. Once
the water evaporates, the blinking will stop.
5-06 OBKE12E1
OFF switch Demister switch : Medium amount of air from the ventilators
E00702700012 E00703900037
: Large amount of air from the ventilators
Push the switch to turn off the air conditioning sys- When this switch is pressed, the mode changes to
tem. the “ ” mode. The indication lamp (A) will Face position
come on. The selected mode is shown by the mode Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger
selection display (B). (Refer to “Changing the front compartment.
mode selection” on page 5-07.)
MODE switch
E00703300015
Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the mode
Foot/Face position
changes to the next one in the following sequence:
NOTE Air flows to the upper part of the passenger com-
“ ”→“ ”→“ ”→“ ”→“ ”. The
l When the demister switch is pressed, the air partment, and flows to the leg area.
selected mode is shown by the mode selection dis-
play (A). (Refer to “Changing the front mode selec-
conditioning system automatically operates 5
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
tion” on page 5-07.)
air) is selected.
(Refer to “Demisting of the windscreen and
door windows” on page 5-09.)
Changing the front mode selection

E00727100017
To change the position and amount of air flowing
from the ventilators, push the MODE switch or de-
mister switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page
5-07 and “Demister switch” on page 5-07.) *: Optional equipment
These symbols are used in the next several illustra-
tions to demonstrate the quantity of air coming
from the ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators
OBKE12E1 5-07
Foot position Demister position 2. Select the temperature control dial to the de-
Air flows mainly to the leg area. Air flows mainly to the windscreen and the door sired temperature.
windows.
The mode selection (except for “ ”), blow-
er speed adjustment, recirculated/outside air
selection, temperature adjustment and air con-
ditioner ON/OFF status are all controlled au-
tomatically.
CAUTION
l For vehicles with A/T, while the vehicle is
stationary, fully depress the brake pedal
*: Optional equipment
to prevent the vehicle from creeping
caused by slightly increased idling speed
Foot/Demister position when the air conditioning compressor is
Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and the Operating the system in automatic switched on automatically.
door windows.
mode
E00704100456
NOTE
l When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
5 tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is
set to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is
set to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.
In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO
mode and follow these procedures:
1. Push the AUTO switch.
5-08 OBKE12E1
Operating the system in manual mode For ordinary demisting For quick demisting
E00704200154 Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door
Blower speed and ventilator mode may be control- windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heat-
led manually by setting the blower speed selection ed.
dial and the MODE switch to the desired positions.
To return to automatic operation, set the AUTO op-
eration.
Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
E00704300591
To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and
door windows, use the MODE switch or Demister
switch (“ ” or “ ”).
1. Push the demister switch (A) to change to

CAUTION the “ ” position.
l For safety, make sure you have a clear 2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
view through all the windows. 1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside 3. Set the temperature to the highest position.
position.
2. Set the MODE switch (B) to the “ ” posi-
tion.
NOTE
3. Select your desired blower speed by turning l When the demister switch is pressed, the air
the blower speed selection dial. conditioning will operate automatically and
4. Select your desired temperature by turning the outside air position will also be selected
automatically.
5
the temperature control dial.
5. Push the air conditioning switch (C). (In this case, the air conditioning indication
lamp will not change.)
l To demist effectively, direct the air flow
from the side ventilators towards the door win-
dows.
l Do not set the temperature control dial to the
max. cool position. Cool air will blow
against the window glasses and prevent de-
misting.
OBKE12E1 5-09
Rear air conditioning* Rear fan switch for the front seat
E00705000029
Main switch for the rear seat
E00704900021
E00704600073
The rear air conditioning can only be used while When the rear fan switch is pressed, the rear blow- Push the main switch, and the rear blower will op-
the engine is running and the front air conditioning er comes on, the rear blower operation display (A) erate, turning the operation indication lamp (A) on.
is switched on. shows “REAR ON”. When the rear fan switch is Push the main switch again, and the rear blower
When the front air conditioning is not switched on, pressed again, the rear blower goes off. will stop.
only blower operation without cooling is possible.
Control panel
E00704700058
NOTE NOTE
l Check whether or not the rear blower is oper- l Either the rear fan switch or the main switch
ating by looking at the operation display (A). can be used to switch the power of the rear
5 1- Blower speed selection dial
2- Main switch The operation display shows when the rear blower ON and OFF.
3- Temperature control dial blower is operating.
5-10 OBKE12E1
Blower speed selection dial

E00705300019
NOTE Important operation tips for the
The blower has 3 different speeds. Select the best l The rear air conditioning will not operate un- air conditioning
less the front air conditioning compressor is
speed to fit your needs. E00708300889
operating.
Always switch the front air conditioning com-
l Park the vehicle in the shade.
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle
pressor on before using the rear air condition- inside extremely hot, and it will require more
ing. If the front air conditioning compressor time to cool the interior.
is not operating, the system will just operate If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the
as a blower. windows for the first few minutes of air con-
ditioning operation to expel the hot air.
l Close the windows when the air conditioning
is in use. The entry of outside air through
open windows will reduce the cooling effi-
ciency.
l Too much cooling is not good for the health.
The inside air temperature should only be 5
to 6 °C below the outside air temperature.
Temperature control dial l When operating the system, make sure the
E00705500066 air intake, which is located in front of the
Select the desired temperature level by turning windscreen, is free of obstructions such as
clockwise or anticlockwise. leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the air-
intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug
the plenum water drains. 5
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations
If the air conditioning seems less effective than usu-
al, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recom-
mend you to have the system inspected.
The air conditioning system in your vehicle must
be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the
lubricant ND-OIL8.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause
severe damage which will result in the need to re-
place your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system.
The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere
should be prevented.
OBKE12E1 5-11
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle will

not harm the ozone layer.
Air purifier LW/MW/FM electronic tuning
It is recommended that the refrigerant be recovered (with deodorizing function) radio with CD player*
E00708400183 E00708501934
and recycled for further use.
An air filter is incorporated into the air condition- The audio system can be used when the ignition
ing system to remove pollen, dust, tobacco smells switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
During a long period of disuse and exhaust smells.
The air conditioning should be operated for at least The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and dirt is re-
five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This NOTE
duced as it becomes dirty, so replace it periodical-
is to prevent the compressor from seizing and to ly. For the maintenance interval, refer to the “SERV- l To listen to the audio system while the en-
maintain the air conditioning in the best operating gine is stopped, turn the ignition switch to
ICE BOOKLET”.
condition. the “ACC” position.
l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
NOTE it may create noise from the audio equip-
l Operation in certain conditions such as driv- ment. This does not mean that anything is
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the wrong with your audio equipment. In such a
air conditioning can lead to reduction of serv- case, use the cellular phone at a place as far
ice life of the filter. When the air flow rate away as possible from the audio equipment.
suddenly drops or when the windscreen or l If foreign objects or water get into the audio
windows start to fog up easily, the air filter equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour
requires replacement. We recommend you to comes from it, immediately turn off the au-
have it checked. dio system. We recommend you to have it
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself.
5 Avoid continuous usage without inspection
by a qualified person.
5-12 OBKE12E1
Volume and tone control panel 2. Press the sound adjust button (5) to adjust EQUALIZER
E00708600912 the sound customization features. Description
type
Sounds good for all types of mu-
Adjusting operation NONE sic (especially for jazz and clas-
Mode sic).
Tuned for hard rock and heavy
NONE → R&B → ROCK metal with powerful drums, gui-
EQUALIZER ROCK → POP COUNTRY → tars, and vocals.
TYPE → COUNTRY POP → ROCK
→ R&B → NONE Tight bass and high frequency
POP
sound
LISTENER
LEFT RIGHT COUNTRY Enhanced main vocals
SIDE
NORMAL → CONCERT → Clear bass and well-defined vo-
1- PWR (On-Off) button R&B
SOUND STUDIO → CLUB→ STU- cals
2- VOL (Volume control) button
FIELD CLUB → DIO → NOR-
3- Memory select buttons SOUND FIELD (Sound field type select)
CONCERT MAL
4- MENU button To select the desired sound field.
5- Sound adjust button BASS Increase Decrease
6- Display Sound field
MID Increase Decrease Description
type
To adjust the volume TREBLE Increase Decrease
E00708700229
More sound More sound NORMAL
Optimized for accurate vocal
and instrument reality.
5
FADER from the front from the rear
VOL (Volume control) speakers speakers Places the listener in the control
Press the VOL button (2) until the desired volume room of a recording studio with
is reached. The status will be displayed in the dis- More sound More sound STUDIO
a crisp and accurate forward
play (6). BALANCE from the right from the left placed sound stage.
speakers speakers
Places the listener in the music
To adjust the tone CLUB at a dance or jazz club with
E00708800653 EQUALIZER TYPE (Equalizer type select)
1. Press the MENU button (4) repeatedly to se- sound coming from all directions.
To select the desired equalizer type.
lect your desired sound customization setting Utilizing sound reflections in the
to change. The order is: EQUALIZER TYPE Digital Signal Processor, CON-
→ LISTENER SIDE → SOUND FIELD → CONCERT CERT gives the impression that
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADER → the listener is at concert hall per-
BALANCE → Sound customization mode formance.
off.
The status will be displayed in the display (6).
OBKE12E1 5-13
BASS (Bass tone control) NOTE

To select the desired bass level. l The MENU mode will automatically shut off
when either the radio or CD is selected or the
MID (Midrange tone control) user does not operate any of the switches for
To select the desired midrange level. 10 seconds.
TREBLE (Treble tone control)

To select the desired treble level.
FADER (Front/Rear balance control)

To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R
(rear) speakers.
BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)

To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R
(right) speakers.
Speed Compensated Volume function

E00726800277
Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature
that automatically adjusts the VOL, BASS, MID,
and TREBLE settings in accordance with the vehi-
cle speed. It is possible to turn this function ON-
5 OFF using the following method:
1. If you are presently pushing the MENU but-
ton (4) and making a tone adjustment, finish
making the tone adjustment.
2. Push the MENU button (4) for at least about
2 seconds. The system will switch to MENU
mode. Press the MENU button (4) repeatedly
until “SCV SETTING” appears on the dis-
play. Refer to “Function setup mode” on
page 5-20.
3. Press the sound adjust button (5) to turn the
“SCV SETTING” ON and OFF.
4. To exit the menu mode, press the MENU but-
ton for 2 seconds or longer.
5-14 OBKE12E1
Radio control panel and display

E00708900960
1- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 7- TUNE (Up-step) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 8- FM (FM1/FM2/FM3) indicator
3-
4-
Memory select buttons
SEEK (Down-seek) button
9-
10-
ST (Stereo) indicator
Preset memory number display
5
5- SEEK (Up-seek) button 11- Display
6- TUNE (Down-step) button
OBKE12E1 5-15
To listen to the radio To enter frequencies into the memory Automatic setting
E00709000388 E00716101001
With the method, all manually set stations in the
1. Press the PWR button (2) to turn the audio band currently selected for reception are replaced
Manual setting
system on and off. with stations in the same band that are automatical-
You can assign to the memory select buttons (3) a
2. Press the AM/FM button (1) to select the de- ly selected in order of signal strength. The radio au-
maximum of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6
sired band. tomatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and 6 stations each in the
3. Press the TUNE button (6 or 7) or SEEK but- station only) and 6 stations each in the MW and
MW and LW band. (Stations already assigned to
ton (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one LW band.
the memory select buttons are replaced by any new-
of the memory select button (3) to recall a sta-
ly assigned stations.)
tion memorised for that button. Follow the steps described below.
1. With the radio mode selected, hold down the
To tune the radio AM/FM button (1) for 2 seconds or longer.
E00709100318 The 6 stations with the best signal strength
will automatically be assigned to the memo-
Automatic tuning
ry select buttons (3), with the lowest-frequen-
After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), the selec-
cy station being assigned to the lowest-num-
ted station reception will start.
ber button.
Manual tuning 2. When you subsequently press a memory se-
The frequency changes every time the TUNE but- lect button to select a channel number, the ra-
ton (6 or 7) is pressed. The frequency changes con- dio will begin receiving the station assigned
tinuously if you keep pushing the button. Press the to that number.
button to select the desired station.
5 Follow the steps described below.
NOTE
l If you press the AM/FM button (1) for 2 sec-
1. Press either the TUNE button (6 or 7) to tune onds or longer while tuning in the FM1 or
the frequency to be entered in the memory. FM2 band, the radio will automatically
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic
for 2 seconds or longer. The sound will be seeking/storing will be activated.
momentarily interrupted while the frequency
is being entered into the memory.
The number of the button corresponding to
the entry in the memory and the frequency
are displayed.
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by
pressing the button for less than 2 seconds.
5-16 OBKE12E1
Radio data system (RDS)

E00709200351
1- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 9- TP (Traffic program) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 10- PTY (Program type) button
3-
4-
MENU button
11-
12-
RDS (Radio data system) indicator
PTY (Program type) indicator
5
5- SEEK (Down-seek) button 13- REG (Regional program) indicator
6- SEEK (Up-seek) button 14- TP (Traffic program identification) indicator
7- TUNE (Down-step) button 15- CT (Clock time) indicator
8- TUNE (Up-step) button 16- Display
RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM broadcasting programs, and picks up the
FM stations that are transmitting the same program from the AF list and automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.
Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other station transmitting the same program
when you are leaving the service area of the currently receiving station.
The RDS radio also features the limited reception of the program types, the break-in reception of the traffic announcement to the EON (enhanced other network)
and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.
OBKE12E1 5-17
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function If there are no frequencies broadcasting the same 19. SOCIAL
E00720900090 programming, the radio searches a frequency broad- 20. RELIGION
The AF function finds a station broadcasting the casting the regional programming. The radio suc- 21. PHONE IN
same program and selects the station with the stron- ceeds in searching the regional programming, then 22. TRAVEL
gest signal of AF lists. the display shows the REG indicator (13). 23. LEISURE
The AF function is turned on at all times unless If the radio does not succeed in searching the re- 24. JAZZ
you manually switch it off. gional programming, the radio returns to the recal- 25. COUNTRY
led preset station. 26. NATION M (National music)
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF. 27. OLDIES
Refer to “Adjusting the time” on page 3-13. The PI function can be turned ON and OFF. 28. FOLK M (Folk music)
CT (Clock Time) function Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-35. 29. DOCUMENT
E00721000085
The clock can be set automatically by using the sig- NOTE To search for a broadcast of desired program type:
nal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Adjust- 1. Press the PTY button (10).
ing the time” on page 3-13. l While searching, the audio system is muted.
The display shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”. 2. Press the TUNE button (7 or 8) for less than
1 second at a time to select your desired PTY.
REG (Regional) function
3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been se-
E00721100028 PTY (Program type)
REG function limits to receive the stations broad- E00721300277 lected, the radio will begin to search for a
casting regional programs. RDS broadcasts are classified according to pro- broadcast of your selected PTY. During
Regional programming and regional networks are gram type (PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE button search, the selected PTY on the display blinks.
organized differently depending on the country or (7 or 8) to select your desired PTY. 4. When the radio picks up a station with your
area (they may be changed according to the hour, 1. NEWS desired PTY, the display will show the name
5 state, or broadcast area), so if you don’t want to re-
ceive the regional programs automatically, you can
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)
3. INFO (Information)
of the station.
set up REG ON not to receive regional programs. 4. SPORT

5. EDUCATE (Education)
The REG function can be turned ON and OFF. Re- 6. DRAMA
fer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-20. 7. CULTURE
8. SCIENCE
PI (Program Identification) search function 9. VARIED
E00721200247
When travelling long distance and the recalled pre- 10. POP M (Pop music)
set station is weak, the radio searches another fre- 11. ROCK M (Rock music)
quency broadcasting the same programming with 12. EASY M (Easy music)
the same PI code in AF list. 13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
14. CLASSICS
15. OTHER M (Other music)
16. WEATHER (Weather information)
17. FINANCE
18. CHILDREN
5-18 OBKE12E1
NOTE 2. If the radio detects traffic information on ei-

l If the SEEK button (5 or 6) is pressed for ther the station currently selected or another
less than 1 second,the radio will try to find station, the display will show “TRAF INF”
out another broadcast of the same program for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indica-
type as currently selected. tion of the frequency. Then, it will show the
l If no station is found with your desired PTY, name of the station broadcasting the traffic in-
the display will show “EMPTY” for about formation to which you will listen. The vol-
5 seconds and the radio will return to the pre- ume level is set separately for listening to nor-
vious station. mal audio programs and for listening to traf-
fic information. The volume level will there-
fore change automatically to that set when an
How to enter PTYs in the memory
E00721400089 emergency broadcast or traffic information
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory. broadcast was last received. When the traffic
Follow the steps described below. information broadcast is over, the radio will
1. Press either the TUNE button (7 or 8) to tune return to the previously received program
the PTY to be entered in the memory. and to the corresponding volume level.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) 3. Press the TP button (9) to return to the previ-
for 2 seconds or longer. The sound will be ous condition.
momentarily interrupted while the PTY is be-
ing entered into the memory. The number of NOTE
the button corresponding to the entry into the
memory and the PTY are displayed.
l While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops on-
ly at TP stations even if the TUNE button (7
pressing the button and then releasing it with-
or 8) is pressed. 5
in about 2 seconds.
Traffic information TP (Traffic information Program) search function

E00721600195
E00721800100
The radio will automatically tune in to traffic infor- The traffic information program search function is
mation broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts turned on (with the TP indicator (14) shown on the
or playing compact discs. display), if:
To select this function:
1. Press the TP button (9). The display will l The RDS is off for 45 seconds due to a weak
signal.
show TP indicator (14). If the RDS data can
be read, the display will show RDS indicator l The station is changed to another station with-
out a TP signal and then 45 seconds elapse.
(11). If not, the display will show “NO RDS”
for about 5 seconds.
When turning on, 5 beeps will be heard and a new
TP station will be searched for.
OBKE12E1 5-19
Emergency broadcasts If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiv- 1. Press the “MENU” button (4) for 2 seconds
E00721700196 ing a FM broadcast or playing back a compact disc, or longer to select the function setup mode.
the display will show “ALARM” and the emergen-
cy broadcast will interrupt the current program.
The volume level is set separately for listening to
normal audio programs and for listening to emer-
gency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore
change automatically to that set when an emergen-
cy broadcast or traffic information broadcast was
last received. When the emergency broadcast is
over, the radio will return to the previously re-
ceived program and to the corresponding volume
level.
Function setup mode
E00722500292
It is possible to change the following functions:
l AF
l CT
l REG
l TP-S
5 l PI-S
l SCV (Refer to “Speed Compensated Vol-
ume function” on page 5-14).
l PHONE
5-20 OBKE12E1
2. Press the “MENU” button (4) repeatedly to The setting will be shown on the display.
select the mode you wish to change.
The order is: AF → CT → REG → TP-S → Example
PI-S → SCV→ PHONE → Function setup
mode OFF.
5
NOTE
l Although “PHONE” appears on the display,
the PHONE function is inoperative.
3. Select the desired setting for each mode to be

turned ON and OFF as shown below.
NOTE
l After selecting a mode, you can leave the func-
tion setup mode by taking either of the fol-
lowing steps:
• Press the “MENU” button for at least
2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.
OBKE12E1 5-21
CD control panel and display

E00709500989
1- AM/FM button 11- TRACK (Track up/down) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 12- FOLDER (Folder down) button
5 3-
4-
DISP (Title display) button
CD (CD mode changeover) button
13-
14-
FOLDER (Folder up) button
SCAN button
5- RPT (Repeat) button 15- DISC (Disc up/down) button
6- RDM (Random) button 16- CD indicator
7- CD eject button 17- TRACK indicator
8- Disc-loading slot 18- Track play time indicator
9- Fast-forward/Fast-reverse button 19- RPT/RDM indicator
10- PAGE (Title scroll) button 20- SCAN indicator
5-22 OBKE12E1
To listen to a CD To listen to an MP3 CD NOTE

E00709601958 This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Au- l While listening to a disc on which CD-DA
1. Insert a disc with the label facing up, and the dio Layer- 3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both
CD player will begin playing even if the ra- (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) been recorded, you can switch between read-
dio is being used. The CD indicator (16), the in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo for- ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,
track number and the playing time will ap- mats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, and the external audio input mode (AUX) by
pear on the display. The CD player will also 100 folders, and 255 files per disc. During MP3 pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or lon-
start playback when the CD button (4) is press- playback, the unit can display ID3 tag information. ger (until you hear a beep).
ed with a disc in the player. For information concerning ID3 tag, refer to “CD For information on the external audio input,
2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by press- text and MP3 title display” on page 5-25. refer to “To use the external audio input func-
ing the PWR button (2) or change over to ration” on page 5-56.
dio mode by pressing the AM/FM button (1),
or eject the disc by pressing the eject button
l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatical-
(7). ly played first.
l The playback sound quality differs depend-
NOTE ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.
l To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To For details, refer to the user manual of your
adjust the volume” on page 5-13 and “To ad- encoding software.
just the tone” on page 5-13. l Depending on file/folder configurations on a
l For information concerning the handling of disc, it may take some time before playback
compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact starts.
discs” on page 5-65. l MP3 encoding software and writing software
l
are not supplied with this unit.
You may encounter trouble in playing an 5
1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot. MP3 or displaying the information of MP3
2. Press the CD button (4) for 2 seconds or lon- files recorded with certain writing software
ger to switch to MP3 CD mode from normal or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
music CD mode. The display shows “READ- l If you record too many folders or files other
ING”, then playback will begin. The folder than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time
number and the track number will appear on before playback starts.
the display. l This unit does not record MP3 files.
l For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, re-
fer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-66.
OBKE12E1 5-23
File selection To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)

CAUTION You can select your desired folder by pressing the
In the order FOLDER buttons (12 or 13).
l Attempting to play a file not in the MP3
format which has a “.mp3” file name may
produce noise from the speakers and
speaker damage, and can damage your
hearing. To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc
To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order fast-forward /fast-reverse button (9).
(Example)
Fast-forward
You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the
Root folder (root directory) side of the fast-forward button. While the button is
kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.
Fast-reverse
You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the
side of the fast-reverse button. While the button is Folder up
kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed. Press the FOLDER button (13) until the desired fold-
er number appears on the display.
NOTE Folder down

l When you have fast-forwarded/fast-reversed Press the FOLDER button (12) until the desired fold-
5 the disc, the playing-time may be shown
with deviation.
To select a desired track

You can select your desired track by using the
TRACK button (11).
Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4
Track up
Press the side of the TRACK button (11) repeat-
Folder selection edly until the desired track number appears on the
display.
In the order
Track down
Press the side of the TRACK button (11) repeat-
edly until the desired track number appears on the
display.
5-24 OBKE12E1
NOTE Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only) l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
l Pressing the side of the TRACK button Press the RDM button (6) briefly. “RDM” will ap- MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of
(11) once during the song will cause the CD pear on the display. Tracks in the currently selected the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files
player to restart playback from the beginning folder will be played in a random sequence. To exit only) to be played.
of the song. the random mode, press the RDM button again.
To eject a disc
Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 When the CD eject button (7) is pressed, the disc
To repeat a track
CDs only) automatically stops and is ejected. The system auto-
Press the RPT button (5) briefly while the track is
Press the RDM button (6) for 1 second or longer matically switches to radio mode.
playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. To exit
(until you hear a beep). “D-RDM” will appear on
the repeat mode, press the RPT button again.
the display. Tracks from all the folders on the cur-
rently selected disc will be played in a random se- NOTE
To repeat a folder (MP3 CDs only) l If you do not remove the disc before
quence. To exit the random mode, briefly press the
Press the RPT button (5) for 1 second or longer (un- 15 seconds have elapsed, the CD player will
RDM button again.
til you hear a beep). “D-RPT” will appear on the dis- automatically reload the disc and stop.
play. You can listen to all the tracks in the current-
ly selected folder repeatedly. NOTE
CD text and MP3 title display
l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and E00725000517
NOTE MP3 files, the random mode causes only This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles
files of the same format (CD-DA only or including ID3 tag information.
l The track repeat mode will be cancelled by
MP3 files only) to be played in a random se-
pressing the TRACK button (11), the SCAN CD text
quence.
button (14) or the eject button (7). The CD player can display disc and track titles for
l The disc repeat mode will be cancelled by
pressing the DISC button (15), the SCAN but-
To find the start of each track on a disc for playback
Press the SCAN button (14). “SCAN” will appear
discs encoded with disc and track title information.
Press the DISP button (3) repeatedly to make selec- 5
ton (14) or the eject button (7). tions in the following sequence: disc name → track
on the display and the CD player will play back the
first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc. name → normal display mode.
MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files
The track number will blink while the scan mode is
of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3
selected. Example
files only) to be repeated.
To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN button again.
To play tracks in random order Disc
name
NOTE
Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)
Press the RDM button (6) briefly. “RDM” will ap-
l Once all tracks on the disc have been scan-
ned, playback of the disc will restart from the
pear on the display. Tracks on the currently selec- beginning of the track that was playing when
ted disc will be played in a random sequence. Track
scanning started. name
To exit the random mode, press the RDM button
again.
l The scan mode will be cancelled when radio
or CD operation is selected.
OBKE12E1 5-25
NOTE 2. Then press the DISP button for less than

1 second repeatedly to make selections in the
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning
l The display can show up to 16 characters. If radio with CD autochanger*
a disc name or track name has more than 16 following sequence: album name → track
E00708501947
characters, press the PAGE button (10) to name → artist name → normal display mode.
The audio system can be used when the ignition
view the next 16 characters. switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
l When there is no title information to be dis- NOTE
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
l To return from ID3 tag information to the
NOTE
l Characters that the CD player cannot display folder name, press the DISP button (3) again
are shown as “ ”. for 2 seconds or longer. l To listen to the audio system while the en-
gine is stopped, turn the ignition switch to
MP3 title l When there is no title information to be dis-
the “ACC” position.
The CD player can display folder and track titles played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
l The display can show up to 16 characters. If l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
for discs encoded with folder and track informa- it may create noise from the audio equip-
tion. Press the DISP button (3) for less than a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag
ment. This does not mean that anything is
1 second repeatedly to make selections in the fol- information has more than 16 characters,
wrong with your audio equipment. In such a
lowing sequence: folder name → track name → nor- press the PAGE button (10) to view the next
case, use the cellular phone at a place as far
mal display mode. 16 characters.
as possible from the audio equipment.
l Folder names and track names can each be
l If foreign objects or water get into the audio
displayed up to a length of 32 characters.
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour
Example Items of ID3 tag information can each be dis-
comes from it, immediately turn off the au-
played up to a length of 30 characters.
Folder dio system. We recommend you to have it
name
l Characters that the CD player cannot display
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself.
are shown as “ ”.
5 Avoid continuous usage without inspection
by a qualified person.
Track
name
ID3 tag information

The CD player can display ID3 tag information for
files that have been recorded with ID3 tag informa-
tion.
1. Press the DISP button (3) for 2 seconds or lon-
ger to switch to the ID3 tag information.
“TAG” indicator will appear on the display.
5-26 OBKE12E1
Volume and tone control panel MID → TREBLE → FADER → BAL- Adjusting operation
E00708600925 ANCE → Sound customization mode off. Mode
The status will be displayed in the display (6).
NOTE More sound More sound

FADER from the front from the rear
l The AUDIO CONTROL/SURROUND CON- speakers speakers
TROL, SUBWOOFER GAIN can only be ad-
justed on vehicles with a premium sound sys- More sound More sound
tem. BALANCE from the right from the left
On vehicles without a premium sound sys- speakers speakers
tem, when you press the MENU button (4),
the display starts from EQUALIZER TYPE. SUBWOOFER GAIN (Subwoofer tone control)
(for premium sound system)
2. Press the sound adjust button (5) to adjust To select the desired subwoofer GAIN level.
1- PWR (On-Off) button the sound customization features.
2- VOL (Volume control) button EQUALIZER TYPE (Equalizer type select)
3- Memory select buttons Adjusting operation To select the desired equalizer type.
4- MENU button
Mode
5- Sound adjust button EQUALIZER
Description
6- Display type
SUBWOOFER Sounds good for all types of mu-
Increase Decrease
To adjust the volume GAIN
E00708700551
NONE → R&B →
NONE sic (especially for jazz and clas-
sic). 5
EQUALIZER ROCK → POP COUNTRY → Tuned for hard rock and heavy
VOL (Volume control) TYPE → COUNTRY POP → ROCK
Press the VOL button (2) until the desired volume ROCK metal with powerful drums, gui-
→ R&B → NONE tars, and vocals.
is reached. The status will be displayed in the dis-
play (6). LISTENER Tight bass and high frequency
LEFT RIGHT POP
SIDE sound
To adjust the tone NORMAL → CONCERT →
E00708800930 COUNTRY Enhanced main vocals
SOUND STUDIO → CLUB→ STU-
FIELD CLUB → DIO → NOR- Clear bass and well-defined vo-
AUDIO CONTROL ADJUSTMENT MODE R&B
CONCERT MAL cals
1. Press the MENU button (4) repeatedly to se-
lect your desired sound customization setting BASS Increase Decrease
to change. The order is: AUDIO CONTROL/ LISTENER SIDE (Listener side select)
MID Increase Decrease To select the desired listener side.
SURROUND CONTROL → SUBWOOFER
GAIN → EQUALIZER TYPE → LISTEN- TREBLE Increase Decrease
ER SIDE → SOUND FIELD → BASS →
OBKE12E1 5-27
SOUND FIELD (Sound field type select) SURROUND CONTROL ADJUSTMENT MODE SURROUND MODE Description
To select the desired sound field. (for premium sound system)
1. Press the MENU button (4). The display will Creates a realistic three-
Sound field show “AUDIO CONTROL/SURROUND dimensional sound field
Description using 5.1ch technology.
type CONTROL”. 5.1ch DOLBY DIGI-
2. Press the sound adjust button (5) to align the Gives clear surround-
Optimized for accurate vocal TAL · DTS
NORMAL cursor with “SURROUND CONTROL”. sound with rich pres-
and instrument reality. ence from digital sound
Then press the MENU button (4) to select
Places the listener in the control the surround control adjustment mode. sources.
room of a recording studio with Creates a three-dimen-
STUDIO
a crisp and accurate forward sional listening environ-
placed sound stage. ment from CDs and oth-
Cursor
Places the listener in the music DOLBY PRO LOGIC II er typical sound sour-
CLUB at a dance or jazz club with ces. Gives surround-
sound coming from all directions. sound with rich pres-
ence.
Utilizing sound reflections in the
Digital Signal Processor, CON- Gives high-quality ster-
CONCERT CERT gives the impression that 2CH STEREO SOUND eo sound using a 12-
the listener is at concert hall per- speaker system.
formance.
NOTE
5 BASS (Bass tone control)
To select the desired bass level. 3. Press the MENU button (4) repeatedly to se- l 5.1ch DOLBY DIGITAL · DTS can be selec-
ted only when DVDs recorded with Dolby
lect your desired sound customization setting
Digital or DTS 5.1- channel surround are
MID (Midrange tone control) to change. The order is: SURROUND CON-
played in the rear-seat display. With such
To select the desired midrange level. TROL → SURROUND MODE → SOUND
DVDs, DOLBY PRO LOGIC II cannot be se-
TYPE → LISTENING POSITION → Sound
lected.
TREBLE (Treble tone control) customization mode off.
The status will be displayed in the display (6). l Dolby Digital systems are manufactured un-
To select the desired treble level. der licence from Dolby Laboratories Licens-
4. Press the sound adjust button (5) to adjust
ing Corporation. “Dolby” and the double-D
FADER (Front/Rear balance control) the sound customization features.
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laborato-
To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R ries Licensing Corporation. DTS systems are
(rear) speakers. SURROUND MODE (Surround mode select) (for
manufactured under licence from Digital The-
premium sound system) ater Systems. “DTS” and “Digital Surround”
BALANCE (Left/Right balance control) To select the desired surround mode. are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems.
To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R
(right) speakers.
5-28 OBKE12E1
SOUND TYPE (Sound type select) (for premium • When the surround mode menu setting is
sound system) “5.1ch DOLBY DIGITAL · DTS” or
To select the desired sound type. “DOLBY PRO LOGIC II”:
→ The sound field menu cannot be used.
SOUND TYPE Description • When the sound type menu setting is
“CINEMA”:
The optimal setting for watching
CINEMA → The equalizer type menu and sound
a movie
field menu cannot be used.
The optimal setting for listening
MUSIC
to music Speed Compensated Volume function
E00726800280
LISTENING POSITION (Listening position se- Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature
lect) (for premium sound system) that automatically adjusts the VOL, BASS, MID,
To select the desired listening position. and TREBLE settings in accordance with the vehi-
cle speed. It is possible to turn this function ON-
LISTENING Description OFF using the following method:
POSITION 1. If you are presently pushing the MENU but-
ton (4) and making a tone adjustment, finish
The optimal setting for enjoying making the tone adjustment.
1st SEATS surround sound in the first-row 2. Push the MENU button (4) for at least about
seats 2 seconds. The system will switch to MENU
The optimal setting for enjoying mode. Press the MENU button (4) repeatedly
2nd SEATS surround sound in the second-
row seats
until “SCV SETTING” appears on the dis-
play. Refer to “Function setup mode” on 5
page 5-20.
The optimal setting for enjoying 3. Press the sound adjust button (5) to turn the
ALL SEATS
surround sound in all seats “SCV SETTING” ON and OFF.
4. To exit the menu mode, press the MENU but-
NOTE ton for 2 seconds or longer.
l Depending on the selected tone adjustment
mode, certain other adjustment modes cannot NOTE
be used. Adjustments are not possible as fol- l The MENU mode will automatically shut off
lows: when either the radio or CD is selected or the
• When the surround mode menu setting is user does not operate any of the switches for
“STEREO”: 10 seconds.
→ The sound type menu and listening po-
sition menu cannot be used.
OBKE12E1 5-29
Radio control panel and display

E00708900973
1- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 7- TUNE (Up-step) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 8- FM (FM1/FM2/FM3) indicator
5 3-
4-
Memory select button
SEEK (Down-seek) button
9-
10-
ST (Stereo) indicator
Preset memory number display
5- SEEK (Up-seek) button 11- Display
6- TUNE (Down-step) button
5-30 OBKE12E1
To listen to the radio To enter frequencies into the memory Automatic setting
E00709000418 E00716101014
With the method, all manually set stations in the
1. Press the PWR button (2) to turn the audio band currently selected for reception are replaced
Manual setting
system on and off. with stations in the same band that are automatical-
You can assign to the memory select buttons (3) a
Press the AM/FM button (1) to turn on the ra- ly selected in order of signal strength. The radio au-
maximum of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6
dio if a CD is being played. tomatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and 6 stations each in the
2. Press the AM/FM button (1) to select the de- station only) and 6 stations each in the MW and
MW and LW band. (Stations already assigned to
sired band. LW band.
the memory select buttons are replaced by any new-
3. Press the TUNE button (6 or 7) or SEEK but-
ly assigned stations.)
ton (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one Follow the steps described below.
of the memory select buttons (3) to recall a 1. With the radio mode selected, hold down the
station memorised for that button. AM/FM button (1) for 2 seconds or longer.
The 6 stations with the best signal strength
To tune the radio will automatically be assigned to the memo-
E00709100350 ry select buttons (3), with the lowest-frequen-
cy station being assigned to the lowest-num-
Automatic tuning
ber button.
After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), the selec-
2. When you subsequently press a memory se-
ted station reception will start.
lect button to select a channel number, the ra-
Manual tuning dio will begin receiving the station assigned
The frequency changes every time the TUNE but- to that number.
ton (6 or 7) is pressed. The frequency changes con-
tinuously if you keep pushing the button. Press the
button to select the desired station.
NOTE 5
l If you press the AM/FM button (1) for
Follow the steps described below. 2 seconds or longer while tuning in the FM1
1. Press either the TUNE button (6 or 7) to tune or FM2 band, the radio will automatically
the frequency to be entered in the memory. switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) seeking/storing will be activated.
for 2 seconds or longer. The sound will be
momentarily interrupted while the frequency
is being entered into the memory.
The number of the button corresponding to
the entry in the memory and the frequency
are displayed.
pressing the button for less than 2 seconds.
OBKE12E1 5-31
Radio data system (RDS)

E00709200364
1- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 9- TP (Traffic program) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 10- PTY (Program type) button
5 3-
4-
MENU button
11-
12-
RDS (Radio data system) indicator
PTY (Program type) indicator
5- SEEK (Down-seek) button 13- REG (Regional program) indicator
6- SEEK (Up-seek) button 14- TP (Traffic program identification) indicator
7- TUNE (Down-step) button 15- CT (Clock time) indicator
8- TUNE (Up-step) button 16- Display
RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM broadcasting programs, and picks up the
FM stations that are transmitting the same program from the AF list and automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.
Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other station transmitting the same program
when you are leaving the service area of the currently receiving station.
The RDS radio also features the limited reception of the program types, the break-in reception of the traffic announcement to the EON (enhanced other network)
and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.
5-32 OBKE12E1
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function If there are no frequencies broadcasting the same 19. SOCIAL
E00720900104 programming, the radio searches a frequency broad- 20. RELIGION
The AF function finds a station broadcasting the casting the regional programming. The radio suc- 21. PHONE IN
same program and selects the station with the stron- ceeds in searching the regional programming, then 22. TRAVEL
gest signal of AF lists. the display shows the REG indicator (13). If the ra- 23. LEISURE
The AF function is turned on at all times unless dio does not succeed in searching the regional pro- 24. JAZZ
you manually switch it off. gramming, the radio returns to the recalled preset 25. COUNTRY
station. 26. NATION M (National music)
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF. Refer 27. OLDIES
to “Function setup mode” on page 5-20. The PI function can be turned ON and OFF. 28. FOLK M (Folk music)
CT (Clock Time) function Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-20. 29. DOCUMENT
E00721000098
The clock can be set automatically by using the sig- NOTE To search for a broadcast of desired program type:
nal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Adjust- 1. Press the PTY button (10).
ing the time” on page 3-13. l While searching, the audio system is muted.
The display shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”. 2. Press the TUNE button (7 or 8) for less than
1 second at a time to select your desired PTY.
REG (Regional) function
3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been se-
E00721100015 PTY (Program type)
REG function limits to receive the stations broad- E00721300280 lected, the radio will begin to search for a
casting regional programs. RDS broadcasts are classified according to pro- broadcast of your selected PTY. During
Regional programming and regional networks are gram type (PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE button search, the selected PTY on the display blinks.
organized differently depending on the country or (7 or 8) to select your desired PTY. 4. When the radio picks up a station with your
area (they may be changed according to the hour, 1. NEWS desired PTY, the display will show the name
state, or broadcast area), so if you don’t want to re-
ceive the regional programs automatically, you can
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)
3. INFO (Information)
of the station.
5
set up REG ON not to receive regional programs. 4. SPORT
5. EDUCATE (Education)
The REG function can be turned ON and OFF. Re- 6. DRAMA
fer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-20. 7. CULTURE
8. SCIENCE
PI (Program Identification) search function 9. VARIED
E00721200234
When travelling long distance and the recalled pre- 10. POP M (Pop music)
set station is weak, the radio searches another fre- 11. ROCK M (Rock music)
quency broadcasting the same programming with 12. EASY M (Easy music)
the same PI code in AF list. 13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
14. CLASSICS
15. OTHER M (Other music)
16. WEATHER (Weather information)
17. FINANCE
18. CHILDREN
OBKE12E1 5-33
NOTE 2. If the radio detects traffic information on ei-

l If the SEEK button (5 or 6) is pressed for ther the station currently selected or another
less than 1 second, the radio will try to find station, the display will show “TRAF INF”
out another broadcast of the same program for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indica-
type as currently selected. tion of the frequency. Then, it will show the
l If no station is found with your desired PTY, name of the station broadcasting the traffic in-
the display will show “EMPTY” for about 5 formation to which you will listen. The vol-
seconds and the radio will return to the previ- ume level is set separately for listening to nor-
ous station. mal audio programs and for listening to traf-
fic information. The volume level will there-
fore change automatically to that set when an
How to enter PTYs in the memory
E00721400092 emergency broadcast or traffic information
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory. broadcast was last received. When the traffic
Follow the steps described below. information broadcast is over, the radio will
1. Press either the TUNE button (7 or 8) to tune return to the previously received program
the PTY to be entered in the memory. and to the corresponding volume level.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (3) 3. Press the TP button (9) to return to the previ-
for 2 seconds or longer. The sound will be ous condition.
momentarily interrupted while the PTY is be-
ing entered into the memory. The number of NOTE
the button corresponding to the entry into the
memory and the PTY are displayed.
l While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops on-
ly at TP stations even if the TUNE button (7
5 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by
pressing the button and then releasing it with-
or 8) is pressed.
in about 2 seconds.
Traffic information TP (Traffic information Program) search function

E00721600212
E00721800113
The radio will automatically tune in to traffic infor- The traffic information program search function is
mation broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts turned on (with the TP indicator (14) shown on the
or playing compact discs. display), if:
To select this function:
1. Press the TP button (9). The display will l The RDS is off for 45 seconds due to a weak
signal.
show TP indicator (14). If the RDS data can
be read, the display will show RDS indicator l The station is changed to another station with-
out a TP signal and then 45 seconds elapse.
(11). If not, the display will show “NO RDS”
for about 5 seconds.
When turning on, 5 beeps will be heard and a new
TP station will be searched for.
5-34 OBKE12E1
Emergency broadcasts If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiv- 1. Press the “MENU” button (4) for 2 seconds
E00721700200 ing a FM broadcast or playing back a compact disc, or longer to select the function setup mode.
the display will show “ALARM” and the emergen-
cy broadcast will interrupt the current program.
The volume level is set separately for listening to
normal audio programs and for listening to emer-
gency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore
change automatically to that set when an emergen-
cy broadcast or traffic information broadcast was
last received. When the emergency broadcast is
over, the radio will return to the previously re-
ceived program and to the corresponding volume
level.
Function setup mode
E00722500306
It is possible to change the following functions:
l AF
l CT
l REG
l TP-S
l PI-S
l SCV (Refer to “Speed Compensated Vol-
5
ume function” on page 5-29).
l PHONE
OBKE12E1 5-35
2. Press the “MENU” button (4) repeatedly to The setting will be shown on the display.
select the mode you wish to change. The or-
der is: AF → CT → REG → TP-S → PI-S Example
→ SCV→ PHONE → Function setup mode
OFF.
5
NOTE
l Although “PHONE” appears on the display,
the PHONE function is inoperative.
3. Select the desired setting for each mode to be

turned ON and OFF as shown below.
NOTE
l After selecting a mode, you can leave the func-
tion setup mode by taking either of the fol-
lowing steps:
• Press the “MENU” button for at least 2
seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.
5-36 OBKE12E1
CD control panel and display

E00709500992
1- AM/FM button 12- FOLDER (Folder down) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 13- FOLDER (Folder up) button
3-
4-
CD (CD mode changeover) button
14-
15-
SCAN button
LOAD button
5
5- RPT (Repeat) button 16- DISC (Disc up) button
6- RDM (Random) button 17- DISC (Disc down) button
7- CD eject button 18- CD indicator
8- Disc-loading slot 19- DISC indicator
9- Fast-forward/Fast-reverse button 20- TRACK indicator
10- PAGE (Title scroll) button 21- RPT/RDM indicator
11- TRACK (Track up/down) button
OBKE12E1 5-37
To listen to a CD To set discs 3. When the display shows “LOAD DISC

E00709601961 (1~6)”, insert a disc. The autochanger will
The CD can be loaded or ejected by pressing the then automatically select the next empty slot
LOAD button (15) or the eject button (7) even if and enter loading standby mode.
the audio system power is off. 4. Repeat the above-described steps until every
1. Press the PWR button (2) to turn the audio slot contains a disc. Playback will then begin
system on and off. The system turns on in with the disc that you inserted last.
the last mode used.
2. Press the CD button (4) to enter CD mode.
The autochanger will start playback if the
NOTE
CD is already in the autochanger. l If you press the LOAD button (15) again
3. To stop the CD, turn off the power by press- while the autochanger is in loading standby
ing the PWR button (2) or change over to ra- mode, the loading standby mode will be can-
dio mode by pressing the AM/FM button (1), celled.
or eject the disc by pressing the eject button
To set a single disc To eject discs
(7).
1. Press the LOAD button (15) briefly.
2. The autochanger will show “WAIT” on the
NOTE display and start making itself ready for disc
l To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To loading.
adjust the volume” on page 5-27 and “To ad- 3. When the autochanger is ready for disc load-
just the tone” on page 5-27. ing, the indicator light (A) will come on and
l As many as 6 CDs can be inserted into the the display will show “LOAD DISC (1~6)”.
5 l
CD autochanger.
For information concerning the handling of
4. Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.
the compact discs, refer to “Handling of com-

pact discs” on page 5-65. NOTE
l If there are multiple empty slots, you can se-
lect your desired slot by pressing the DISC
buttons (16 or 17).
l If you do not insert a disc for about To eject a single disc
15 seconds after the autochanger starts stand- Press the eject button (7) briefly to eject the current-
ing by for loading, the loading standby mode ly selected disc.
will be cancelled.
To set all the discs NOTE
1. Press the LOAD button (15) for 2 seconds or l If you press the eject button (7) while the dis-
longer (until you hear a beep). play is showing “LOAD DISC (1~6)”, the
2. The autochanger will select the lowest-num- loading standby mode will be cancelled and
bered empty slot and switch to loading stand- the next disc will be ejected.
by mode.
5-38 OBKE12E1
l If you do not remove the disc before To listen to a music CD To listen to an MP3 CD
15 seconds have elapsed, the autochanger This autochanger allows you to play MP3 (MPEG
will automatically reload the disc and stop. Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-
Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable
To eject all the discs CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Ro-
1. Press the eject button (7) for 2 seconds or lon- meo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of
ger (until you hear a beep). 16 trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc. During
2. The currently selected disc will be ejected. MP3 playback, the unit can display ID3 tag infor-
When you remove the ejected disc, the next mation. For information concerning ID3 tag, refer
disc will automatically be ejected. to “CD text and MP3 title display” on page 5-25.
3. Repeat the above-described steps until all of
the discs have been ejected. The autochanger
will then enter loading standby mode.
NOTE
l If you do not remove an ejected disc before Push the CD button (4) if the discs are already in
15 seconds have elapsed, the disc will be re- the autochanger. The autochanger will enter CD
loaded and the eject mode will be cancelled. mode and start playback. The disc number, the
The reloaded disc will not be played. track number and the playing-time will appear on
the display. The discs in the unit will be played con-
To select a desired disc secutively and continuously.
You can select your desired disc by using the DISC
button (16 or 17). The active disc will be indicated
by “ ” on the display.
5
Push the CD button (4) if MP3 CDs are already in
Disc up the autochanger.
Press the DISC button (16) repeatedly until the de- The display shows “READING”, then playback
sired disc number appears on the display. will begin. The folder number, the track number,
the playing-time and “MP3” indicator will appear
Disc down on the display.
Press the DISC button (17) repeatedly until the de-
sired disc number appears on the display.
OBKE12E1 5-39
NOTE File selection

l While listening to a disc on which CD-DA CAUTION
In the order
(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both l Attempting to play a file not in the MP3
been recorded, you can switch between read- format which has a “.mp3” file name may
ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files, produce noise from the speakers and
and the external audio input mode (AUX) by speaker damage, and can damage your
pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or lon- hearing. To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc
ger (until you hear a beep). To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the
For information on the external audio input, Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order fast-forward /fast-reverse button (9).
refer to “To use the external audio input func- (Example)
tion” on page 5-56. Fast-forward
l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the
MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatical- Root folder (root directory) side of the fast-forward button. While the button is
ly played first. kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.
l The playback sound quality differs depend-
Fast-reverse
ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.
For details, refer to the user manual of your You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the
encoding software. side of the fast-reverse button. While the button is
kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.
l Depending on file/folder configurations on a
disc, it may take some time before playback
starts. NOTE
l MP3 encoding software and writing software l When you have fast-forwarded/fast-reversed
5 l
are not supplied with this unit.
You may encounter trouble in playing an
the disc, the playing-time may be shown
with deviation.
MP3 or displaying the information of MP3
files recorded with certain writing software
or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4
l If you record too many folders or files other
than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time
before playback starts.
l This unit does not record MP3 files. Folder selection
l For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, re- In the order
fer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-66.
5-40 OBKE12E1
To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only) NOTE To exit the random mode, press the RDM button
You can select your desired folder by pressing the l Pressing the side of the TRACK button again.
FOLDER buttons (12 or 13). (11) once during the song will cause the CD Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)
player to restart playback from the beginning Press the RDM button (6) briefly. “RDM” will ap-
of the song. pear on the display. Tracks in the currently selected
folder will be played in a random sequence. To exit
To repeat a track the random mode, press the RDM button again.
Press the RPT button (5) briefly while the track is
playing. “RPT” will appear on the display. To exit Random playback for all discs in the autochang-
the repeat mode, press the RPT button again. er (music CDs only)
Press the RDM button (6) for 1 second or longer
To repeat a disc (music CDs only) (until you hear a beep). “D-RDM” will appear on
Press the RPT button (5) for 1 second or longer (un- the display. Tracks from all the discs loaded in the
til you hear a beep). “D-RPT” will appear on the dis- autochanger will be played in a random sequence.
play. You can listen to the music CD repeatedly. To exit the random mode, briefly press the RDM
button again.
Folder up To repeat a folder (MP3 CDs only)
Press the FOLDER button (13) until the desired fold- Press the RPT button (5) for 1 second or longer (un- Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3
er number appears on the display. til you hear a beep). You can listen to all the tracks CDs only)
in the currently selected folder repeatedly. Press the RDM button (6) for 1 second or longer
Folder down (until you hear a beep). “D-RDM” will appear on
Press the FOLDER button (12) until the desired fold- the display. Tracks from all the folders on the cur-
NOTE
l The track repeat mode will be cancelled by
rently selected disc will be played in a random se-
quence. To exit the random mode, briefly press the 5
To select a desired track pressing the TRACK button (11), the SCAN RDM button again.
You can select your desired track by using the button (14) or the eject button (7).
TRACK button (11). l The disc repeat mode will be cancelled by
pressing the DISC button (16 or 17), the NOTE
Track up SCAN button (14) or the eject button (7). l In the all discs random mode, if an MP3 CD
Press the side of the TRACK button (11) repeat- l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and has been loaded in the autochanger, the au-
edly until the desired track number appears on the MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files tochanger will skip over it to the next music
display. of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 CD.
files only) to be repeated. l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
Track down MP3 files, the random mode causes only
Press the side of the TRACK button (11) repeat- To play tracks in random order files of the same format (CD-DA only or
edly until the desired track number appears on the MP3 files only) to be played in a random se-
display. Random playback for a disc (music CDs only) quence.
Press the RDM button (6) briefly. “RDM” will ap-
pear on the display. Tracks on the currently selec-
ted disc will be played in a random sequence.
OBKE12E1 5-41
To find the start of each track on a disc for playback CD text MP3 titles
Press the SCAN button (14). “SCAN” will appear The autochanger can display disc and track titles The autochanger can display folder and track titles
on the display and the autochanger will play back for discs with converted disc and track title informa- for discs with converted folder and track informa-
the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc. tion. Press the DISP button (3) repeatedly to make tion. Press the DISP button (7) repeatedly to make
The track number will blink while the scan mode is selections in the following sequence: disc name → selections in the following sequence: folder name
selected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN track name → normal display mode. → track name → normal display mode.
button again.
Example Example
NOTE
l Once all tracks on the disc have been scan- Disc
name
Folder
name
ned, playback of the disc will restart from the
beginning of the track that was playing when
scanning started.
l The scan mode will be cancelled when radio
Track
or CD operation is selected. Track
name name
MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of
the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files
only) to be played.
ID3 tag information
NOTE The autochanger can display ID3 tag information
CD text and MP3 title display
E00725000520 l The display can show up to 16 characters. If for files that have been recorded with ID3 tag infor-
5 This autochanger can display CD text and MP3 ti-
tles including ID3 tag information.
a disc name or track name has more than 16
characters, press the PAGE button (10) to
mation.
1. Press the DISP button (3) for 2 seconds or lon-
view the next 16 characters. ger to switch to the ID3 tag information. The
l When there is no title information to be dis- “TAG” indicator will appear on the display.
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”. 2. Then press the DISP button for less than 1
l Characters that the autochanger cannot dis- second repeatedly to make selections in the
play are shown as “ ”. following sequence: album name → track
name → artist name → normal display mode.
NOTE
l To return from ID3 tag information to the
folder name, press the DISP button (3) again
for 2 seconds or longer.
l When there is no title information to be dis-
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
5-42 OBKE12E1
l The display can show up to 16 characters. If

a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag
To play tracks from USB device*
E00756100149
information has more than 16 characters, You can connect your iPod or USB memory device
press the PAGE button (10) to view the next to the USB input terminal and play music files stor-
16 characters. ed in the iPod or USB memory device.
l Folder names and track names can each be See the following section for the types of connecta-
displayed up to a length of 32 characters. ble devices and supported files.
Items of ID3 tag information can each be dis- Refer to “Types of connectable devices and suppor-
played up to a length of 30 characters. ted file specifications” on page 5-83.
l Characters that the autochanger cannot dis- See the following sections for the connecting meth-
play are shown as “ ”. ods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 5-82 and
“How to connect a USB memory device” on page
5-82.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth® 2.0
interface, you can play music files in your iPod or
USB memory device via voice operation.
Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice operation”
on page 5-46 and “To play USB memory device
tracks via voice operation” on page 5-52.
NOTE
l The protected file by copyright might not be
able to start playback. 5
l It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of
the connected device is flat.
OBKE12E1 5-43
iPod control panel and display

E00756200036
1- AM/FM button 10- MENU button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 11- TRACK (Track up/down) button
5 3-
4-
CD (Mode change) button
12-
13-
FOLDER (Folder down) button
5- RPT (Repeat) button 14- DISC button
6- RDM (Random) button 15- iPod indicator
7- Fast-reverse button 16- TRACK indicator
8- Fast-forward button 17- RPT/SHUFFLE/A-SHUFFLE indicator
9- PAGE (Title scroll) button
5-44 OBKE12E1
To play from an iPod l To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To If the side of the button is pressed once while a
E00756300226 adjust the volume” on pages 5-13, 5-27 and track is playing, playback returns to the start of that
1. Press the PWR button (2) to turn on the au- “To adjust the tone” on pages 5-13, 5-27. track.
dio system. The system turns on in the last
mode used. To fast-forward/reverse the track
2. Connect your iPod to the USB input termi- NOTE
E00756400012
nal. Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the l Every time the track selection button is press-
page 5-82. fast-forward (8) or fast-reverse (7) button. ed, the track number in the display changes.
3. Press the CD button (4) several times to
switch to the iPod mode. The input mode Fast-forward To find a track from the iPod menu
changes every time the CD button is pressed. To fast-forward the current track, press the fast-for- E00756600014
ward (8) button. While the button is pressed, the You can select desired tracks from the “Playlists”,
CD mode → iPod mode → Bluetooth® track will be fast-forwarded. “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or “Genre” (vehicles
mode* → Rear-seat display mode* with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) menus on your iPod.
Fast-reverse
To fast-reverse the current track, press the fast-re- Press the following buttons to select desired tracks.
NOTE verse (7) button. While the button is pressed, the The selected menu or category or track is shown in
l If your vehicle is equipped with audio/video track will be fast-reversed. the display.
input RCA terminals, pressing and holding
the CD button for 2 seconds or more To select a desired track
E00756500013 FOLDER but- : To show the menu or category
switches the system to the AUX mode. ton (12 or 13) or track.
Press the TRACK button (11) to select the desired
track number. MENU button : To select the menu or category
4. Once the device is selected, playback starts
(10) or track.
and “iPod” appears on the display. Press : The track number increases by
one.
5
NOTE : The track number decreases by
NOTE
Press l To cancel the selection, press the DISC but-
l Depending on the condition of your iPod, it one.
may take a longer time before the playback ton (14) to return to the previous step.
starts. Press for a : The track number increases con- l If no operation is performed for 10 seconds
long period (ap- tinuously while the button is or more or other button is operated after the
5. To stop the playback, press the AM/FM but- prox. 2 seconds pressed. FOLDER button has been pressed, searching
ton (1) or CD button (4) to switch to a differ- or more) of the desired tracks is cancelled.
ent mode. l If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
Press for a : The track number decreases con- more after the track is displayed, playback
long period (ap- tinuouslywhile the button is starts.
NOTE prox. 2 seconds pressed.
l Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the or more) To play the same track repeatedly
iPod is connected to the audio system. E00756700015
Press the RPT button (5) during playback to show
“RPT” in the display.
OBKE12E1 5-45
To exit this mode, press the button again. NOTE Preparation for voice operation
E00757300018
l Up to 16 characters are shown in the display To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH but-
To play tracks in random order at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
E00756900017 ton (1) first.
press the PAGE button (9).
Press the RDM button (6) to show “SHUFFLE” in
The next characters are displayed every time
the display.
this button is pressed.
The iPod randomly selects tracks from the current
category and plays the selected tracks. l If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
the display.
To exit this mode, press the button again.
l Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-
stituted by “ ”.
To play tracks in each album in random order
E00757000015
Press and hold the RDM button (6) until you hear a To play iPod tracks via voice opera-
beep to show “A-SHUFFLE” in the display.
The iPod randomly selects tracks in the album tion (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
from the current category and play the selected face)
E00757200017
tracks.
To exit this mode, press the button again. Desired tracks can be selected and played from
your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playlist” and
“Genre” using voice commands. To search by artist name
To switch the display E00757400019
E00757100016 For information concerning the voice recognition
function or speaker registration function, refer to 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
You can display the track titles, artist names and al-
bum titles recorded in the iPod. “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-67.
NOTE
5 The display changes as follows every time the
DISP button (3) is pressed during playback.
The following explains how to prepare for voice op-
eration and play the tracks. l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
Album title → Track name → Artist name → Nor- ing the connected device.
mal display If the connected device cannot be recognized
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
Example
guide. Follow the voice guide.
Album title
2. After the voice guide says “Would you like
to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
Track name Genre?,” say “Artist”.
NOTE
Artist name l If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip
step 3.
5-46 OBKE12E1
3. After the voice guide says “What Artist To search by album title 6. After the voice guide says “Playing <album
would you like to play?,” say the artist name. E00757500010 title>,” the system creates a playlist index for
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- 1. Say “Play” on the main menu. the album title.
ceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice NOTE NOTE
guide will say “More than one match was l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- l If the confirmation function is active, the
found, would you like to play <artist ing the connected device. voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-
name>?” If you say “Yes,” the system pro- If the connected device cannot be recognized rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.
ceeds to step 6. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says
If you say “No,” the next matching artist is 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice “Album not found, please try again,” the sys-
uttered by the system. guide. Follow the voice guide. tem returns to step 2.
NOTE 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode
l If you say “No” to three or all artist names ut- to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or and starts playback.
tered by the system, the voice guide will say Genre?,” say “Album”.
“Artist not found, please try again” and the
To search by playlist
system returns to step 2.
NOTE E00757600011
l Search time is dependant on the number of
l If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip 1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
songs on your connected device. Devices con-
step 3.
taining a large number of songs may take lon-
ger to return search results.
NOTE
3. After the voice guide says “What Album l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-
would you like to play?” say the album title. ing the connected device.
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist
name>,” the system creates a playlist index
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- If the connected device cannot be recognized 5
ceeds to step 6. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®
for the artist.
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice
guide will say “More than one match was guide. Follow the voice guide.
NOTE found, would you like to play <album ti-
l If the confirmation function is active, the tle>?” If you say “Yes,” the system proceeds 2. After the voice guide says “Would you like
voice guide confirms if the artist name is cor- to step 6. to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
rect. If the artist name is correct, say “Yes”. If you say “No,” the next matching album is Genre?,” say “Playlist”.
If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says uttered by the system.
“Artist not found, please try again,” the sys-
tem returns to step 2. NOTE
NOTE l If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip
l If you say “No” to three or all album titles ut- step 3.
7. The system exits the voice recognition mode tered by the system, the voice guide will say If the device has no playlist, the voice guide
and starts playback. “Album not found, please try again” and the will say “There are no playlists stored on de-
system returns to step 2. vice” and the system returns to step 2.
OBKE12E1 5-47
3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist NOTE NOTE

would you like to play?,” say the playlist l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz- l If the confirmation function is active, the
name. ing the connected device. voice guide confirms if the genre is correct.
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- If the connected device cannot be recognized If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say
ceeds to step 6. or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® “No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice found, please try again,” the system returns
guide will say “More than one match was guide. Follow the voice guide. to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function set-
found, would you like to play <playlist>?” If ting” on page 5-69.
you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6.
2. After the voice guide says “Would you like
If you say “No,” the next matching playlist 7. The system exits the voice recognition mode
to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or
name is uttered by the system. and starts playback.
Genre?,” say “Genre”.
NOTE NOTE
l If you say “No” to three or all playlist names l If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
3.
say “Playlist not found, please try again” and
the system returns to step 2.
3. After the voice guide says “What Genre
would you like to play?,” say the music type.
6. After the voice guide says “Playing <play-
4. If there is only one match, the system pro-
list>,” the system creates an index for the play-
ceeds to step 6.
list.
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice
5 NOTE
guide will say “More than one match was
found, would you like to play <genre>?” If
l If the confirmation function is active, the you say “Yes,” the system proceeds to step 6.
voice guide confirms if the playlist name is If you say “No,” the next matching genre is
correct. If the playlist name is correct, say uttered by the system.
“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice
guide says “Playlist not found, please try
again,” the system returns to step 2. Refer to
NOTE
“Confirmation function setting” on page l If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered
by the system, the voice guide will say
5-69.
“Genre not found, please try again” and the
system returns to step 2.
7. The system exits the voice recognition mode
and starts playback.
6. After the voice guide says “Playing
<genre>,” the system creates an index for the
To search by genre genre.
E00757700012
1. Say “Play” on the main menu.
5-48 OBKE12E1
USB control panel and display

E00758100039
1- AM/FM button 11- TRACK (Track up/down) button

2- PWR (On-Off) button 12- FOLDER (Folder down) button
3-
4-
CD (Mode change) button
13-
14-
SCAN button
5
5- RPT (Repeat) button 15- DISC button
6- RDM (Random) button 16- USB indicator
7- Fast-reverse button 17- FOLDER indicator
8- Fast-forward button 18- TRACK indicator
9- PAGE (Title scroll) button 19- RPT/F-RPT/RDM/F-RDM/SCAN/F-SCAN indicator
10- MENU button
OBKE12E1 5-49
To play from a USB memory device NOTE Folder selection

E00762500210
1. Press the PWR button (2) to turn on the au-
l To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To In the order
adjust the volume” on pages 5-13, 5-27 and
dio system. The system turns on in the last “To adjust the tone” on pages 5-13, 5-27.
mode used.
2. Connect your USB memory device to the
USB input terminal. Refer to “How to con- Supported compressed music files File selection
E00758300318
nect a USB memory device” on page 5-82. This audio can play MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV In the order
3. Press the CD button (4) several times to files recorded in a USB memory device. This audio
switch to the USB mode. The input mode supports up to 65,535 files in 700 folders on 8 levels.
changes as follows every time the CD button
is pressed. Folder selection order/file playback order (exam-
CD mode → USB mode → Bluetooth® ple) NOTE
mode* → Rear-seat display mode* The folder and file hierarchy in the USB memory l If a file protected by copyrights is played, the
device is shown below. file will be skipped.
NOTE
l If your vehicle is equipped with audio/video To fast-forward/reverse the track
input RCA terminals, pressing and holding E00758400029
Root folder (Root directory) To fast-forward/reverse the current track, press the
the CD button for 2 seconds or more
switches the system to the AUX mode. fast-forward (8) or fast-reverse (7) button.
Fast-forward
4. Once the device is selected, playback starts To fast-forward the current track, press the fast-for-
5 and “USB” appears on the display. ward (8) button. While the button is pressed, the
track will be fast-forwarded.
NOTE
Fast-reverse
l Depending on the condition of your USB de- To fast-reverse the current track, press the fast-re-
vice, it may take a longer time before the play-
back starts. verse (7) button. While the button is pressed, the
track will be fast-reversed.
5. To stop the playback, press the AM/FM but- To select a file
ton (1) or CD button (4) to switch to a differ- Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 E00758500020
ent mode. Press the TRACK button (11) to select the desired
file number.
5-50 OBKE12E1
: The track number increases by NOTE To play all folders in random order
Press
one. l When the DISC button (15) is pressed, the E00759000022
Press and hold the RDM button (6) until you hear a
track find mode will be cancelled.
Press : The track number decreases by beep to show “F-RDM” in the display.
one. The audio randomly selects tracks from all folders
3. Press the FOLDER button (12 or 13) to show
and plays the selected tracks.
Press for a : The track number increases the desired track in the display.
To exit this mode, press the button again.
long period continuously while the button
is pressed.
(approx. 2 sec- NOTE To find the start of each track in a folder for play-
onds or more) l When the DISC button (15) is pressed, the se- back (vehicles without Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
lection is cancelled and returned to the previ- E00759100111
Press for a : The track number decreases ous step. Press the SCAN button (14). “SCAN” is shown in
long period continuouslywhile the button
l If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or the display and the tracks in the current folder are
(approx. 2 sec- is pressed.
more after the FOLDER button (12 or 13) is played for several seconds from the beginning.
onds or more) pressed, the displayed track is played. The file number will blink while the scan mode is
selected.
If the side of the button is pressed once after a
4. Press the MENU button (10) to select the file. To exit this mode, press the button again.
few seconds, playback returns to the start of that
track.
To play the same file repeatedly NOTE
NOTE E00758700022 l Once all tracks in the folder have been cued
Press the RPT button (5) to show “RPT” in the dis- playback will restart from the beginning of
l Every time the TRACK button (11) is press- play. To cancel this mode, press the button again. the track that was playing when cueing started.
ed, the file number in the display changes.
To find a track
To play the files in the same folder repeatedly
E00758800023 To find the start of each track in all folders for 5
E00758600223
Press and hold the RPT button (5) until you hear a playback (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
You can select a folder to find a desired track. beep to show “F-RPT” in the display. E00765800038
1. Press the FOLDER button (12 or 13) to show All tracks in the current folder are played repeatedly. Press the SCAN button (14). “SCAN” is shown in
the desired folder in the display. To exit this mode, press the button again. the display and all tracks in all folders are played
for several seconds from the beginning.
To play a folder in random order The file number will blink while the scan mode is
NOTE E00758900024
selected.
l If no operation is performed for 10 seconds Press the RDM button (6) to show “RDM” in the
display. To exit this mode, press the button again.
or more or other button is operated after the
FOLDER button has been pressed, the selec- The audio randomly selects tracks from the current To find the start of first tracks in all folders for
ted track becomes unselected and the display folder and plays the selected tracks.
playback
returns to the playback display. To exit this mode, press the button again. E00759200112
Press and hold the SCAN button (14) until you
2. Press the MENU button (10) to select the fold- hear a beep to show “F-SCAN” in the display.
er. The first tracks in all folders are played for several
seconds from the beginning.
OBKE12E1 5-51
Playback starts from the folder next to the one cur- Album title → Track title → Artist name → For information concerning the voice recognition
rently playing. Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- function or speaker registration function, refer to
The folder number will blink while the scan mode face) → Normal display “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-67.
is selected.
To exit this mode, press the button again. The playback sequence of tracks is the same as
Example
when an iPod is connected. Refer to “To play iPod
NOTE Folder title
tracks via voice operation” on page 5-46.
l Once the cueing playback ends, playback
Preparation for voice operation
will start from the track at the beginning of
the folder next to the one that was playing To use the voice operation, press the SPEECH but-
when the cueing started. ton (1) first.
File title
To switch the display

E00759300025
You can display titles with tag information.
Folder title
The display changes as follows every time the NOTE
DISP button (3) is pressed during playback. l Press and hold the DISP button (3) again un-
Folder title → File title → Normal display til you hear a beep, and the tag information
display returns to the folder title display.
Tag information
1. Press and hold the DISP button (3) until you
l Up to 16 characters are shown in the display
5 hear a beep to show “TAG” in the display.
at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
press the PAGE button (9).
2. The display changes as follows every time The next characters are displayed every time
the DISP button (3) is pressed briefly. this button is pressed.
l If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
the display.
To play USB memory device tracks

via voice operation (vehicles with Blue-
tooth® 2.0 interface)
E00759400013
Desired tracks can be selected and played from
your USB memory device by “Artist”, “Album”,
“Playlist” and “Genre” using voice commands.
5-52 OBKE12E1
To play tracks from a Bluetooth®

device (vehicles with Bluetooth®
2.0 interface)
E00759700162
You can wirelessly connect a digital audio player
or cellular phone supporting Bluetooth® to listen to
the tracks on the connected device.
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-67

for the connecting method, etc.
The following explains the basic playback method.
NOTE
l According to the connected device, it is not
to operate correctly or the limitation might
be provided in available function.
l The protected file by copyright might not be
able to start playback.
l It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of
l
the connected device is flat.
The voice operation is not available to access 5
music files on the connected Bluetooth® de-
vice.
OBKE12E1 5-53
Bluetooth® device control panel and display

E00762600035
1- PWR (On-Off) button 8- SCAN button

2- DISP (Title display) button 9- Play button
5 3- CD (Mode change) button 10- Pause/Stop button
4- RPT (Repeat) button 11- BT-A (Bluetooth®) indicator
5- RDM (Random) button 12- TRACK indicator
6- PAGE (Title scroll) button 13- RPT/RDM/SCAN indicator
7- TRACK (Track up/down) button
5-54 OBKE12E1
To listen to tracks from a device con- To restart the playback, press the Play button (9). To play tracks in random order (if supported by
the device)
nected via Bluetooth® To select a track (if supported by the device) E00763200012
E00762700195 E00763000078
Press the RDM button (5) to show “RDM” in the
1. Press the PWR button (1) to turn on the au- Press the TRACK button (7) to select the desired display.
dio system. The system turns on in the last track number. The system randomly selects and plays tracks from
mode used.
2. Press the CD button (3) several times to : The track number increases by all tracks in the Bluetooth® device.
Press To exit this mode, press the button again.
switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth®) mode. The one.
input mode changes as follows every time : The track number decreases by To find the start of each track for playback (if sup-
the CD button is pressed. Press
one. ported by the device)
CD mode → USB (iPod) mode → Blue- E00763300084
tooth® mode → Rear-seat display mode* Press for a : The track number increases Press the SCAN button (8). “SCAN” is shown in
long period continuously while the button the display and all tracks in the Bluetooth® device
(approx. 2 sec- is pressed. are played for several seconds from the beginning.
NOTE
onds or more) To exit this mode, press the button again.
l For vehicles equipped with audio/video input
RCA terminals, pressing and holding the CD
Press for a : The track number decreases To switch the display (if supported by the device)
button for 2 seconds or more switches the sys- continuouslywhile the button E00763400014
long period
tem to the AUX mode. is pressed. The system can display tag information.
(approx. 2 sec-
1. Press and hold the DISP button (2) until you
onds or more)
3. Connect your Bluetooth® device. Refer to hear a beep to show “TAG” in the display.
“Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface If the side of the button is pressed once while a 2. The display changes as follows every time
track is playing, playback returns to the start of that the DISP button (2) is pressed briefly:
and Bluetooth® device” on page 5-71.
4. Playback starts automatically. track. Album title → Title name → Artist name → 5
Genre → Normal display
NOTE NOTE
Example
l Depending on the connected device, the play- l Every time the track selection button is press-
back may not start automatically. ed, the track number in the display changes.
In this case, operate the connected device to Album title
start the playback. To play the same track repeatedly (if supported by
the device)
E00763100011 Title name
To stop the playback (if supported by the device)
E00762800011 Press the RPT button (4) during playback to show
To stop the playback, press the Stop button (10). “RPT” in the display.
To restart the playback, press the Play button (9). To exit this mode, press the button again. Artist name
To pause the playback (if supported by the device)

E00762900038
To pause the playback, press the Pause button (10).
OBKE12E1 5-55
NOTE To use the external audio input To activate the external audio input
l Press and hold the DISP button (2) again un- mode
til you hear a beep, and the tag information function*
E00732200609
disappears.
l Up to 16 characters are shown in the display
at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
press the PAGE button (6). Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)
The next characters are displayed every time
this button is pressed.
l If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
the display.
Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)
Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) 1. Use a commercially available audio cable to

A- Left audio input connector (white) connect the audio equipment to the internal
B- Right audio input connector (red) audio input connector.
2. [Except for vehicles with a rear-seat display]
Auxiliary Video connector (RCA) Press the CD button (D) for more than 2 sec-
A- Left audio input connector (white) onds.
5 B- Right audio input connector (red)
C- Video input connector (yellow)
The display (E) will show “AUX” and then
the external audio input mode will be activa-
ted.
You can listen to commercially available audio [Vehicles with a rear-seat display]
equipment, such as a portable audio system, from Press the CD button (D) for more than 2 sec-
your vehicle’s speakers, by connecting the audio onds.
equipment to the audio input connectors, which are The display (E) will show “REAR AUX”
external input connectors (pin jacks). and then the external audio input mode will
be activated.
When the power of the rear-seat display is
NOTE on, press the SOURCE button of the rear-
l For information on using the Auxiliary Vid- seat display to activate VIDEO mode. (For de-
eo connector (RCA), refer to the separate own- tails, refer to the separate rear-seat display
er’s manual for the rear-seat display or the owner’s manual.)
MITSUBISHI Multi Communication System. 3. To deactivate the external audio input mode,
press the AM/FM button (F) or the CD but-
ton (D) to switch to another mode.
5-56 OBKE12E1
CAUTION To listen to a disc in the rear-seat Steering wheel remote control

display (vehicles with rear-seat switch*
l Do not operate the connected audio equip-
ment while driving. display) E00710000665
The remote control switches are located on the left
E00755100096
This could distract you and an accident side of the steering wheel.
might occur. It is possible to listen to the audio from the rear-
seat display using the vehicle’s speakers. These switches can be used when the ignition
NOTE Press the CD button to select the rear-seat display
l The connected audio equipment cannot be op- mode. The word “REAR” will appear at the top-
erated with the vehicle’s audio system. left of the display.
l Depending on the connected audio equip- Each push of the CD button changes the mode to
ment, it may produce noise from the speakers. the next one in the following sequence: CD mode
l Use the connected audio equipment’s own → Rear-seat display mode → CD mode.
power source, such as its battery.
Noise may be produced from the speakers if The following operation of the rear-seat display is
the connected audio equipment is used while possible from the audio system.
charging it using the accessory socket of the
vehicle. Source Operation
l Do not activate the external audio input CD Track selection
mode when no audio equipment is connected. 1- Volume up button
Otherwise, noise may be produced from the MP3/WMA Folder/Track selection 2- Volume down button
l
speakers.
Connect audio equipment when the external
Video CD Track/Scene selection 3-
4-
PWR (ON-OFF)/Mode change button
Seek up/Track up/File up/Fast-forward button
5
audio input mode is deactivated or lower the DVD video Title/Chapter selection 5- Seek down/Track down/File down/Fast-re-
vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting it. DVD audio Group/Track selection verse button
Noise may be produced from the speakers if
audio equipment is connected after the exter- To make your desired selection, use the TRACK
nal audio input mode is activated. button or the FOLDER button on the audio system. NOTE
l For information on how to connect and oper- l Do not push two or more of the steering
ate the audio equipment, refer to the owner’s wheel remote control switches at the same
manual for the equipment. time.
To turn on the power

PWR (ON-OFF) button - 3
When the power is off, press this button to turn the
power on. To turn the power off, press this button
for 2 seconds or longer.
OBKE12E1 5-57
To adjust the volume You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the fast- NOTE
forward button. While the button is kept pressed, l The track number increases continuously
Volume up button - 1 the disc will be fast-forwarded. while the button is pressed.
The volume will increase when this button is pressed.
Fast-reverse button - 5
Track down button - 5
Volume down button - 2 You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the fast-
Press the button repeatedly until the desired track
The volume will decrease when this button is press- reverse button. While the button is kept pressed,
number appears on the display.
ed. the disc will be fastreversed.
To select a desired track NOTE

Mode selection
Press the mode change button (3) to select the de- Track up button - 4 l The track number decreases continuously
Press the button repeatedly until the desired track while the button is pressed.
sired mode.
The mode changes in the following order. number appears on the display.
FM1 → FM2 → FM3 → MW → LW → CD → To listen to a USB memory device
USB or iPod* → Bluetooth®* → Rear-seat dis- NOTE Press the mode change button (3) and select USB
mode.
play* → FM1. l With an MP3 CD, the track number contin-
ues to increase while the button is pressed.
To select a desired file
To listen to the radio File up button - 4
Press the mode change button (3) to select the de- Track down button - 5 Press the button repeatedly until the desired track
sired band (LW/MW/FM). Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.
number appears on the display.
Automatic radio tuning
5 Seek up button - 4/Seek down button - 5 NOTE
NOTE
After pressing these buttons, the reception of the se- l The track number increases continuously
lected station will begin. l With an MP3 CD, the track number contin- while the button is pressed.
ues to decrease while the button is pressed.
To listen to a CD To listen to an iPod File down button - 5
Press the mode change button (3) and select CD Press the button repeatedly until the desired track
Press the mode change button (3) and select iPod
mode. number appears on the display.
mode.
To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc (music CDs NOTE
To select a desired track
only)
To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the
Track up button - 4 l The track number decreases continuously
Press the button repeatedly until the desired track while the button is pressed.
fast-forward button (4) or the fast-reverse button (5). number appears on the display.
Fast-forward button - 4
5-58 OBKE12E1
Error codes
E00710101009
If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
5
OBKE12E1 5-59
Error display Problem Item Repair

NO DISC No disc inserted Disc is not in CD player. Insert disc.
Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on Insert disc with label facing up. Remove
ERROR 01 Focus error
disc. moisture from disc.
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces- Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibra-
ERROR 02 Disc error
sive vehicle vibration. tions stop.
Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject,
ERROR 03 Mechanism error Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.
have the equipment inspected.
Allow radio to cool by waiting about
ERROR HOT Inside of audio system is hot. Internal protection against high temperatures.
30 minutes.
Communication error between external device
Communication or power supply Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ERROR and audio equipment. Power supply error of ex-
error ized Service Point.
ternal device.
5-60 OBKE12E1
Error codes (iPod)

E00763500028
5
OBKE12E1 5-61
Error display Item Repair

NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.
VERSION ERROR (Blink) The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.
Remove the iPod.
USB BUS POWER (Blink) An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred. Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
USB LSI ERROR (Blink) Internal device errors
If the iPod indicator illuminates, the iPod cannot be authentica-
Reconnect the iPod.
ted.
CONNECT RETRY (Blink) Reconnect the iPod correctly.
If the iPod indicator goes out, it shows the USB communica- If this error is displayed again, have the vehicle inspec-
tion error. ted at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
5-62 OBKE12E1
Error codes (USB memory device)

E00763600029
5
OBKE12E1 5-63
Error display Item Repair

Record music files in the format supported by the USB
NO SONG There are no playable music files.
memory device.
The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is dis-
USB FILE ERROR (Blink) The file cannot be played. played for several seconds, and then the next playable
file is played automatically.
UNSUPPORTED FORMAT (Blink) The USB memory device format cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.
Remove the USB memory device.
USB BUS POWER (Blink) An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred. Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
USB LSI ERROR (Blink) Internal device errors
Reconnect the USB memory device correctly.
If this error is displayed again, have the vehicle inspec-
CONNECT RETRY (Blink) USB communication error
ted at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
5-64 OBKE12E1
Handling of compact discs l When storing compact discs, always store

them in their separate cases. Never place com-
E00723000106
l Use only the type of compact discs that have pact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place
the mark shown in the illustration below. Play- where the temperature or humidity is high.
back of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause l Never touch the flat surface of the disc with-
problems. out a label. This will damage the disc surface
and could affect the sound quality. When han-
dling a compact disc, always hold it by the
outer edge and the centre hole.
l To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth.
Wipe directly from the centre hole towards
the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Nev-
er use any chemicals such as benzine, paint
thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static
agent on the disc.
l The use of special shaped, damaged compact

discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality com-
pact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the
discs) will damage the CD player. 5
l In the following circumstances, moisture can
form on discs and inside the audio system,
preventing normal operation.
• When there is high humidity (for exam-
ple, when it is raining).
• When the temperature suddenly rises, l Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil,
such as right after the heater is turned on etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.
in cold weather. l Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers
(B) on compact discs. Also, do not use any
In this case, wait until the moisture has compact disc on which a label or sticker has
had time to dry out. started to peel off or any compact disc that
l When the CD player is subjected to violent vi- has stickiness or other contamination left by
brations, such as during off-road driving, the a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such
tracking may not work. a compact disc, the CD player may stop work-
OBKE12E1 5-65
ing properly and you may not be able to eject

the compact disc.
l Be sure to observe the handling instructions
for the CD-R/RW disc.
Antenna
E00710500455
Glass antenna
WARNING Antenna leads (1) are printed on the left-hand side
of inside of the rear side window (3-door models)/
l Operating the CD player in a manner oth- quarter window (5-door models) glass.
er than specifically instructed herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not remove the cover and attempt to
repair the CD player by yourself. There
are no user serviceable parts inside. In
case of malfunction, we recommend you
to have it checked.
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
E00725100026
l You may have trouble playing back some

CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders
(CD-R/RW drives), either due to their record-
ing characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,
scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
NOTE
5 l CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high tem- l When the rear side/quarter window glass is
cleaned, wipe the glass with a soft cloth by
peratures and high humidity than ordinary mu-
sic CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for ex- moving the cloth along the antenna so as not
tended periods may damage them and make to damage it.
playback impossible.
l The unit may not successfully play back a
CD-R/RW that was made by the combina-
tion of writing software, a CD recorder
(CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are in-
compatible with one another.
l This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs
if the session is not closed.
l This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs
which contain other than CD-DA or MP3 da-
ta (Video CD, etc.).
5-66 OBKE12E1
Link System* Bluetooth® 2.0 interface* WARNING

E00764500012 E00726000572
The Link System takes overall control of the devi- The Bluetooth ® 2.0 interface allows for making/re-
ces connected via the USB input terminal or the
l Refer to and comply with all state and lo-
ceiving hands-free calls in the vehicle using a Blue- cal laws in your area regarding cellular
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the connected de- tooth® compatible cellular phone based on the wire- phone usage while driving.
vices to be operated by using the switches in the ve- less communication technology commonly known
hicle or voice commands. as Bluetooth®. It also allows the user to play mu-
See the following section for details on how to op- NOTE
sic, saved in a Bluetooth® music player, from the
erate.
vehicle’s speakers. l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
The system is equipped with a voice recognition if the Bluetooth® device has a flat battery or
Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page 5-67. function, which allows you to make hands-free the device power is turned off.
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-82. calls by simple switch operations and voice com- l Hands-free calls will not be possible if your
Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on mand operations using a defined voice tree. phone does not have service available.
page 5-43. l If you place the Bluetooth® device in the ve-
Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth ® device” The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used when the hicle’s third seat or luggage compartment,
on page 5-53. ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. you may not be able to use the Bluetooth®
Refer to “To use the external audio input function” 2.0 interface.
on page 5-56. l Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Blue- with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Bluetooth®
is a registered trademark of BLUE- l For details on the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,
TOOTH SIG, INC. tooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Connecting the Blue-
tooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device” on you can see them by accessing the
MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
Link System End User Licence Agree-
ment
page 5-71.
Please read and agree on the “Warning about 5
E00764600013 Bluetooth®
is a registered trademark of BLUE- Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”
You have acquired a device that includes software TOOTH SIG, INC. because it connects to other than
licensed by MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORA- MITSUBISHI MOTORS website.
TION from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the auto- http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-
motive experience business unit), and their subse- WARNING ucts/index.html
quent 3rd party suppliers. For a complete list of
these 3rd party products and their end user licence l Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface al- Steering control switch ® p. 5-68
lows you to make hands-free calls, if you Voice recognition function ® p. 5-68
agreements, please go to the following website.
choose to use the cellular phone while driv- Useful voice commands ® p. 5-69
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldisclo-
ing, you must not allow yourself to be dis- Speaker enrollment function ® p. 5-70
sure.pdf
tracted from the safe operation of your ve- Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Blue-
hicle. Anything, including cellular phone tooth® device ® p. 5-71
usage, that distracts you from the safe op- Operating a music player connected via Blue-
eration of your vehicle increases your
tooth® ® p. 5-74
risk of an accident.
OBKE12E1 5-67
How to make or receive hands-free l If you press the button briefly while in voice NOTE
calls ® p. 5-74 recognition mode, it will interrupt prompting l When you press the SPEECH button to enter
Phone book function ® p. 5-76 and allow voice command input. voice recognition mode with a cellular phone
Pressing the button longer will deactivate the paired to the system, current information on
Steering control switch voice recognition mode. the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-
E00727200106
l Pressing this button briefly during a call will tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”
enable voice recognition and allow voice com- will be displayed on the audio display.*
mand input. *: Some cellular phones will not send this in-
formation to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
PICK-UP button
l Call waiting and three-way calls can be used
l Press this button when an incoming call is re- by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is
ceived to answer the telephone. possible to use those services with your cellu-
l When another call is received during a call, lar phone.
press this button to put the first caller on
hold and talk to the new caller.
• In such circumstances, you can press the Voice recognition function
E00727300370
button briefly to switch between callers.
You will switch to the first caller and the The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a
other caller will be put on hold. voice recognition function.
1- Volume up button Simply say voice commands and you can perform
2- Volume down button • To establish a three-way call in such sit-
uations, press the SPEECH button to en- various operations and make or receive hands-free
3- SPEECH button calls.
4- PICK-UP button ter voice recognition mode and then say
5 5- HANG-UP button “Join calls”.

With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice recogni-
HANG-UP button tion is possible for English, French, Spanish, Ital-
Volume up button ian, German, Dutch, Portuguese and Russian. The
Press this button to increase the volume. l Press this button when an incoming call is re-
ceived to refuse the call. factory setting is English.
Volume down button l Press this button during a call to end the cur-
Press this button to decrease the volume. rent call. NOTE
When another call is on hold, you will l If the voice command that you say differs
SPEECH button switch to that call. from the predefined command or cannot be
l Press this button to change to voice recogni- l If this button is pressed in the voice recogni- recognised due to ambient noise or some oth-
tion mode. tion mode, the voice recognition mode will er reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will
While the system is in voice recognition be deactivated. ask you for the voice command again up to 3
mode, “Listening” will appear on the audio times.
display.
5-68 OBKE12E1
l For best performance and further reduction Useful voice commands Security function
of ambient noise, the vehicle windows E00760000019 E00760500131
should be closed while engaging the voice rec- Help function It is possible to use a password as a security func-
ognition function. E00760100010 tion by setting a password of your choice for the
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
l Depending on the selected language, some
help function. If you say “Help” when the system
functions may not be available. When the security function is turned on, it is neces-
is waiting for a voice command input, the system sary to make a voice input of a 4-digit password in
Selecting the Language will tell you a list of the commands that can be order to use all functions of the Bluetooth® 2.0 in-
1. Press the SPEECH button. used under the circumstances. terface, except for reception.
2. Say “Setup”.
3. Say “Language.” Cancelling Setting the password
4. The voice guide will say “Select a language:
E00760200011 Use the following procedure to turn on the security
There are two cancel functions. function by setting a password.
English, French, Spanish, Italian, German, If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to exit
Dutch, Portuguese or Russian” Say the de- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 2. Say “Setup”.
sired language. (Example: Say “English.”)
If you are anywhere else within the system, say 3. Say “Password.”
5. The voice guide will say “English (French,
“Cancel” to return to the main menu. 4. The voice guide will say “Password is disa-
Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese
or Russian) selected. Is this correct?” Say bled. Would you like to enable it?” Answer
Confirmation function setting “Yes.”
“Yes.” E00760400013
Answer “No” to return to Step 4. Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the pass-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a con- word and return to the main menu.
firmation function. 5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-dig-
NOTE With the confirmation function activated, you are it password. Remember this password. It will
l The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
sage twice. The first message is in the cur-
given more opportunities than normal to confirm a
command when making various settings to the Blue-
be required to use this system”.
Say a 4-digit number which you want to set
5
rent language, and the second message is in tooth® 2.0 interface. This allows you to decrease as a password.
the selected language. the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed. 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide
l If many entries are registered in the vehicle The confirmation function can be turned on or off will say “Password <4-digit password>. Is
phone book, changing the language will take by following the steps below. this correct?” Answer “Yes.”
longer. 1. Press the SPEECH button. Answer “No” to return to the password input
l Changing the language deletes the mobile 2. Say “Setup”. in Step 5.
phone book imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0 3. Say “Confirmation prompts”. 7. When the registration of the password is com-
interface. If you wish to use it, you will have 4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation pleted, the voice guide will say “Password is
to import it again. prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to turn enabled” and the system will return to the
confirmation prompts <off/on>”. main menu.
6. When the voice guide says “English (French, Answer “Yes” to change the setting or an-
Spanish, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese swer “No” to keep the current setting.
or Russian) selected,” the language change 5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation
process will be completed and the system prompts are <off/on>” and then the system
will return to the main menu. will return to the main menu.
OBKE12E1 5-69
NOTE NOTE 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gear-
l Password will be required to access the sys- l System must be unlocked to disable the pass- shift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position
tem after the next ignition cycle. word. (M/T), or the selector lever in the “P”
l It is required for a little time after engine (PARK) position (A/T), and pull the parking
stop that the entered password is actually re- brake lever.
1. Press the SPEECH button.
corded in the system. 2. Say “Setup”.
If the ignition switch is made to “ACC” or 3. Say “Password.” NOTE
“ON” or the engine is started immediately af- 4. The voice guide will say “Password is ena- l Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the
ter engine stop, there is a case when the en- bled. Would you like to disable it?” Answer vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the ve-
tered password is not recorded in the system. “Yes.” hicle in a safe area before attempting speaker
At this time, please try to enter the password Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of the enrollment.
again. password and return to the main menu.
Entering the password 5. When the disabling of the password is com- 2. Press the SPEECH button.
If a password has been set and the security function pleted, the voice guide will say “Password is 3. Say “Voice training”.
is enabled, the voice guide will say “Hands-free sys- disabled” and the system will return to the 4. The voice guide will say “This operation
tem is locked. State the password to continue” main menu. must be performed in a quiet environment
when the SPEECH button is pressed to enter voice while the vehicle is stopped. See the owner’s
recognition mode. Say the 4-digit password num- Speaker enrollment function manual for the list of required training phra-
ber to enter the password. E00727400209 ses. Press and release the SPEECH button
If the entered password is wrong, the voice guide The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the speaker en- when you are ready to begin. Press the HANG-
will say “<4- digit password>, Incorrect password. rollment function to create a voice model for one UP button to cancel at any time”.
Please try again”. Enter the correct password. person per language. Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker
5 This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- enrollment process.
face to recognise voice commands said by you.
NOTE
You can turn a voice model registered with the NOTE
l You can re-enter the password as many times speaker enrollment function on and off whenever l If you do not start the speaker enrollment proc-
as you want. ess within 3 minutes of pressing the
you want.
l If you have forgotten your password, say SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment func-
“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and tion will time out.
Speaker enrollment
then check with a MITSUBISHI MOTORS E00727500196 The voice guide will say “Speaker Enroll-
Authorized Service Point. It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the speak- ment has timed out”. The system will then
er enrollment process. beep and the voice recognition mode will be
Disabling the password
To ensure the best results, run through the process deactivated.
Use the following procedure to turn off the security
while in the driver’s seat, in an environment that is
function by disabling the password.
as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Re-
winds and the vehicle windows are closed). Please
peat the corresponding phrase listed in table
turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to
“Enrollment commands” on page 5-81.
prevent interruption of the process.
Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment.
5-70 OBKE12E1
The system will register your voice and then 3. If you have completed a speaker enrollment
move on to the registration of the next com- process once already, the voice guide will You can also change a Bluetooth® device to be con-
mand. Continue the process until all phrases say either “Enrollment is enabled. Would nected.
have been registered. you like to disable or retrain?” or “Enroll-
ment is disabled. Would you like to enable To pair
NOTE or retrain?” To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth®
4. When enrollment is “enabled”, the voice mod- 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.
l To repeat the most recent voice training com- el is on; when enrollment is “disabled”, the
mand, press and release the SPEECH button. 1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the gear-
voice model is off. Say the command that shift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position
l If you press the HANG-UP button anytime
fits your needs.
during the process, the system will beep and (M/T), or the selector lever in the “P”
stop the speaker enrollment process. Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrollment (PARK) position (A/T), and pull the parking
process and recreate a new voice model. (Re- brake lever.
fer to “Speaker enrollment” on page 5-70.)
6. When all enrollment commands have been
read out, the voice guide will say “Speaker NOTE
enrollment is complete”. Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- l You cannot pair Bluetooth® devices with the
The system will then end the speaker enroll- face and Bluetooth® device Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehicle is
ment process and return to the main menu. E00760600220 parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth® device
Before you can make or receive hands-free calls or with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, confirm
NOTE play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface func- that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
l Completing the speaker enrollment process tion, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Blue-
will turn on the voice model automatically. tooth® 2.0 interface. 2. Press the SPEECH button.
l The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not
work in this mode.
NOTE
3.
4.
Say “Setup”.
Say “Pairing options.” 5
l Pairing is required only when the device is 5. The voice guide will say “Select one of the
Enabling and disabling the voice model and re- used for the first time. Once the device has following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say
training been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- “Pair.”
E00727600096
You can turn a voice model registered with the face, you only need to bring the device into
speaker enrollment function on and off whenever the vehicle next time and the device will au- NOTE
you want. tomatically connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 in- l If 7 devices have already been paired, the
You can also retrain the system. terface (if supported by the device). voice guide will say “Maximum devices
Use the following procedure to perform these ac- paired” and then the system will end the pair-
tions. ing process. To register a new device, delete
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired with the one device and then repeat the pairing process.
1. Press the SPEECH button. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
2. Say “Voice training”. (Refer to “Deleting a device” on page 5-73.)
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are available
in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player
6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-dig-
most recently connected is automatically connected
it pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.
to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
OBKE12E1 5-71
When the confirmation function is on, the sys- l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog- To select a cellular phone
tem will confirm whether the number said is nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide 1. Press the SPEECH button.
acceptable. Answer “Yes.” will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair- 2. Say “Setup.”
Answer “No” to return to pairing code selec- ing process will be cancelled. 3. Say “Select phone.”
tion. Confirm that the device you are pairing sup- 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the
ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again. numbers of the cellular phones and device
NOTE tags of corresponding cellular phones will be
l If you enter the wrong number, the voice
read out in order, starting with the cellular
l Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-
pairing code. Please refer to the device man- ing process will be cancelled. phone that has been most recently connected.
ual for pairing code requirements. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing Say the number of the cellular phone that
it again. you want to connect to.
l The pairing code entered here is only used
When the confirmation function is on, the sys-
for the Bluetooth® connection certification.
It is any 4-digit number the user would like tem will ask you again whether the phone
8. The voice guide will say “Please say the
to select. that you want to connect to is correct. An-
name of the device after the beep.” You can
Remember the pairing code as it needs to be swer “Yes” to continue and connect to the cel-
assign a desired name for the Bluetooth® de- lular phone.
keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the vice and register it as a device tag. Say the Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say
pairing process. name you want to register after the beep. “Please say.”
Depending on the connection settings of the
Say the number of the phone that you want
Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be NOTE to connect to.
entered each time you connect the Blue-
l When the confirmation function is on, after
tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter- repeating the device tag you have said, the
face. For the default connection settings, re-
NOTE
voice guide will ask “Is this correct?” An-
5 fer to the instructions for the device. swer “Yes.” l You can connect to a phone at any time by
pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
To change the device tag, answer “No” and number, even before all of the paired num-
7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing proce- then say the device tag again. bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-
dure on the device. See the device manual lar phones are read out by the system.
for instructions.” Enter in the Bluetooth® de- 9. The voice guide will say “Pairing complete,”
vice the 4-digit number you have registered after which a beep will be played and the pair- 5. The selected phone will be connected to the
in Step 6. ing process will end.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice guide
will say “<device tag> selected” and then the
NOTE Selecting a device system will return to the main menu.
l According to the corresponding device to E00760700016
Bluetooth®, it might take a few minutes to If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are available To select a music player
pair the Bluetooth® device with the Blue- in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player 1. Press the SPEECH button.
most recently connected is automatically connected 2. Say “Setup.”
tooth® 2.0 interface.
to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. 3. Say “Select music player.”
You can connect to the other cellular phone or mu- 4. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the
sic player by following setting change procedures. numbers of the music players and device tags
5-72 OBKE12E1
of corresponding music players will be read 5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” the 5. The voice guide will read out device tags of
out in order, starting with the music player numbers of the devices and device tags of cor- corresponding devices in order, starting with
that has been most recently connected. responding devices will be read out in order, the Bluetooth® device that has been most re-
Say the number of the music player that you starting with the device that has been most recently connected.
want to connect to. cently connected. After it completes reading 6. After the device tags of all paired Bluetooth®
When the confirmation function is on, the sys- all pairs, the voice guide will say “or all.” devices have been read, the system will say
tem will ask you again whether the music Say the number of the device that you want “End of list, would you like to start from the
player that you want to connect to is correct. to delete from the system. beginning?”
Answer “Yes” to continue and connect to the If you want to delete all paired phones from To hear the list again from the beginning, an-
music player. the system, say “All.” swer “Yes.” When you are done, answer
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say 6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide “No” to return to the main menu.
“Please say.” will say “Deleting <device tag> <number>.
Say the number of the music player that you Is this correct?” or “Deleting all devices. Is
want to connect to. this correct?”
NOTE
Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). l If you press and release the SPEECH button
and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the
NOTE Answer “No,” the system will return to Step
list is being read, the system will advance or
4.
l You can connect to a music player at any
7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and then
rewind the list.
time by pressing the SPEECH button and say- Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with
ing the number, even before all of the paired the system will end the device deletion proc-
the next highest number or “Previous” to re-
numbers and device tags of corresponding mu- ess.
turn to the phone with the previous number.
sic players are read out by the system. l You can change the device tag by pressing
NOTE and releasing the SPEECH button and then
5. The selected music player will be connected
to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
l If the device deletion process fails for some
reason, the voice guide will say “Delete l
saying “Edit” while the list is being read.
You can change the phone to be connected
5
The voice guide will say “<device tag> selec- failed” and then the system will cancel delet- by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-
ted” and then the system will return to the ing the device. ton and then saying “Select phone” while the
main menu. list is being read.
To check a paired Bluetooth® device l You can change the music player to be con-
Deleting a device E00760800017 nected by pressing and releasing the
Use the following procedure to delete a paired Blue- You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by fol- SPEECH button and then saying “Select mu-
tooth® device from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. lowing the steps below. sic player” while the list is being read.
1. Press the SPEECH button. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say “Setup.” 2. Say “Setup.” Changing a device tag
3. Say “Pairing Options.” 3. Say “Pairing Options.” E00760900018
4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the 4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the You can change the device tag of a paired cellular
following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “De- following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say phone or music player.
lete.” “List.” Follow the steps below to change a device tag.
2. Say “Setup.”
OBKE12E1 5-73
3. Say “Pairing Options.” Operating a music player connected 2. Say “Dial.”

4. The voice guide will say “Select one of the 3. After the voice guide says “Number please,”
following: pair, edit, delete, or list.” Say “Ed-
via Bluetooth® say the telephone number.
E00761000016
it.” For the operation of a music player connected via 4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <number
5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and Bluetooth®, refer to “To play tracks from a Blue- recognised>.”
read out the numbers of the Bluetooth® devi- tooth® device” on page 5-53. The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then make
ces and device tags of corresponding devices the call.
in order, starting with the Bluetooth® that How to make or receive hands-free calls When the confirmation function is on, the sys-
has been most recently connected. E00761100020 tem will confirm again the telephone num-
After all paired device tags have been read, You can make or receive hands-free calls using a ber. To continue with that number, answer
the voice guide will say “Which device, Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone connected to “Yes.”
please?” Say the number of the device tag the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. To change the telephone number, answer
you want to change. You can also use the phone books in the Blue- “No.” The system will say “Number please”
tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without dialling then say the telephone number again.
NOTE telephone numbers.
l You can press and release the SPEECH but- To make a call ® p. 5-74 NOTE
ton while the list is being read, and immedi- SEND function ® p. 5-75 l In the case of English, the system will recog-
ately say the number of the device tag you Receiving calls ® p. 5-75 nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
want to change. MUTE function ® p. 5-76 number “0.”
Switching between hands-free mode and private l The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-
6. The voice guide will say “New name, mode ® p. 5-76 bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
please.” Say the name you want to register as l The maximum supported telephone number
5 a new device tag. NOTE length is as follows:
• International telephone number: + and tel-
When the confirmation function is on, the
voice guide will say “<New device tag>. Is
l The hands-free calls might not be operated
ephone numbers (to 18 digits).
correctly when it makes calling or receiving
this correct?” Answer “Yes.” • Except for international telephone num-
by operating the cellular phone directly.
Answer “No,” you can say the new device ber: telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
tag you want to register again. Making a call using a phone book
7. The device tag is changed. To make a call
E00761200122 You can make calls using the vehicle phone book
When the change is complete, the voice You can make a call in the following 3 ways using or mobile phone book of the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
guide will say “New name saved” and then the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: face.
the system will return to the main menu. Making a call by saying a telephone number, mak- For details on the phone books, refer to “Phone
ing a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’s book function” on page 5-76.
phone book, and making a call by redialing. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say “Call.”
Making a call by using the telephone number
You can make a call by saying the telephone number.
5-74 OBKE12E1
NOTE <name> at [home], [work], [mobile], or [oth- Redialing

l If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone er]?” Select the location to call. You can redial the last number called, based on the
book and the mobile phone book are empty, history of dialed calls in the paired cellular phone.
the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone NOTE Use the following procedure to redial.
book is empty. Would you like to add a new 1. Press the SPEECH button.
entry now?”
l If the name you selected has matching data
in the vehicle phone book but no telephone 2. Say “Redial.”
Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say number is registered under the selected loca-
“Entering the phone book - new entry tion, the voice guide will say “{home/work/ SEND function
menu.” You can now create data in the vehi- mobile/other} not found for <name>. E00761300035
cle phone book. Would you like to add location or try again?” During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter
Answer “No,” to return to the main menu. Say “Try again,” and the system will return voice recognition mode, then say “<numbers>
to Step 3. SEND” to generate DTMF tones.
3. After the voice guide says “Name please,” Say “Add location” and you can register an For example, if during a call you need to simulate
say the name you want to call, from those reg- additional telephone number under the selec- the press of a phone button as a response to an auto-
istered in the phone book. ted location. mated system, press the SPEECH button and speak
4. If there is only one match, the system pro- l If the name you selected has matching data “1 2 3 4 pound SEND” and the 1234# will be sent
ceeds to Step 5. in the mobile phone book but no telephone on your cellular phone.
If there are two or more matches, the voice number is registered under the selected loca-
Receiving calls
guide will say “More than one match was tion, the voice guide will say “{home/work/ E00761600012
found, would you like to call <returned mobile/other} not found for <name>. If an incoming phone call is received while the ig-
name>.” If that person is the one you want to Would you like to try again?” nition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the
call, answer “Yes.” Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to audio system will be automatically turned on and
Answer “No,” and the name of the next match-
ing person will be uttered by the voice guide.
Step 3.
Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.
switched to the incoming call, even when the audio
system was originally off.
5
Start over again from Step 1. The voice guide announcement for the incoming
NOTE call will be output from the front passenger’s seat
l If you say “No” to all names read by the sys- 6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name> speaker.
tem, the voice guide will say “Name not <location>” and then the system will dial the If the CD player or radio was playing when the in-
found, returning to main menu” and the sys- telephone number. coming call was received, the audio system will
tem will return to the main menu. mute the sound from the CD player or radio and out-
NOTE put only the incoming call.
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button on
5. If only one telephone number is registered un- l When the confirmation function is on, the sys- the steering wheel control switch.
der the name you just said, the voice guide tem will ask if the name and location of the
proceeds to Step 6. receiver are correct. When the call is over, the audio system will return
If two or more telephone numbers are regis- If the name is correct, answer “Yes.” to its previous state.
tered that match the name you just said, the If you want to change the name or location to
voice guide will say “Would you like to call call, answer “No.” The system will return to
Step 3.
OBKE12E1 5-75
MUTE function Vehicle phone book NOTE

E00760300041
At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle
E00763800135
This phone book is used when making calls with
l If the maximum number of entries are al-
ready registered, the voice guide will say
microphone. the voice recognition function. “The phone book is full. Would you like to
Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehicle delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to de-
“Mute” during a call will turn ON the MUTE func- phone book per language. lete a registered name.
tion and mute the microphone. Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: Say “No,” to return to the main menu.
Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn off home, work, mobile and other. You can register
the MUTE function and cancel the mute on the mi- one telephone number for each location.
5. When the name has been registered, the
crophone.
voice guide will say “home, work, mobile, or
You can register a desired name as a name for any
Switching between hands-free mode and private other?” Say the location for which you want
phone book entry registered in the vehicle phone
mode to register a telephone number.
book.
E00761400036
Names and telephone numbers can be changed lat-
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch between NOTE
er on.
Hands-free mode (Hands-free calls) and private l When the confirmation function is on, the
mode (calls using cellular phone). voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-
The vehicle phone book can be used with all paired
If you press the SPEECH button and say “Transfer rect?” Answer “Yes.”
cellular phones.
call” during a Hands-free call, you can stop the Answer “No” to return to location selection
Hands-free mode and talk in private mode. To register a telephone number in the vehicle in Step 5.
To return to Hands-free mode, press the SPEECH phone book If a telephone number has been registered for
button again and say “Transfer call”. You can register a telephone number in the vehicle the selected location, the voice guide will say
phone book in the following 2 ways: Reading out a “The current number is <telephone number>,
Phone book function
5 E00763700017
telephone number, and selecting and transferring 1
phone book entry from the phone book of the cellu-
number please.”
If you do not want to change the telephone
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of unique
phone books that are different from the phone book lar phone. number, say “cancel” or the original number
stored in the cellular phone. They are the vehicle to keep it registered.
To register by reading out a telephone number
phone book and the mobile phone book. 1. Press the SPEECH button.
These phone books are used to register telephone 2. Say “Phone book.” 6. The voice guide will say “Number please.”
numbers and to make calls to desired numbers via 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the Say the telephone number to register it.
the voice recognition function. following: new entry, edit number, edit
name, list names, delete, erase all, or import NOTE
NOTE contact.” Say “New entry.” l In the case of English, the system will recog-
4. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Say nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the
l Disconnecting the battery cable will not de-
number “0.”
lete information registered in the phone book. your preferred name to register it.
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone

number you have just read, and then register
the number.
5-76 OBKE12E1
When the telephone number has been regis- l The maximum supported telephone number 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellular
tered, the voice guide will say “Number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of phone to set it up so that the phone book en-
saved. Would you like to add another num- 20 digits or more will be truncated to the try you want to register in the vehicle phone
ber for this entry?” first 19 digits. book can be transferred to the Bluetooth® 2.0
To add another telephone number for a new l If telephone numbers contain characters oth- interface.
location for the current entry, answer “Yes.” er than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are
The system will return to location selection deleted before the transfer.
NOTE
in Step 5. l For the connection settings on the cellular
l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-
Answer “No” to end the registration process phone side, refer to the instructions for the
and return to the main menu. cellular phone. nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular
phone or the connection takes too much
time, the voice guide will say “Import con-
NOTE 1. Press the SPEECH button. tact has timed out” and then the system will
l When the confirmation function is on, after 2. Say “Phone book.” cancel the registration. In such case, start
repeating the telephone number you have 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the over again from Step 1.
read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor- following: new entry, edit number, edit
rect?” Answer “Yes.” name, list names, delete, erase all, or import l Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing
and holding the SPEECH button will cancel
Answer “No” to return to telephone number contact.” Say “Import contact.” the registration.
registration in step 6. 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like to
import a single entry or all contacts?” Say
To select and transfer one phone book entry “Single entry.” 7. When the reception is complete, the voice
from the phone book of the cellular phone The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become guide will say “<Number of telephone num-
You can select 1 phone book entry from the phone ready to receive transferred phone book data. bers that had been registered in the import
source> numbers have been imported. What
book of the cellular phone and register it in the ve-
hicle phone book.
NOTE
name would you like to use for these num- 5
bers?”
l If the maximum number of entries are al- Say the name you want to register for this
NOTE ready registered, the voice guide will say phone book entry.
l Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle “The phone book is full. Would you like to
is parked. delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to de-
Before transferring, make sure that the vehi- lete a registered name. NOTE
cle is parked in a safe location. Say “No,” to return to the main menu. l If the entered name is already used for other
phone book entry or similar to a name used
l All or part of data may not be transferred,
for other phone book entry, that name cannot
even when the cellular phone supports Blue- 5. After the voice guide says “Ready to receive
tooth®, depending on the compatibility of the be registered.
a contact from the phone. Only a home, a
device. work, and a mobile number can be impor-
ted,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will re-
ceive the phone book data from the Blue-
tooth® compatible cellular phone.
OBKE12E1 5-77
8. The voice guide will say “Adding <name>.” NOTE NOTE

When the confirmation function is on, the sys- l Say “List names,” and the names registered l If the location where a telephone number
tem will ask if the name is correct. Answer in the phone book will be read out in order. was already registered has been overwritten
“Yes.” Refer to “Listening to the list of registered with a new number, the voice guide will say
Answer “No,” and the voice guide will say names” on page 5-78. “Number changed” and then the system will
“Name please.” return to the main menu.
Register a different name. 5. The voice guide will say “Home, work, mo-
9. The voice guide will say “Numbers saved.” bile or other?” [Editing a name]
10. The voice guide will say “Would you like to Select and say the location where the tele- 1. Press the SPEECH button.
import another contact?” phone number you want to change or add is 2. Say “Phone book.”
Answer “Yes” if you want to continue with registered. 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the
the registration. You can continue to register When the confirmation function is on, the sys- following: new entry, edit number, edit
a new phone book entry from Step 5. tem will check the target name and location name, list names, delete, erase all, or import
Answer “No,” to return to the main menu. again. Answer “Yes” if you want to continue contact.” Say “Edit name.”
To change the content registered in the vehicle with the editing. 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the
Answer “No” to return to Step 3. name of the entry you would like to edit, or
phone book
6. The voice guide will say “Number please.” say list names.” Say the name you want to edit.
You can change or delete a name or telephone num-
Say the telephone number you want to register.
ber registered in the vehicle phone book.
You can also listen to the list of names registered NOTE
in the vehicle phone book. NOTE l Say “List names,” and the names registered
l If the telephone number is already registered in the phone book will be read out in order.
in the selected location, the voice guide will Refer to “Listening to the list of registered
5 NOTE
l The system must have at least one entry.
say “The current number is <current num-
ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-
names” on page 5-78.
phone number to change the current number. 5. The voice guide will say “Changing <name>.”
[Editing a telephone number] When the confirmation function is on, the sys-
1. Press the SPEECH button. 7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone tem will ask if the name is correct. Answer
2. Say “Phone book.” number. When the confirmation function is “Yes” if you want to continue with the edit-
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the on, the system will ask if the number is cor- ing based on this information.
following: new entry, edit number, edit rect. Answer “Yes.” Answer “No” to return to Step 4.
name, list names, delete, erase all, or import Answer “No” to return to Step 3. 6. The voice guide will say “Name please.” Say
contact.” Say “Edit number.” 8. Once the telephone number is registered, the the new name you want to register.
4. The voice guide will say “Please say the voice guide will say “Number saved” and 7. The registered name will be changed.
name of the entry you would like to edit, or then the system will return to the main menu. When the change is complete, the system
say list names.” Say the name of the phone will return to the main menu.
book entry you want to edit.
[Listening to the list of registered names]
5-78 OBKE12E1
2. Say “Phone book.” 4. The voice guide will say “Please say the 7. When the deletion of the telephone number
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the name of the entry you would like to delete, is completed, the voice guide will say
following: new entry, edit number, edit or say list names.” Say the name of the “<name> <location> deleted” and then the
name, list names, delete, erase all, or import phone book entry in which the telephone num- system will return to the main menu.
contact.” Say “List names.” ber you want to delete is registered. If all locations are deleted, the system will
4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the en- say “<name> and all locations deleted” and
tries in the phone book in order. NOTE the name will be removed from the phone
5. When the voice guide is done reading the book. If numbers still remain under the en-
l Say “List names,” and the names registered
try, the name will retain the other associated
list, it will say “End of list, would you like to in the phone book will be read out in order.
start from the beginning?” Refer to “Listening to the list of registered numbers.
When you want to check the list again from names” on page 5-78. Erasing the phone book
the beginning, answer “Yes.”
When you are done, answer “No” to return to You can delete all registered information from the
5. If only one telephone number is registered in vehicle phone book.
the previous or main menu. the selected phone book entry, the voice 1. Press the SPEECH button.
guide will say “Deleting <name> <location>.” 2. Say “Phone book.”
NOTE If multiple telephone numbers are registered 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the
l You can call, edit or delete a name that is be- in the selected phone book entry, the voice following: new entry, edit number, edit
ing read out. guide will say “Would you like to delete name, list names, delete, erase all, or import
Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to [home], [work], [mobile], [other], or all?” contact.” Say “Erase all.”
call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or “De- Select the location to delete, and the voice 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide
lete” to delete it. guide will say “Deleting <name> <location>.” will ask “Are you sure you want to erase ev-
The system will beep and then execute your erything from your handsfree system phone
command. NOTE book?” Answer “Yes.” 5
l If you press the SPEECH button and say “Con- l To delete the telephone numbers from all lo- Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all reg-
tinue” or “Previous” while the list is being cations, say “All.” istered information in the phone book and re-
read, the system will advance or rewind the turn to the main menu.
list. Say “Continue” to proceed to the next en- 5. The voice guide will say “You are about to
6. The system will ask if you really want to de-
try or “Previous” to return to the previous en- delete everything from your hands-free sys-
lete the selected telephone number(s) to go
try. tem phone book. Do you want to continue?”
ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”
Answer “No,” the system will cancel delet- Answer “Yes” to continue.
[Deleting a telephone number] ing the telephone number(s) and then return Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all reg-
1. Press the SPEECH button. to Step 4. istered information in the phone book and re-
2. Say “Phone book.” turn to the main menu.
3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the
following: new entry, edit number, edit
name, list names, delete, erase all, or import
contact.” Say “Delete.”
OBKE12E1 5-79
6. The voice guide will say “Please wait, eras- NOTE phone book stored in the cellular phone will
ing the handsfree system phone book” and l Transfer should be completed while the vehi- start.
then the system will delete all data in the cle is parked. Answer “No,” to return to the main menu.
phone book. Before transferring, make sure that the vehi-
When the deletion is complete, the voice cle is parked in a safe location. NOTE
guide will say “Hands-free system phone l The already stored phone book in the mobile
book erased” and then the system will return
l The transfer may take some time to complete
phone book is overwritten by the stored depending on the number of contacts.
to the main menu. phone book in the cellular phone. l If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
l All or part of data may not be transferred, connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
Mobile phone book even when the cellular phone supports Blue- lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable
E00763900048 tooth®, depending on the compatibility of the to transfer contact list from phone” and then
All entries in the phone book stored in the cellular device. the system will return to the main menu.
phone can be transferred in a batch and registered
in the mobile phone book.
l Only a home, a work, and a mobile number l If you press the HANG-UP button or press
can be imported. and hold the SPEECH button during the data
Up to 7 mobile phone books, each containing up to
1,000 names, can be registered.
l The maximum supported telephone number transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of the system will return to the main menu.
20 digits or more will be truncated to the l If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically con- first 19 digits. transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide
verts from text to voice the names registered in the l If telephone numbers contain characters oth- will say “Unable to complete the phone book
transferred phone book entries, and creates names. er than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are import” and then the system will return to
deleted before the transfer. the main menu.
NOTE l For the connection settings on the cellular l If there are no contacts in the phone book,
5 l Only the mobile phone book transferred
from the connected cellular phone can be
phone side, refer to the instructions for the
cellular phone.
the voice guide will say “There are no con-
tacts on the connected phone.”
used with that cellular phone.
l You cannot change the names and telephone 1. Press the SPEECH button. 6. When the transfer is complete, the voice
numbers in the phone book entries registered 2. Say “Phone book.” guide will say “Import complete” and then
in the mobile phone book. You cannot select 3. The voice guide will say “Select one of the the system will return to the main menu.
and delete specific phone book entries, either. following: new entry, edit number, edit
To change or delete any of the above, change name, list names, delete, erase all, or import
the applicable information in the source contact.” Say “Import contact.”
phone book of the cellular phone and then 4. The voice guide will say “Would you like to
transfer the phone book again. import a single entry or all contacts?” Say
“All contacts.”
To import a devices phone book 5. The voice guide will say “Importing the con-
Follow the steps below to transfer to the mobile tact list from the mobile phone book. This
phone book the phone book stored in the cellular may take several minutes to complete.
phone. Would you like to continue?” Answer “Yes,”
transferring to the mobile phone book the
5-80 OBKE12E1
Enrollment commands
E00732400089
Phrase English French Spanish Italian German Dutch Portuguese Russian

1 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789 123456789
2 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212 888 555 1212
3 Call Appeler Llamar Chiama Anrufen Bellen Ligar Вызов
4 Dial Composer Marcar Componi Wählen Nummer keuze Marcar Набор
5 Setup Configurer Configuración Configura Einrichtung Setup Configurar Настройка
6 Cancel Annuler Cancelar Annulla Abbrechen Annuleren Cancelar Отмена
7 Continue Continuer Continuar Continua Weiter Doorgaan Continuar Продолжить
8 Help Aide Ayuda Aiuto Hilfe Help Ajuda Справка
OBKE12E1 5-81
USB input terminal* 3. Connect the connector cable (C) to the USB
memory device (B). CAUTION
E00761900015
You can connect your USB memory device or
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB memo-
l Keep the lid of the glove box closed while
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents
ry device or iPod. of the glove box could otherwise cause in-
The following explains how to connect and remove juries.
a USB memory device or iPod.
Refer to the following sections for details on how
to play music files: NOTE
Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on l Do not connect the USB memory device to
page 5-43. the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in l When closing the glove box, be careful not
the United States and other countries. to trap the connector cable.
How to connect a USB memory device 5. To remove the connector cable, turn the igni-
E00762000273 4. Connect the connector cable (C) to the USB tion switch to the “LOCK” position first and
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the input terminal (D).
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. perform the installation steps in reverse.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
the glove box. How to connect an iPod
E00762100014
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the
5 ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
the glove box.
5-82 OBKE12E1
3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the iPod Model name Condition
(B). CAUTION
Storage capacity of 256
l Keep the lid of the glove box closed while USB memory device
Mbytes or more
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents
of the glove box could otherwise cause in- iPod touch* F/W Ver.1.1.1 or later
juries.
iPod classic* F/W Ver.1.0 or later
iPod (fifth generation)* F/W Ver.1.2.2 or later
NOTE
l When closing the glove box, be careful not iPod nano (fifth genera-
F/W Ver.1.2 or later
to trap the connector cable. tion)*
iPod nano (second gen-
5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the igni- F/W Ver.1.1.2 or later
eration)*
tion switch to the “LOCK” position first and
perform the installation steps in reverse. Models other than USB Digital audio player sup-
memory devices and porting mass storage
NOTE iPods class
l Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple Types of connectable devices and sup-
Inc. ported file specifications *: “iPod touch,” “iPod classic,” “iPod” and “iPod
E00762200015 nano” are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in
Device types the United States and other countries.
4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the USB E00762300162
input terminal (D). Devices of the following types can be connected.
NOTE 5
l Depending on the type of the USB memory
device or other device connected, the connec-
ted device may not function properly or the
available functions may be limited.
l Use the iPod whose firmware has been upda-
ted to the latest version.
l You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
the USB input terminal when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
l Do not keep your USB memory device or
iPod in your vehicle.
l It is recommended that you back up files in
case of data damage.
OBKE12E1 5-83
l Do not connect to the USB input terminal

any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
Sun visors Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will automat-
ically turn on the mirror lamp (A).
E00711200811
reader, etc.) other than the connectable devi-
ces specified in the previous section.
The device and/or data may be damaged. If
any of these devices was connected by mis-
take, remove it after turning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position.
File specifications
E00762400017
You can play music files of the following specifica-
tions that are saved in a USB memory device or oth-
er device supporting mass storage class.
Item Condition 1- To eliminate front glare

2- To eliminate side glare
File format
MP3,
WAV
WMA, AAC,
CAUTION
Vanity mirror l If the lid of vanity mirror with lamp is
Maximum number of E00731900191
levels (including the Level 8 kept open for prolonged periods of time,
root) the vehicle’s battery will be discharged.
Type 1
5 Number of folders 700 A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor.
Card holder
Number of files 65,535 E00732000203
Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on the
back of the sun visor.
Type 2
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor.
5-84 OBKE12E1
Slide plate* Ashtray* Mounting position for moveable ash-

E00732100086
To block out the glare of the sunlight from behind
E00711400640 tray
the inside rear-view mirror, swing down the sun vi- There is a mounting position on the front console
box.
sor, and then pull out the slide plate (B). CAUTION
l Put out matches and cigarettes before
they are placed in the ashtray.
l Don’t put papers and other things that
burn into your ashtrays. If you do, ciga-
rettes or other smoking materials could
set them on fire, causing damage.
l Always close the ashtray. If left open, oth-
er cigarette butts in the ashtray may be re-
kindled.
To use the ashtray, open the lid.
To block out a broader range of glare from your NOTE

side, swing the sun visor sideways and pull out the l The moveable ashtray can also be fitted in
slide plate (B). the cup holder for the rear seat (3-door mod-
els) and in the cup holder for the third seat (5-
door models). Refer to “Cup holder” on page
5-94.
5
OBKE12E1 5-85
Cigarette lighter* CAUTION Accessory socket

E00711501042 E00711600987
The cigarette lighter can be used while the ignition The accessory socket can be used while the igni-
l Do not touch the heating element or the
tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
cigarette lighter housing, hold the knob
only to prevent burns.
l Do not allow children to operate or play
with the cigarette lighter as burns may oc- CAUTION
cur.
l Be aware that using electronic equipment
l Something is wrong with the cigarette with the engine off may run the battery
lighter if it does not pop back out within down.
approximately 30 seconds of being push-
ed in. We recommend you to have it l When you connect an electrical device,
make sure it is rated at 12 V and its elec-
checked. trical capacity does not exceed 120 W.
l Do not use any electric appliance that is When using some sockets at the same
not approved by MITSUBISHI time, make sure the total power consump-
MOTORS. Doing so could damage the tion of the electrical accessories does not
socket. If you used the cigarette lighter af- exceed 120 W at 12 V.
1- Open the lid
ter damaging the socket, the cigarette
2- Push all the way in.
lighter might pop out or fail to come out l When the accessory socket is not in use,
be sure to close the cap or plug, because
after being pushed in. the socket might become clogged by for-
The cigarette lighter will automatically return to its
original position with a “click” when ready. Pull it
l When the cigarette lighter socket is used eign material and be short-circuited.
as a power source for an electric appli-
5 out for use.
After use, insert the cigarette lighter to its original
ance, be sure that the electric appliance
operates at 12 V and has an electric ca- NOTE
position in the socket. pacity of 120 W or less. In addition, long l The two or more accessory sockets can be
use of the electric appliance without run- used simultaneously.
NOTE ning the engine may run down the battery.
l Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed
from its socket, because the socket might be-
come clogged by foreign material and be
short-circuited.
5-86 OBKE12E1
Type 1 Rear (3-door models) Interior lamps

Pull out the plug (A) in the instrument panel to un- E00712001015
cover the socket. Use it to plug in an electrical device.
Instrument panel*
Rear (5-door models)
1- Luggage compartment lamp

2- Rear personal lamps
Type 2 3- Door courtesy lamps
Open the cap (B) on the centre console box and the 4- Ceiling lamp (Type 1)*
side wall of the luggage compartment to uncover 5- Ceiling lamp (Type 2)*
the socket. Use it to plug in an electrical device. 6- Interior lamp switch
Room & map lamps
7- Foot lamps*
Console box 5
NOTE
l If you leave the interior lamps on without run-
ning the engine, you will run down the bat-
tery. Before you leave the vehicle, make sure
that all the interior lamps are off.
OBKE12E1 5-87
Interior lamp switch 2 (DOOR) - The room & map lamps and rear per- 3( )- The room & map lamps and rear per-
E00717300494
sonal lamps go on when any of the sonal lamps are off regardless of
The interior lamp switch can be used to turn the doors or the backdoor is opened. opening and closing of the doors and
room & map lamps and rear personal lamps on and When all doors and backdoor are backdoor.
off. closed, the room & map lamps and
rear personal lamps are illuminated
and dimmed gradually for NOTE
15 seconds and then go off. l When the room & map lamp switch is in the
However, the lamps go off immedi- “ON” position, the interior lamp switch can-
ately without being dimmed in the not be used to turn off the room & map lamps.
following cases:
l The doors and backdoor are Room & map lamps
closed and the ignition switch E00717400062
is turned to the “ON” position. With the doors and backdoor closed and the interi-
l All the doors and the backdoor or lamp switch in the “DOOR” or “ ” position,
are locked using the central pressing the lens (A) illuminates the room & map
door lock function or the key- lamps and pressing the lens again turns them off.
less entry system (if so equip- If any of the doors or the backdoor is opened with
ped). the interior lamp switch in the “DOOR” position,
1( )- The room & map lamps and rear per- the room & map lamps illuminate. When it is
sonal lamps go on regardless of open- closed, the room & map lamps are dimmed gradual-
ing and closing of the doors and back- NOTE ly for 15 seconds and then go off.
l On vehicles with keyless entry system, if the
5 door.
ignition key is removed with the doors and
backdoor closed, the room & map lamps and
rear personal lamps are illuminated for
15 seconds and then go off.
The dimming period is also adjustable.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point.
l When the room & map lamp switch is in the
“ON” position, closing the doors and back-
door does not cause the room & map lamps
to go off.
5-88 OBKE12E1
NOTE If any of the doors or the backdoor is opened, the Luggage compartment lamp
l When any of the doors or the backdoor is lamps go on. When it is subsequently closed, the E00712700536
opened and the interior lamp switch in the lamps are dimmed gradually for 15 seconds then
“ ” position, the room & map lamps remain go off.
on even when the lens is pressed.
Type 1
Rear personal lamps
E00712600290
With the doors and backdoor closed and the interi-
or lamp switch in the “DOOR” position, pressing
the lens (A) makes the lamp go on and pressing the
lens again makes it go off.
1( )- The lamp illuminates.

*: Front of the vehicle
2(o)- The lamp goes on when any of the
doors or the backdoor is opened.
Type 2
When all the doors and the backdoor
are closed, the lamp is illuminated
for 15 seconds, then goes off.
However, the lamp goes off immedi-
ately without being dimmed in case
5
of the followings:
l The ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position.
l All the doors and the backdoor
are locked using the central
door lock function or the key-
*: Front of the vehicle less entry system (if so equip-
ped).
NOTE
l When the interior lamp switch is in the “ ”
position, the lamp remains off even when the
lens (A) is pressed and any of the doors or
the backdoor is opened.
OBKE12E1 5-89
NOTE Rear foot lamp* NOTE

l On vehicles with keyless entry system, when l When the ignition switch is turned from the
the ignition key is removed with the doors “ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po-
and the backdoor closed, the lamp is illumi- sition, the lamps illuminate for 15 seconds
nated for 15 seconds, then goes off. and then go off.
The dimming period is also adjustable. l All doors and backdoor are unlocked using
For further information, we recommend you the central door lock function or the keyless
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- entry system (if so equipped), the lamps illu-
ized Service Point. minate for 15 seconds and then go off.
l When any of the doors or the backdoor is
opened without the ignition switch in the
3( )- The lamp goes off.
“ON” position, the lamps illuminate. When it
Foot lamps and ceiling lamp is closed, the lamps stay on for 30 seconds
E00726600262
Ceiling lamp (Type 1) and then go off.
The front foot lamps (A), rear foot lamp (B) and However, the lamps go off immediately
ceiling lamp (C) operate when the interior lamp when all doors are closed and locked using
switch is in the “DOOR” position. the central door lock function or the keyless
The lamps go on in case of the followings: entry system (if so equipped).
l Any of the doors or the backdoor is opened. l If you want to go off the foot lamps and ceil-
ing lamp while driving, select the interior
l The ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
sition. lamp switch in the “ ” position.
l All doors and backdoor are unlocked using
5 the central door lock function or the keyless
entry system (if so equipped).
Front foot lamps* Ceiling lamp (Type 2)
5-90 OBKE12E1
Door courtesy lamps Lamps (room lamps, etc.) auto-cutout Storage spaces
E00717500047
Each door courtesy lamp illuminates when the rele-
function (Vehicles with keyless entry E00713100885
vant door is opened and goes off when the door is system)
CAUTION
E00712900831
closed.
If any of the interior lamps are left switched on
with the ignition switch in any position other than
Front “ON” or “ACC”, it goes off automatically after ap- l Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated
drink, and spectacles in the cabin when
proximately 30 minutes.
parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The
The lamp goes on again if the ignition switch is
cabin will become extremely hot, so light-
turned to the “ON” or “ACC” position, any door or
ers and other flammable items may catch
backdoor is opened and closed, or the keyless entry
fire and unopened drink cans (including
remote control is operated.
beer cans) may rupture. The heat may al-
so deform or crack plastic spectacle len-
NOTE ses and other spectacle parts that are
l The interior lamp auto-cut function period made of plastic.
can be adjusted or deactivated. We recom- l Keep the lids of storage spaces closed
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point for de- tents of a storage space could otherwise
Rear (5-door models) tailed information and assistance. cause injuries.
NOTE
l Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
5
OBKE12E1 5-91
NOTE The centre console box can also be used as an arm-

l When the lamp switch is in the “ ” or rest. Refer to “Armrest” on page 2-08.
“ ” position, the lower glove box lamp illu-
minates.
l The Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) (A)
or the Auxiliary Video connector (RCA) (A)
is located in the glove box (if so equipped).
For details, refer to “To use the external au-
dio input function” on page 5-56.
l The USB input terminal (B) is located in the
glove box (if so equipped). For details, refer
1- Sunglasses holder* to “USB input terminal” on page 5-82.
2- Glove box l Small articles can be stored in the upper area
3- Accessory box* (C) of the glove box.
4- Centre console box 1- Upper box
5- Side box* 2- Lower box
6- Luggage floor box
Upper box
Glove box To open the upper box, lift the left upper release lev-
E00717601162 er (A) and raise the lid.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using
the key.
5
Centre console box

E00722600105
Upper and lower boxes are located inside the cen-
tre console box.
1- To lock
2- To unlock
3- To open, pull the lever
5-92 OBKE12E1
Lower box Card holder Side box*

To open the lower box, lift the lower release lever Insert the card all the way in to keep it in the card E00722700092
(B) and raise the lid. holder (A). Pull out the card to remove it from the The box for storing articles is located inside the lug-
holder. gage compartment.
1- To open
Accessory box* 2- To close
E00717900168 NOTE
To open, push the lid.
l The card holder can hold up to 3 cards.
l Do not insert receipts and other thin pieces Luggage floor box
E00718700280
of paper. The box for storing articles is located inside the lug-
gage compartment. 5
OBKE12E1 5-93
3-door models Sunglasses holder* Cup holder

To use the box, raise the luggage floor board by pull- E00718600322 E00714500408
ing up on the strap (A). To open, push the lid.
CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving the
vehicle; doing so could distract you and
result in an accident.
For the front seat

The cup holder is located in front of the centre con-
sole box.
5-door models
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board. CAUTION
l The holder should not be used to store any-
thing heavier than sunglasses. These ob-
jects could drop out.
5
NOTE
l The holder may not be able to accommodate
every possible size and shape of sunglasses;
it is advisable to check compatibility before
use.
NOTE
l On 5-door models, the luggage floor board
can be removed. This is useful for storing
large articles.
5-94 OBKE12E1
For the rear seat/second seat

E00716900321
2. Open the lid (C) while holding the side face
of the lid with your hand.
Rear shelf (3-door models)*
E00722800064
The rear shelf divides the passenger compartment
3-door models and luggage area.
To use the cup holder, press the button (A) at the
top of the armrest and allow the armrest to drop
down. NOTE
l Do not place luggage or other items on the
rear shelf.
Remove the rear shelf when loading large items of

luggage.
To remove
Raise the rear shelf, then pull it upward to remove
it from the groove (A) on each side of the luggage
For the third seat* area.
E00719000075
The cup holder is located at the left side of the
third seat.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-
5-door models cans securely in its holes.
1. Lift the head restraint (B) and tilt the armrest.
5
To refit
Refit the rear shelf by performing the removal
steps in reverse.
OBKE12E1 5-95
Cargo area cover (5-door 2. Pull up the cargo area cover (C) from the
mounting grooves (D).
Convenient hooks (5-door
models)* models)*
E00715500421 E00715600129
The cargo area cover divides the passenger compart- There are four hooks (A) on the side of the luggage
ment and cargo area. compartment.
Light items of luggage can be hung from the hook.
NOTE
l Do not put luggage on the cover.
To remove
1. Unhook the hooks (A) on the cover from the
mounting grooves (B) on the side of the car-
go area, and the cover will be rolled back in-
to the retracted position.
To refit
Refit the cover by performing the removal steps in
reverse.
NOTE
l Gently shake the entire cover after fitting it
5 to make sure it is securely retained.
NOTE
l Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about
4 kg) on the hook.
Doing so could cause damage to the hook.
5-96 OBKE12E1
Luggage hooks CAUTION Coat hooks

E00715700306 E00725600366
There are hooks on the floor and the side of the lug- There are two hooks on the rear/second assist grips
gage compartment. Use the hooks on the floor for
l Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seat- for use in hanging clothes.
back height.
securing the luggage. Secure the luggage firmly.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result
3-door models due to hindered rearward view or flying
objects during sudden braking.
5-door models
WARNING
l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
ted object on the coat hook. If the curtain
airbag was activated, any such item could
be propelled away with great force and
5
could prevent the curtain airbag from in-
flating correctly. Hang clothes directly on
the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp ob-
jects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
OBKE12E1 5-97
Installation position for warning

triangle
E00718400102
There are securing bands (A) for the warning trian-
gle on the backdoor.
To remove or install the warning triangle, turn the
lock knobs (B) anticlockwise, then remove the back-
door lid (C).
5 NOTE
l The warning triangle shown in the illustra-
tion is not supplied with the vehicle. It is rec-
ommended one be obtained and carried for
use if required.
5-98 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down............................................................6-02

Emergency starting.......................................................................6-02
Engine overheating.......................................................................6-04
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel-powered vehicles only)............6-06
Removal of water from the fuel filter (diesel-powered
vehicles only)...........................................................................6-06
Tool, jack and jack handle............................................................6-07
How to change a tyre....................................................................6-09
Towing..........................................................................................6-15
Operation under adverse driving conditions.................................6-18
OBKE12E1
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down Emergency starting 2. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle.
Put an A/T in “P” (PARK) or a M/T in “N”
E00800101179 E00800502587
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to If the engine cannot be started because the battery (Neutral). Turn off the ignition switch.
the shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/ is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle
or the warning triangle etc. Refer to “Hazard warn- can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
ing flasher switch” on page 3-35. WARNING
If the engine stops/fails WARNING l Turn off the ignition on both vehicles be-
forehand. Make sure that the cables or
Vehicle operation and control are affected if the en- your clothes cannot be caught by the fan
gine stops. Before moving the vehicle to a safe l To start the engine using jumper cables
connected to another vehicle, perform the or drive belt. Personal injury could result.
area, be aware of the following:
correct procedures according to the in-
l The brake booster becomes inoperative and struction below. Incorrect procedures
the pedal effort will increase. Press down the 3. Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical
could result in a fire or explosion or dam-
brake pedal harder than usual. loads.
age to the vehicles.
l Since the power steering pump is no longer 4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the proper
operative, the steering wheel feels heavy level. Refer to “Battery” on page 8-10.
when turning it.
CAUTION
l Do not attempt to start the engine by pull- WARNING
ing or pushing the vehicle. It could dam- l If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or ap-
age your vehicle. pears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump
l Always wear protective eye goggles when Starting!
working near the battery. A battery might rupture or explode if the
l Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- temperature is below the freezing point
dren. or if it is not filled to the proper level.
6
1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper 5. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles positive (+) terminal of the discharged bat-
aren’t touching each other. tery (A or B), and the other end to the posi-
tive (+) terminal of the booster battery (C).
CAUTION
l Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery.
If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting
can damage both vehicles.
6-02 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
3000, 3800 models 3200 models
6
WARNING WARNING
6. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to l Be sure to observe the connecting se- l When connecting the jumper cables, do
the negative (-) terminal of the booster bat- quence of . not connect the positive (+) cable to the
tery (C), and the other end to the engine l Make sure that the connection is made negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks
block of the vehicle with the discharged bat- to the appointed position (shown in the il- might cause explosion of the battery.
tery at the point farthest from the battery. lustration). If the connection is made di-
rectly to the negative side of the battery,
the inflammable gasses generated from
the battery might catch fire and explode.
OBKE12E1 6-03
For emergencies
CAUTION WARNING Engine overheating

E00800600991
If the water temperature gauge indication remains
l Take care not to get the jumper cable l Remove all the caps before charging the
in the overheating zone for a long time, the engine
caught in the cooling fan or other rotat- battery.
may be overheating. If this occurs, take the follow-
ing part in the engine compartment. l Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric
ing corrective measures:
l Use the proper cables suitable for the bat- acid. If electrolyte (battery acid) comes in-
tery size to prevent overheating of the ca- to contact with your hands, eyes, clothes 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
bles. and the painted surface of your vehicle, it 2. Check whether steam is coming from the en-
should be thoroughly flushed with water. gine compartment.
l Check the jumper cables for damage and
corrosion before use. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and thoroughly, [If steam does not come from the engine com-
and get prompt medical attention. partment]
7. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the With the engine still running, raise the bon-
booster battery, let the engine idle a few mi- net to ventilate the engine compartment.
nutes, then start the engine in the vehicle NOTE
with the discharged battery. l If the vehicle is put in motion without fully [If steam is coming from the engine compart-
charging the battery, it might cause the loss ment]
of smooth engine operation and the anti-lock Stop the engine, and when the steam stops,
CAUTION brake warning lamp to illuminate. Refer to raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine com-
“Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on page partment. Restart the engine.
l Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis- 4-39.
tance running.
WARNING
8. After the engine is started, disconnect the ca-
bles in the reverse order and keep the engine l Do not open the bonnet while steam is com-
ing from the engine compartment. It
running for several minutes.
6 could cause steam or hot water to spurt
out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt
out even when there is no steam coming
WARNING out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
l If the battery has to be charged while fit- very careful when opening the bonnet.
ted in the vehicle, disconnect the vehicle l Be careful of hot steam, which could be
side negative (-) terminal connected to the blowing off the reserve tank cap.
battery. l Do not attempt to remove the radiator
l Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away cap while the engine is hot.
from the battery because the battery may
produce an explosion.
l Use adequate ventilation when charging
or using the battery in an enclosed space.
6-04 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the 4. After the engine coolant temperature has drop- 6. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve
fan is not turning, stop the engine immediate- ped to the normal temperature, stop the engine. tank if necessary. (Refer to the “Mainte-
ly and have it checked. nance” section.)
CAUTION
Front l Do not add coolant while the engine is
hot. Suddenly adding cold coolant could
damage the engine. Wait for the engine to
cool down, then add coolant a little at a
time.
7. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leak-

age and the drive belt for looseness or damage.
If there is anything wrong with the cooling
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank (A). system or drive belt, we recommend you to
A- Radiator cap have it checked and repaired.
B- Cooling fan
C- Reserve tank
* : If so equipped
WARNING
l Be careful not to get your hands or
clothes caught in the cooling fan.
6
WARNING
l If there is none, make sure that the en-
gine has cooled down before removing
the radiator cap (B), because hot steam
or boiling water otherwise will gush from
the filler port and may scald you.
OBKE12E1 6-05
For emergencies
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel- Removal of water from the fuel 2. Operate the hand pump (B) slowly 6 or 7
times in order to force the water out through
powered vehicles only) filter (diesel-powered vehicles the drain plug.
E00800700149
The fuel system should be bled to remove air as de- only)
E00800800140
scribed below if the fuel supply is exhausted during If the fuel filter indication lamp in the instrument
travel. panel illuminates during driving, it indicates that wa-
ter has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this occurs,
Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel fil- remove the water as described below.
ter until the hand pump becomes stiff.
1. Loosen the drain plug (A) at the bottom of
Then try again to start the engine.
the fuel filter.
If the engine does not start, repeat the process above.
3. Tighten the drain plug when water no longer

comes out.
4. Bleed the air in the fuel system.
(Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on page
6-06.)
5. Check to be sure that the fuel filter indication
lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to “ON”, and that it goes off when the
engine is started. If in doubt, we recommend
6 you to have your vehicle inspected.
CAUTION
l Do not smoke or have any other open
flame near the vehicle while bleeding the
fuel system.
l Be sure to carefully clean away any water
drained out because any fuel mixed with
the water could ignite and cause a fire.
6-06 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
Tool, jack and jack handle 5-door models Removing and storing the tool, jack
E00800900659 and jack handle
E00802300178
Storage
The storage location of the tool, jack and jack han- 3-door models
dle should be remembered in case of an emergency. Tool, jack and jack handle are in the storage com-
partment at the rear of the vehicle, on the right side.
3-door models 1. Loose the knob (A), and remove the lid (B).
D- Jack
E- Jack handle
F- Tool (wheel nut wrench)
Tool
E00801900483
A- Jack handle
B- Tool (wheel nut wrench) 2. Remove the securing bolt (C), and then take
C- Jack out the jack.
1- Wheel nut wrench
OBKE12E1 6-07
For emergencies
3. Remove the tool and the jack handle from 2. Remove the lid. 4. Pull the lid to remove it.
the holder (D), and take it out.
3. Remove the tool and the jack handle from 5. Remove the securing bolt (B), and then take
4. Reverse the removing procedure when stor- the holder (A), and take it out. out the jack.
ing the tool, jack and jack handle.
CAUTION
l When removing and storing the items in
the storage compartment, be careful not
to injure your hands or fingers.
6 5-door models
Tool, jack and jack handle are located in the lug-
gage floor box.
1. When the third seat is folded into the lug-
gage floor box, raise the seat forward and re-
turn it to the original position. 6. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
Refer to “Storage of the third seat” on page ing the tool, jack and jack handle.
2-14.
6-08 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
To use the jack handle

E00802400023
How to change a tyre WARNING
E00801201601
1. While pushing the snap pin (A), remove the Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a
inside handle (B). safe, flat location.
l Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
2. Set the parking brake firmly. jack could slip out of position, leading to
3. On vehicles with M/T, turn the ignition an accident.
switch to the “LOCK” position, move the
gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.
On vehicles with A/T, move the selector lev- NOTE
er to the “P” (PARK) position, turn the igni- l The chocks shown in the illustration do not
tion key to the “LOCK” position. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set that you keep one in the vehicle for use if nee-
up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, ded.
etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi- l If chocks are not available, use stones or any
cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve- other objects that are large enough to hold
hicle. the wheel in position.
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it
2. With the snap pin (C) pushed, insert the in- is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks 6. Get the spare wheel, jack, jack handle and
side handle until it is locked. (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite wheel nut wrench ready. Refer to “Tool, jack
from the tyre (B) you are changing. and jack handle” on page 6-07.
Spare wheel information

E00803600266
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre frequently
and make sure it is ready for emergency use at any
time. 6
Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest speci-
fied air pressure will ensure that it can always be
used under any conditions (city/high-speed driving,
varying load weight, etc.).
OBKE12E1 6-09
For emergencies
The spare wheel is stored on the outside of the back- To remove the spare wheel 3. Remove the bolts (B) by turning them anti-
door. (Refer to “To remove the spare wheel” on E00803500177 clockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
page 6-10).
CAUTION
l Grasp the spare wheel firmly when remov-
ing or attaching it.
l When removing the spare wheel, put on
gloves. Removing the spare wheel with
your bare hands may cause injury to the
fingers.
1. Open the backdoor.

2. Open the lids (A) inside of the backdoor.
1- Spare wheel 4. Close the backdoor.
CAUTION
l The tyre pressure should be periodically
checked and maintained at the specified
pressure while the tyre is stowed.
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure
can lead to an accident. If you have no
choice but to drive with an insufficient
6 tyre pressure, keep your speed down and
inflate the tyre to the correct pressure as
soon as possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation
pressures” on page 8-13.)
5. Open the spare wheel garnish (C).
6-10 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
NOTE 2. Using the jack handle, turn the release valve

l Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body (A) clockwise until it stops.
near the flat tyre. This makes it safer if the
jack slips out of position.
CAUTION
l Do not open the backdoor with the spare
wheel garnish open. The spare wheel gar- 3. Insert the jack handle in the bracket of the
nish could swing out to the right of the ve- jack and hook the notch (B) on the jack han-
hicle, resulting in an accident. To change a tyre dle end to the claw (C) of the bracket.
E00803200709
1. Loosen the wheel nuts a quarter turn with the
6. Loosen the spare wheel bolts with the wheel wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel
nut wrench (D), then remove the spare wheel. nuts yet.
4. Place the jack under one of the jacking

points shown in the illustration. Use the jack-
ing point closest to the tyre you wish to
change.
OBKE12E1 6-11
For emergencies
WARNING WARNING
l Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- l Do not start or run the engine while your
face. Otherwise, the jack might slip and vehicle is on the jack.
cause personal injury. Always use the l Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres
jack on a flat, hard surface. Before set- still on the ground could turn and make
ting the jack, make sure there are no your vehicle fall off the jack.
sand or pebbles under the jack base.
7. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
5. Move the jack handle up and down to raise wrench, then take the wheel off.
D- Front jacking point the ram until just before the jack contacts the
jacking point of the vehicle. Ensure that the
jack will properly contact the vehicle jacking CAUTION
point.
l Handle the wheel carefully when chang-
ing the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel
NOTE surface.
l This jack is a 3 stage expansion type.
8. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface
6. Raise the vehicle until the tyre is slightly off
(F), hub bolts (G) or in the installation holes
the ground.
(H) in the wheel, and then mount the spare
wheel.
WARNING
E- Rear jacking point
l Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
6 tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
WARNING l Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
l Set the jack only at the positions shown
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, l Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
it could dent your vehicle or the jack sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
might fall over and cause personal injury. are very dangerous.
l Do not use a jack except the one that
came with your vehicle.
l The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tyre.
l No one should be in your vehicle when us-
ing the jack.
6-12 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts in

WARNING the same way. CAUTION
l Mount the spare wheel with the valve l Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts
stem (I) facing outboard. If you cannot or the nuts, or they will tighten too much.
see the valve stem, you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare NOTE
wheel installed backwards can cause vehi- l Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
cle damage and result in an accident. steel wheel as shown in the illustration, but
return to the original wheel and tyre as soon
as possible.
Vehicles with aluminium wheels

Tighten the wheel nuts (flange nuts) until
their flange section comes in contact with the
wheel and is no longer loose.
9. Finger-tighten the wheel nuts. (Turn them

clockwise.)
l If all four aluminium wheels are changed to
Vehicles with steel wheels
steel wheels, use tapered nuts.
6
Tighten the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) until
the tapered parts of the wheel nuts make 10. Put the notch (J) provided on the jack handle
light contact with the seats of the wheel end on the valve (K) of the jack.
holes and the wheel is not loose.
OBKE12E1 6-13
For emergencies
Using the jack handle, turn the release valve Tightening torque
anticlockwise slowly to lower the vehicle un- 105 to 125 Nm CAUTION
til the tyre touches the ground. (Achieved by applying a force of 390 to l Close the release valve slowly when lower-
460 N at the end of the wheel nut wrench ing the vehicle, or the valve may be dam-
supplied with the vehicle.) aged.
NOTE
l Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up,
the grooved portion of the designated point
will not come off. When this happens, rock
the vehicle to lower the ram.
l If the jack is difficult to remove by hand, in-
sert the jack handle (L) into the bracket (M).
Then using the handle, remove the jack.
WARNING
l Be sure to open the release valve slowly.
If it is opened quickly, the vehicle will CAUTION
drop abruptly and the jack may come out
of position, causing a serious accident. l Never use your foot or a pipe extension
for extra force in the wheel nut wrench.
If you do so, you will tighten the nut too
11. Tighten the nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps un- much.
6 til each nut has been tightened securely.
12. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
13. Press the piston down all the way, and turn
CAUTION the release valve clockwise as far as possible.
14. Check your tyre inflation pressure at the next
l If the release valve is loosened too much gasstation. The correct pressures are shown
(2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise di- on the door label. See the illustration.
rection, the jack’s oil will leak and the
jack cannot be used.
6-14 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
(Achieved by applying a force of 140 to

200 N at the end of the wheel nut wrench sup-
Towing
E00801503552
plied with the vehicle.)
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have
it done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a

tow truck.
l The engine runs but the vehicle does not
move or abnormal noise is produced.
l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals
CAUTION that oil or some other fluid is leaking.
l After changing the tyre and driving the ve- If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow
hicle about 1,000 km (620 miles), retight-
2. Reverse the opening procedure when closing the vehicle. Please contact your authorized
en the wheel nuts to make sure that they
the spare wheel garnish. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or a commercial
have not come loose.
tow truck service for assistance.
l If the steering wheel vibrates when driv-
ing after changing the tyre, we recom- Tightening torque for spare wheel garnish
mounting bolt Only when you cannot receive a towing service
mend you to have the tyres checked for
11 to 25 Nm from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
balance.
(Achieved by applying a force of 40 to 92 N ice Point or commercial tow truck service, tow
l Do not mix one type of tyre with another
your vehicle carefully in accordance with the in-
or use a different size from the one listed. at the end of the wheel nut wrench supplied
with the vehicle.) structions given in “Emergency towing” in this part.
This would cause early wear and poor han-
dling. 6
To store the flat tyre or spare tyre
CAUTION
E00803400192 l The spare wheel should always be se-
1. Attach the wheel to the spare wheel hanger cured during vehicle operation. If a flat
(A) while aligning the holes in the wheel tyre is changed, put the flat tyre in the
with the bolts on the spare wheel hanger. spare wheel mounting position, and use
Using the wheel nut wrench, tighten the the wheel nut wrench to secure it firmly.
spare wheel bolts firmly.
Tightening torque NOTE

37 to 54 Nm l Have your damaged tyre repaired as soon as
possible.
OBKE12E1 6-15
For emergencies
The regulations concerning towing may differ from Towing the vehicle by a tow truck
country to country. It is recommended that you CAUTION
obey the regulations of the area where you are driv-
l If you tow the vehicles with A/T with the
ing your vehicle. CAUTION driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as
illustrated, make sure that the towing
l This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
speed and distance given below are never
truck using sling lift type equipment
exceeded, causing damage to the transmis-
(Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift
sion.
will damage the bumper and front end.
l Be sure to shift the transfer shift lever to
Petrol-powered vehicles
“2H” position and transport the vehicle
Towing speed: 50 km/h (31 mph)
with the driving wheels on a carriage
Towing distance: 50 km (31 miles)
(Type C, D or E) as illustrated. Never try
to tow with the transfer shift lever in
Diesel-powered vehicles
“4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc” positions and
Towing speed: 30 km/h (19 mph)
with the front or rear wheels on the
Towing distance: 80 km (50 miles)
ground (Type B or Type C) as illustrated.
This could result in driving system dam-
For the towing speed and the towing dis-
age or the vehicle may jump at the car-
tance, follow the local driving laws and
riage. If you cannot shift the transfer
regulations.
shift lever to the “2H” position or the
transmission is malfunctioning or dam-
aged, transport the vehicle with all Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type B)
wheels on a carriage (Type D or E) as il- Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
lustrated. tion (M/T) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
l As your vehicle equipped with the Active TRAL) position (A/T).
6 Stability & Traction Control system
(ASTC), if the vehicle is towed with the ig-
Release the parking brake.
nition switch in the “ON” position and on-

ly the front wheels or only the rear CAUTION
wheels raised off the ground, the active
Traction Control System may operate, re- l Never tow an A/T vehicle with the front
wheels up (and the rear wheels on the
sulting in an accident.
ground) (Type B) when the A/T fluid lev-
el is low. This may cause serious and ex-
pensive damage to the transmission.
6-16 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type C) Rear

Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi- CAUTION
tion (M/T) or the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position (A/T). Turn the ignition key to the
l When the engine is not running, the
brake booster and power steering pump
“ACC” position and secure the steering wheel in a do not operate. This means higher brake
straight ahead position with a rope or tie-down depression force and higher steering ef-
strap. Never place the ignition switch in the fort are required. Therefore, vehicle oper-
“LOCK” position when towing. ation is more difficult than usual.
l Do not leave the key in the “LOCK” posi-
Emergency towing tion. The steering wheel will lock, causing
If towing service is not available in an emergency, loss of control.
your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a rope
secured to the towing hook. NOTE
If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle or 3. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
if your vehicle tows another vehicle, pay careful at- l Using a wire rope or metal chain can result position (with M/T) or the selector lever in
in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (with A/T).
tention to the following points: use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire 4. Shift the transfer shift lever to “2H” position.
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any 5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required
If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle point where it touches the vehicle body.
1. The front towing hooks (A) and rear towing by law. (Follow the local driving laws and
hooks (B) are located as shown in the illustra- l Take care that the tow rope is kept as horizon- regulations.)
tal as possible. An angled tow rope can dam- 6. During towing make sure that close contact
tions. Secure the tow rope to the towing hook. age the vehicle body. is maintained between the drivers of both ve-
l Secure the tow rope to the same side towing hicles, and that the vehicles travel at low
Front hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos- speed.
sible.
2. Keep the engine running.

If the engine is not running, turn the ignition
CAUTION 6
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position to un- l Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-
lock the steering wheel. tion and sharp turning; such operation
could cause damage to the towing hooks
or the tow rope.
People in the vicinity could be injured as
a result.
l When towing or being towed down a long
slope, the brakes may overheat reducing
the effectiveness. In this situation, have
your vehicle transported by a tow truck.
OBKE12E1 6-17
For emergencies
CAUTION CAUTION Operation under adverse driving

conditions
l When the vehicle with A/T is to be towed l When you are going to tow another vehi- E00801702326
by another vehicle with all the wheels on cle, move the transfer shift lever to “4H”
the ground, make sure that the towing position. On a flooded road
speed and distance given below are never Selecting “2H” drive may increase the dif-
exceeded, avoiding damage to the trans- ferential oil temperature, resulting in pos-
l Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the
brake discs, resulting in temporarily ineffec-
mission. sible damage to the driving system. tive brakes. In such cases, lightly depress the
Further, the drive train will be subjected brake pedal to see if the brakes operate prop-
Petrol-powered vehicles to excessive loading possibly leading to oil erly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedal
Towing speed: 50 km/h (31 mph) leakage, component seizure, or other seri- several times while driving in order to dry
Towing distance: 50 km (31 miles) ous faults. the brake pads.
Diesel-powered vehicles
l When driving in rain or on a road with many
NOTE puddles a layer of water may form between
Towing speed: 30 km/h (19 mph) the tyres and the road surface.
Towing distance: 80 km (50 miles) l Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance on
vehicle.
the road, resulting in loss of steering stability
For the towing speed and the towing dis- and braking capability.
tance, follow the local driving laws and
regulations. To cope with this, observe the following items:
If your vehicle tows another vehicle (a) Drive your vehicle at slow speed.
Only use the rear towing hook as shown in the illus- (b) Do not drive on worn tyres.
tration. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook.
(c) Always maintain the specified
tyre inflation pressures.
6
On a snow-covered or frozen road
l When driving on a snow-covered or frozen
road, it is recommended that you use snow
tyres or tyre chains. Refer to the “Snow
tyres” and “Tyre chains” sections.
l Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceler-
ation, abrupt brake application and sharp cor-
nering.
6-18 OBKE12E1
For emergencies
l Depressing the brake pedal during travel on

snowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippage
and skidding. When traction between the
tyres and the road is reduced the wheels may
skid and the vehicle cannot readily be
brought to a stop by conventional braking
techniques. Braking will differ, depending
upon whether you have anti-lock brakes
(ABS). As your vehicle is equipped with
ABS, brake by pressing the brake pedal hard,
and keeping it pressed.
l Allow extra distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sud-
den braking.
l Accumulation of ice on the braking system
can cause the wheels to lock. Pull away from
a standstill slowly after confirming safety
around the vehicle.
CAUTION
l Do not press the accelerator pedal rapid-
ly. If the wheels break free of the ice, the
vehicle could suddenly start moving and
possibly cause an accident.
On a bumpy or rutted road

6
Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy
or rutted roads.
CAUTION
l The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can
damage the tyre and/or wheel.
OBKE12E1 6-19
OBKE12E1
Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions...............................................................7-02

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle............................................7-02
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle...........................................7-03
OBKE12E1
Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your NOTE

E00900100825
vehicle l Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protec-
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is tants containing silicons or wax.
E00900200464
necessary to perform regular maintenance using the Such products, when applied to the instru-
After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with wa-
proper procedures. Always maintain your vehicle ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
ter, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-
in compliance with environmental pollution control tions on the windscreen and obscure vision.
ventilated area.
regulations. Carefully select the materials used for Also, if such products get on the switches of
washing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain cor- the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
rosives. If in doubt, we recommend you to consult
a specialist for selection of these materials. CAUTION ure of these accessories.
l Do not use organic substances (solvents, Upholstery

benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or
CAUTION
E00900500063
alkaline or acidic solutions. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle,
These chemicals can cause discolouring, handle the upholstery carefully and keep the
l Cleaning products can be dangerous. Al- staining or cracking of the surface. interior clean.
ways follow the instructions of the clean- If you use cleaners or polishing agents,
ing product supplier. Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the
make sure their ingredients do not in- seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather
l To avoid damage, never use the following clude the substances mentioned above. should be cleaned with an appropriate clean-
to clean your vehicle:
• Petrol er, and cloth fabrics can be cleaned with ei-
• Paint Thinner ther upholstery cleaner or a 3 % solution of
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and neutral detergent in lukewarm water.
• Benzine flocked parts
• Kerosene 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner
E00900300377
• Turpentine and remove any stains with carpet cleaner.
1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dab-
• Naphtha cloth soaked with a 3 % aqueous solution of
• Lacquer Thinner bing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain re-
neutral detergent. mover.
• Carbon Tetrachloride 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well.
• Nail Polish Remover Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thor-
• Acetone oughly. Genuine leather*
E00900600716
7 1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft

cloth soaked with a 5 % aqueous solution of
neutral detergent.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent
thoroughly.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine
leather surface.
7-02 OBKE12E1
Vehicle care
NOTE Cleaning the exterior of your

l If genuine leather is wet with water or is wash- CAUTION
ed in water, wipe off water as quickly as pos- vehicle
sible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mil- E00900700195 l When washing the under side of your ve-
If the following is left on your vehicle, it may hicle or wheel, be careful not to injure
dew may grow. your hands.
cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, wash
l The genuine leather surface may be damaged
the vehicle as soon as possible. l If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers,
if a nylon brush or synthetic fibre is rubbed place the wiper switch lever in the “OFF”
hard against it. l Seawater, road deicing products.
position to deactivate the rain sensor be-
l Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, l Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, fore washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar,
etc.). wipers will operate in the presence of wa-
may discolour the genuine leather surface. ter spray on the windscreen and may get
Be sure to use neutral detergents. l Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects, damaged as a result.
l Remove dirty patches or oil substances quick- tree sap, etc.
ly as they can stain genuine leather. l Refrain from excessively using a car wash
as its brushes may scratch the paint sur-
l The genuine leather surface may harden and Washing face, causing it to lose its gloss.
shrink if it is exposed to direct sun for long E00900901875
Scratches will be especially visible on
hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up
darker coloured vehicles.
in the shade as much as possible. from the road surface can damage the paint coat
and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact. l Never spray or splash water on the electri-
l When the temperature of the vehicle interior cal components in the engine compart-
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to pro-
ment, as this may adversely affect engine
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and tect your vehicle from this damage. This will also
starting.
stick to the seat. be effective in protecting it from environmental el-
Exercise caution also when washing the
ements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc.
underbody; be careful not to spray water
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the
into the engine compartment.
vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to re-
move dust. Next, using an ample amount of clean l Some types of hot water washing equip-
ment apply high pressure and heat to the
water and a car washing brush or sponge, wash the
vehicle. They may cause heat distortion
vehicle from top to bottom.
and damage to the vehicle resin parts and
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse
may result in flooding of the vehicle inte-
thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After
washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and
rior. Therefore;
• Maintain a distance of approx. 50 cm 7
flanges of the doors, bonnet, etc., where dirt is like-
or more between the vehicle body and
ly to remain.
the washing nozzle.
• When washing around the door glass,
hold the nozzle at a distance of more
than 50 cm and at right angles to the
glass surface.
OBKE12E1 7-03
Vehicle care
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all water-

CAUTION drops from the rubber parts around the doors to pre- CAUTION
vent the doors from freezing.
l After washing the vehicle, drive the vehi- l On vehicles with a sunroof, be careful
cle slowly while lightly depressing the when waxing the area around the sunroof
brake pedal several times in order to dry NOTE opening, not to put any wax on the weath-
out the brakes. l To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping erstrip (black rubber). If stained with
Leaving the brakes wet could result in re- on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be trea- wax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a
duced braking performance. Also, there ted with silicone spray. weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
is a possibility that they could freeze up
or become inoperative due to rust, render-
ing the vehicle unable to move.
Waxing Polishing
E00901000560 E00901100024
l When using an automatic car wash, pay Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence The vehicle should only be polished if the paint-
attention to the following items, referring of dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply work has become stained or lost its lustre. Matt-fin-
to the operation manual or consulting a a wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at least ish parts and plastic bumpers must not be polished,
car wash operator. If the following proce- once every three months to assist displacing of water. polishing these parts will stain them or damage
dure is not followed, it could result in dam- Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You their finish.
age to your vehicle. should wax after the surfaces have cooled.
• The outside mirrors are retracted. Damaged paint
• The wiper arm assembly is taped. E00901200155
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
deflector or roof rails, consult a car
CAUTION Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should
be touched up as soon as possible with
wash operator before using the car l Waxes containing high abrasive com- MITSUBISHI touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
wash. pounds should not be used. Such waxes re- Check body areas facing the road or the tyres care-
• If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, move rust and stains effectively from the fully for damage to the paint coat caused by flying
place the wiper switch lever in the paintwork but they are harmful to the lus- stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle
“OFF” position to deactivate the rain tre on the painted surface and the plated can be found on the vehicle information code plate.
sensor. surface. (Refer to “Vehicle information code plate” on page
Further, they are harmful to glossy surfa- 9-02.)
During cold weather ces such as grille, garnish, mouldings, etc.
Cleaning plastic parts
7 Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads in
some areas in winter can have a harmful effect on
l Do not use petrol or paint thinners to re-
move road tar or other contamination to
Use a sponge or chamois leather.
E00901300619
the vehicle surface.

the vehicle body. You should therefore wash the ve- If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough sur-
hicle as often as possible in accordance with our l Do not apply wax on the areas having
face of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface
black mat coating as it can cause uneven
care-instructions. It is recommended to have a pres- becomes white. In such a case, wipe it off using
discolouration, patches, blurs, etc. If
ervative applied and the underfloor protection lukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather.
stained with wax, immediately wipe off
checked before and after the cold weather season.
with a piece of soft cloth and warm water.
7-04 OBKE12E1
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
CAUTION CAUTION E00901700059
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease,
l Do not use a scrubbing brush or other l Do not use a brush or other hard imple- dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace
hard tools as they may damage the plastic ment on the wheels.
the wiper blades when they no longer wipe proper-
part surface. Doing so could scratch the wheels.
ly. (Refer to page 8-17.)
l Do not use wax containing compound (pol- l Do not use any cleaner that contains an
ishing powder) which may damage the abrasive substance or is acidic or alka- Cleaning the sunroof*
plastic part surface. line. Doing so could cause the coating on E00901800180
l Do not bring the plastic parts into contact the wheels to peel or become discoloured Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth.
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine or stained. Hard deposits should be wiped away with a cloth
oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphu- l Do not directly apply hot water using a dipped in warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipe
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may steam cleaner or by any other means. away the solution with a sponge dipped in fresh wa-
crack, stain or discolour the plastic parts. l Contact with seawater and road deicer ter.
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them can cause corrosion. Rinse off such sub-
off with soft cloth, chamois or the like stances as soon as possible. NOTE
and an aqueous solution of neutral deter-
gent then immediately rinse the affected l The surface treatment on the inside of the
Window glass glass may be removed if hard cloth or organ-
parts with water.
E00901600032 ic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner, etc.) is
The window glass can normally be cleaned using used.
Chrome parts only a sponge and water.
E00901400115 Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, Engine compartment
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe dry E00902100311
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use the same Clean the engine compartment at the beginning and
special protective coating. This should be done cloth to wipe the window glass as would be used to end of winter. Pay particular attention to flanges,
more frequently in winter. wipe the paintwork; wax from the painted surfaces crevices and peripheral parts where dust containing
could adhere to the glass and reduce its transparen- road chemicals and other corrosive materials might
Aluminium wheels* cy and visibility. collect.
E00901500321
1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in
NOTE your area, clean the engine compartment at least ev-
water on the wheel.
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot l To clean the inside of the backdoor window, ery three months. 7
be removed easily with water. always use a soft cloth and wipe the window Never spray or splash water on the electrical com-
Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing glass along the demister heater element so as ponents in the engine compartment, as this may
the wheel. not to cause damage. cause damage.
3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a chamois Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and
leather or a soft cloth. so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery elec-
trolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.
OBKE12E1 7-05
Vehicle care
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, cha-

mois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral
detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts
with plenty of water.
7-06 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Service precautions.......................................................................8-02
Catalytic converter........................................................................8-02
Bonnet...........................................................................................8-03
Engine oil......................................................................................8-04
Engine coolant..............................................................................8-06
Washer fluid.................................................................................8-07
Brake fluid....................................................................................8-08
Clutch fluid*.................................................................................8-09
Power steering fluid......................................................................8-10
Battery..........................................................................................8-10
Tyres.............................................................................................8-12
Parking brake break-in..................................................................8-16
Wiper blade rubber replacement...................................................8-17
General maintenance....................................................................8-18
For cold and snowy weather.........................................................8-19
Fusible links..................................................................................8-19
Fuses.............................................................................................8-19
Replacement of lamp bulbs..........................................................8-23
OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Service precautions WARNING Catalytic converter

E01000100764 E01000201355
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals For ordinary use, there are no particular precau-
serves to preserve the value and appearance as long
l Do not get under your vehicle with just
tions except that of using unleaded petrol.
the body jack supporting it. Always use
as possible. automotive jack stands. The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with the
Maintenance items as described in this owner’s man- catalytic converter are extremely efficient for the re-
ual can be performed by the owner.
l Improper handling of components and
duction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter is
materials used in the vehicle can endan-
We recommend you to have the periodic inspection ger your personal safety. We recommend installed in the exhaust system.
and maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHI you to consult a specialist for necessary in- It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another spe- formation. ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possi-
cialist. In the event a malfunction or other problem ble catalyst damage.
is discovered, we recommend you to have it
checked and repaired. This section contains infor-
mation on inspection maintenance procedures that WARNING
you can do yourself.
Follow the instructions and cautions for each of the l As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-
various procedures. ate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as dry grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust
WARNING l
since a fire could occur.
Paint should not be applied to the catalyt-
l When checking or servicing the inside of ic converter.
the engine compartment, make sure the
engine is switched off and has had a
chance to cool down. NOTE
l If it is necessary to do work in the engine l In case of the petrol-powered vehicles, use
compartment with the engine running, be UNLEADED PETROL ONLY of the type
especially careful that your clothing, hair, recommended in “Fuel selection” on page 02.
etc., does not become caught by the fans,
drive belts, or other moving parts.
l Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open
flames around fuel or battery. The fumes
are flammable.
l Be extremely cautious when working
8 around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulphuric acid.
8-02 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Bonnet CAUTION
E01000302630
l Note that the support bar may disengage

To open the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by
1. Pull the release lever towards you to unlock a strong wind.
the bonnet. l After inserting the support bar into the
slot, make sure the bar supports the bon-
LHD net securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
To close
1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder.
NOTE
l Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
the parked position. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or
windscreen.
3. Support the bonnet by inserting the support

RHD bar in its slot.
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about

20 cm above the closed position, then let it
drop.
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked by
softly lifting the centre of the bonnet.
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety

lock.
NOTE
l If this does not close the bonnet, release it
8
from a slightly higher position.
l Do not press down the bonnet hard with a
hand as it may damage the bonnet.
OBKE12E1 8-03
Maintenance
CAUTION Engine oil 3800 models

E01000402787
l Be careful that hands or fingers are not

trapped when closing the bonnet. To check and refill engine oil
A- Minimum level
B- Maximum level
C- Oil replacement indication mark
3000 models
The engine oil used has a significant effect on the

engine’s performance, service life and startability.
Be sure to use oil of the recommended quality and
appropriate viscosity.
All engines consume a certain amount of oil during
normal operation. Therefore, it is important to
check the oil level at regular intervals or before start-
ing a long trip.
1. Park the car on a horizontal surface.
3200 models 2. Switch off the engine.
3. Wait a few minutes.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
cloth.
5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.
6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil level,
which should always be within the range in-
dicated.
7. If the oil level is below the specified limit, re-
move the cap located on the cylinder head
cover and add enough oil to raise the level to
within the specified range. Do not overfill to
8 avoid engine damage. Be sure to use the speci-
fied engine oil and do not mix various types
of oil.
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely.
9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4 to 6.
8-04 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Use only the recommended oils with an ACEA or Selection of engine oil NOTE
API classification as specified in this manual. l Use of additives is not recommended since
Petrol-powered vehicles they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
NOTE tives already included in the engine oil. It
may result in failure of the mechanical assem-
l For 3200 models, check or refill the oil ac-
bly.
cording to the following manner.
• When the oil level is checked in step 6
above, check it on a low side of the dip- Diesel-powered vehicles
stick because it is different in appearance Vehicles without diesel particulate filter (DPF)
of oil level in the two sides of the dipstick.
• On vehicles without diesel particulate fil-
ter (DPF), the oil level should be within
the range (A) to (B) on the dipstick.
• On vehicles with DPF, the oil level
should be within the range (A) to (C) (oil
replacement indication mark) on the dip-
stick.
If the oil level is beyond the oil replace- l Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity
ment indication mark (C), replace the oil number according to the atmospheric temper-
as soon as possible. ature.
Then, the oil should be refilled to the max- SAE 0W-30, 5W-30, and 5W-40 engine oils
imum level (B). can only be used if they meet ACEA A3/B3,
• On vehicles with DPF, the engine oil will A3/B4 or A5/B5 and API SM (or higher) spec-
increase due to a little fuel getting mixed ifications. l Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity
in the engine oil when the DPF regener- l Use engine oil conforming to the following number according to the atmospheric temper-
ates to burn away the PM (particulate mat- classification: ature.
ter). However, it does not indicate a mal- • API classification: “For service SM” or l Use engine oil conforming to the following
function. higher classification:
l The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the • ILSAC certificated oil • ACEA classification:
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, re- • ACEA classification: “For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4,
quiring earlier oil replacement. Please refer “For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5, C1, C2, C3 or C4”
to the maintenance schedule. A5/B5” • API classification:
l For handling of used engine oils, refer to “For service CD” or higher
page 06. • JASO classification:
“For service DL-1”
8
If those classifications are not available, con-
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
OBKE12E1 8-05
Maintenance
NOTE NOTE Engine coolant

l Use of additives is not recommended since l Use of additives is not recommended since E01000501273
they may reduce the effectiveness of addi- they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
tives already included in the engine oil. It tives already included in the engine oil. It To check the coolant level
may result in failure of the mechanical assem- may result in failure of the mechanical assem- A translucent coolant reserve tank is located in the
bly. bly. engine compartment.
The coolant level in this tank should be kept be-
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter (DPF) tween the “LOW” and “FULL” marks when meas-
ured while the engine is cold.
l Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity To add coolant

number according to the atmospheric temper-
ature. The cooling system is a closed system and normal-
ly the loss of coolant should be very slight. A no-
l Use engine oil conforming to the following
ticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leak-
classification:
• ACEA classification: age. If this occurs, we recommend you to have the
“For service C1, C2, C3 or C4” system checked as soon as possible.
• JASO classification: If the level should drop below the “LOW” level on
“For service DL-1” the reserve tank, open the lid and add coolant.
If those classifications are not available, con- Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, re-
tact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized move the radiator cap and add coolant until the lev-
8 Service Point. el reaches the filler neck.
8-06 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
WARNING CAUTION Washer fluid

E01000700656
l Do not open the radiator cap while the en- l Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-
gine is hot. freeze or any engine coolants mixed with Windscreen washer fluid
The coolant system is under pressure and alcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The use The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is in the en-
any hot coolant escaping could cause se- of an improper anti-freeze can cause cor- gine compartment.
vere burns. rosion of the aluminium components. Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals
l For effective anti-corrosion and anti- and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary.
Anti-freeze freeze performance, keep the anti-freeze
The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti- concentration within the range of 30 to
corrosion agent. The cylinder head and water pump 60 %.
housing are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic Concentrations exceeding 60 % will re-
changing of the engine coolant is necessary to pre- sult in a reduction of both the anti-freeze
vent corrosion of these parts. and cooling performance thus adversely
affecting the engine.
Use “DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOL- l Do not top up with water only.
ANT” or equivalent.
MITSUBISHI Genuine Coolant has excellent pro- During cold weather
tection against corrosion and rust formation of all The concentration should be checked before the
metals including aluminium and can avoid block- start of cold weather and anti-freeze added to the
ages in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine system if necessary to prevent damage to engine
block, etc. and radiator due to freezing. NOTE
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion l The washer fluid container serves the wind-
agent, the coolant must not be replaced with plain screen and headlamps (if so equipped).
water even in summer. The required concentration
of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected am-
bient temperature.
Ambient
temperature
-15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -50
(mini-
mum) °C
Anti-freeze 8
concentra- 30 35 40 45 50 60
tion %
OBKE12E1 8-07
Maintenance
Rear window washer fluid

E01006500063
During cold weather
E01006600019
Brake fluid
E01000900847
1. Remove the rear window washer fluid reser- To ensure proper operation of the washers at low
voir filler port lid (A) on the backdoor. temperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freez- To check the fluid level
ing agent. The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. When
the brake fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,
the brake fluid warning lamp lights up.
The brake fluid level must be between the “MAX”

and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
LHD
2. Pull out the rear window washer fluid reser-

voir filler port (B) and check the washer flu-
id level.
If the level is low, replenish the container
with washer fluid.
RHD
8
If the level is below the “MIN” mark, check accord-
ing to the following procedure:
8-08 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or

“ACC” position. CAUTION Clutch fluid*
E01001000193
2. Repeatedly depress the brake pedal until sig-
nificant resistance is felt (normally after l Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to pre-
vent the brake fluid from deteriorating ex- To check the fluid level
about 40 times). cept maintenance. The clutch fluid in the master cylinder should be
3. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. checked when performing other underhood service.
The brake fluid level must be between the l Clean the filler cap before removing and
close the cap securely after maintenance. In addition, the system should be checked for leak-
“MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. age at the same time.
Check to ensure that the clutch fluid level is always
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake between the “MAX” and “MIN” level markings on
pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality. the fluid reservoir.
If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short
length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake sys- LHD
tem.
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehi-
cle checked.
Fluid type
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
from a sealed container. The brake fluid is hygro-
scopic. Too much moisture in the brake fluid will
adversely affect the brake system, reducing the
brake performance.
CAUTION RHD
l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is

harmful to the eyes, may irritate your
skin and also damage painted surfaces.
l Use only the specified brake fluid.
Do not mix or add different brands of
brake fluid to prevent chemical reactions.
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid
touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid.
8
This will damage the seals.
OBKE12E1 8-09
Maintenance
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short length of

time, it indicates leaks from the clutch system.
Power steering fluid Battery
E01001100484 E01001201772
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehi- The condition of the battery is very important for
cle checked. To check the fluid level quick starting of the engine and proper functioning
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the en- of the vehicle’s electrical system. Regular inspec-
Fluid type gine is idling. tion and care are especially important in cold weath-
Brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should Check to make certain that the power steering fluid er.
be used. level is always between the “MAX” and “MIN” lev-
The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid el markings on the fluid reservoir and top up the flu- NOTE
contamination from foreign matter or moisture. id, if necessary.
DO NOT ALLOW PETROLEUM-BASED FLUID l On vehicles equipped with 2 batteries, when
the batteries are replaced, the 2 batteries
TO CONTACT, MIX WITH, OR OTHERWISE should be replaced at the same time.
CONTAMINATE THE BRAKE FLUID. SEAL If only a battery is replaced, it will cause short-
DAMAGE WILL RESULT. ening of the batteries life.
Checking battery electrolyte level

WARNING
l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your
skin and also damage painted surfaces.
Wipe up any spills immediately.
Fluid type
Use “Genuine MITSUBISHI Power Steering Flu-
id” or “ATF DEXRON III/DEXRON II”.
The electrolyte level must be between the specified

limit on the outside of the battery. Replenish with
distilled water as necessary.
8 The inside of the battery is divided into several com-
partments; remove the cap from each compartment
and fill to the upper mark. Do not top up beyond
the upper mark because spillage during driving
could cause damage.
8-10 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Check the electrolyte level at least once every

4 weeks, depending on the operating conditions. WARNING CAUTION
If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itself
with time. l The battery electrolyte is extremely caus- l Do not bring nearby parts, plastic parts
tic. Do not allow it to come in contact and so on into contact with sulphuric acid
Check it once every 4 weeks and charge with low with your eyes, skin, clothing, or the pain- (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
current as necessary. ted surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electro- stain or discolour them.
lyte should be flushed immediately with If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
During cold weather ample amounts of water. cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous
The capacity of the battery is reduced at low tem- Irritation to eyes or skin from contact solution of neutral detergent then imme-
peratures. This is an inevitable result of its chemi- with electrolyte requires immediate medi- diately rinse the affected parts with plen-
cal and physical properties. cal attention. ty of water.
This is why a very cold battery, particularly one l Ventilate when charging or using the bat-
that is not fully charged, will only deliver a fraction tery in an enclosed space.
of the starter current which is normally available. NOTE
We recommend you to have the battery checked be- l Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is
fore the start of cold weather and, if necessary, connected, apply terminal protection grease.
have it charged or replaced. CAUTION To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a bat- l Keep it out of reach of children. l Check to see if the battery is securely instal-
tery which is kept fully charged also has a longer life. led and cannot be moved during travel. Also
l Never disconnect the battery with the ig- check each terminal for tightness.
nition switch in the “ON” position; doing
Disconnection and connection so could damage the vehicle’s electrical l When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine, components. long period of time, remove the battery and
first disconnect the negative (–) terminal and then store it in a place where the battery fluid will
l Never short-circuit the battery; doing so
not freeze. The battery should be stored only
the positive (+) terminal. could cause it to overheat and be damaged.
When connecting the battery, first connect the posi- in a fully charged condition.
l If the battery is to be quick-charged, first
tive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal. disconnect the battery cables.
l In order to prevent a short circuit, be
sure to disconnect the negative (-) termi-
WARNING nal first.
l Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away l Always wear protective eye goggles when
from the battery because the battery working near the battery.
could explode.
8
OBKE12E1 8-11
Maintenance
Tyres
E01001300239
WARNING
l Driving with tyres that are worn, dam-
aged or improperly inflated can lead to a
loss of control or blow out of the tyres
which can result in a collision with seri-
ous or fatal injury.
8-12 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Tyre inflation pressures

E01001402609
Except for vehicles for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
Up to 5 passengers Up to max. load At trailer towing

Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
265/65R17 112H 2.2 bar (220 kPa) 2.4 bar (240 kPa) 2.4 bar (240 kPa) 2.8 bar (280 kPa) 2.6 bar (260 kPa) 3.0 bar (300 kPa)
265/65R17 112S 2.4 bar (240 kPa) 2.6 bar (260 kPa) 2.6 bar (260 kPa) 3.0 bar (300 kPa) 2.6 bar (260 kPa) 3.0 bar (300 kPa)
2.6 bar (260 kPa) 3.0 bar (300 kPa)
265/60R18 110H 2.2 bar (220 kPa) 2.4 bar (240 kPa) 2.4 bar (240 kPa) 2.8 bar (280 kPa)
3.2 bar (320 kPa) * 3.5 bar (350 kPa) *
*: 5-door models
Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
Up to 5 passengers Up to max. load At trailer towing

Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
2.0 bar (200 kPa) * 2.2 bar (220 kPa) *
2.2 bar (220 kPa) 2.4 bar (240 kPa)
2.0 bar (200 kPa) * 2.2 bar (220 kPa) *
2.2 bar (220 kPa) 2.4 bar (240 kPa)
*: Vehicles for 3000 models
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
OBKE12E1 8-13
Maintenance
Wheel condition There is a possibility that the balance weight is in-

E01001800478 CAUTION terfered the related brake part if it is put any place
other than the specified position.
l Always use tyres of the same size, same
For details, we recommend you to consult a
type, and same brand, and which have no
wear differences. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Using tyres of different size, type, brands
or degree of wear, will increase the differ-
ential oil temperature, resulting in possi-
ble damage to the driving system. Fur-
ther, the drive train will be subjected to
excessive loading, possibly leading to oil
ous faults.
1- Location of the tread wear indicator

2- Tread wear indicator
Replacing tyres and wheels
E01007200429
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage.

Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks. CAUTION Tyre rotation
Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles. E01001901203
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous be- l Avoid using different size tyres from the Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road sur-
cause of the greater chance of skidding or hydro- one listed and the combined use of differ- face conditions and individual driver’s driving hab-
planing. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed ent types of tyres, as this can affect driv- its. To equalize the wear and help extend tyre life,
1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimum ing safety. Refer to “Tyres and wheels” it is recommended to rotate the tyres immediately
requirement for use. on page 9-12. after discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever the
Tread wear indicators will appear on the surface of l Even if a wheel has the same rim size and wear difference between the front and rear tyres is
the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby indicating that offset as the specified type of wheel, its recognizable.
the tyre no longer meets the minimum requirement shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
for use. When these wear indicators appear, the rectly. We recommend you to consult a
tyres must be replaced with new ones. specialist before using wheels that you
When replacement of any of the tyres is necessary, have.
replace all of them.
Wheel balance
8 On vehicles equipped with 17x7 1/2J size alumini-
um wheels (round rim type), if you need to balance
a wheel, put the balance weight (A) on the speci-
fied position which is spoke side from the notch
(B) on the inner surface of the wheel.
8-14 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and Snow tyres
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor- CAUTION E01002000523
rect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving
of balance wheel, or severe braking. We recom- l If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating
on snow and ice. To preserve driving stability,
the correct direction of rotation, swap the
mend you to have it checked to determine the mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pat-
front and rear wheels on the left hand
cause of irregular tread wear. tern on all 4 wheels.
side of the vehicle and the front and rear
Snow tyres worn more than 50% are no longer suit-
wheels on the right hand side of the vehi-
able for use as snow tyres.
Spare tyre used* cle separately. Keep each tyre on its origi-
Snow tyres which do not meet specifications must
nal side of the vehicle. When fitting the
not be used.
tyres, make sure the arrows point in the
direction in which the wheels will turn
when the vehicle moves forward. Any
Front
tyre whose arrow points in the wrong di- CAUTION
rection will not perform to its full poten- l Observe permissible maximum speed for
tial. your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.
Spare tyre not used
NOTE
Front
Front l The laws and regulations concerning snow
tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)
vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu-
lations in the area you intend to drive.
l If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are
used.
Tyre chains
Front E01002101794
On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power is dis-
tributed preferentially to the rear wheels, ensure
CAUTION that the tyre chains are fitted on the rear in accord-
ance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
l Avoid the combined use of different types Use only tyre chains which are designed for use
*- If the spare tyre wheel differs from the stand-
ard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre rotation us-
of tyres.
Using different types of tyres can affect ve-
with the tyres mounted on the vehicle: use of the in-
correct size or type of chain could result in damage
8
ing a spare wheel. hicle performance and safety. to the vehicle body.
Before fitting tyre chains, we recommend you to
consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point. The max. chain height is as follows.
OBKE12E1 8-15
Maintenance
Max. chain
CAUTION Parking brake break-in
Tyre size Wheel size height E01008300010
[mm] Break-in the parking brake linings whenever the
l Drive carefully and do not exceed
brake performance of the parking brake is insuffi-
265/65R17 50 km/h (30 mph). Remember, fitting
chains is not going to stop accidents from cient or whenever the parking brake linings and/or
112H discs are replaced, in order to assure the best brake
17 x 7 1/2 J happening.
265/65R17 performance.
112S 22 l When tyre chains are installed, take care
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
that they do not damage the disc wheel or
265/60R18 body. manual and can be carried out by a MITSUBISHI
18 x 7 1/2 J MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
110H l An aluminium wheel can be damaged by
The speed limit for tyre chain is 50 km/h (30 mph) a tyre chain while driving. When fitting a
and remove the tyre chains as soon as possible on tyre chain on an aluminium wheel, take
snow free roads. care that any part of the chain and fitting
cannot be brought into contact with the
wheel.
CAUTION l When installing or removing the tyre
chains, take care that hands and other
l As your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock parts of your body are not injured by the
brake system (ABS), in order to ensure sharp edges of the vehicle body.
that the anti-lock brake system (ABS)
will operate correctly in situations where
tyre chains have been fitted, drive in NOTE
“4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc”. l The laws and regulations concerning the use
of tyre chains vary. Always follow local laws
l Practice fitting the chains before you
and regulations.
need them.
Don’t expect help from other people in In most countries, it is prohibited by law to
the cold. use tyre chains on roads without snow.
l Choose a clear straight stretch of road
where you can pull over and still be seen
while you are fitting the chains.
l Do not fit chains before you need them.
This will wear out your tyres and the
road surface.
8 l After driving around 100-300 metres,
stop and retighten the chains.
8-16 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Wiper blade rubber replacement Refer to the illustration to ensure that the re-
tainers are correctly aligned as you attach
5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) en-
gages securely with the stopper (A).
E01008200208
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen. them.
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) dis-
engages from the hook (B). Then, pull the
wiper blade further to remove it.
Rear window wiper blade

1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass.
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disengage
it from the stopper (A) at the end of the wip-
NOTE er arm. Pull the wiper blade further to re-
l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the move it.
windscreen; it could damage the glass. 4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting 3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook
with the opposite end of the blade from the (B) on the wiper arm.
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade. stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted cor-
rectly in the grooves in the blade.
NOTE
l If retainers are not supplied with the new wip-
er blade, use the retainers from the old blade.
OBKE12E1 8-17
Maintenance
NOTE General maintenance Hinges and latches lubrication

l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the E01002700360 Check all latches and hinges, and, if necessary,
window glass; it could damage the glass. have them lubricated.
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the groove gas leakage
(D) in the wiper blade. Look under the body of your vehicle to check for
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the refuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks.
tainers are correctly aligned as you insert
them into the groove.
WARNING
l If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; we
recommend you to call for assistance.
Exterior and interior lamp operation

Operate the combination lamp switch to check that
all lamps are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause
is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the
fuses first. If there is no blown fuses, check the
lamp bulbs.
For information regarding the inspection and re-
placement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs, refer to
“Fuses” on page 8-19 and “Replacement of lamp
bulbs” on page 8-23.
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommend
you to have your vehicle checked and repaired.
NOTE
l If a retainer is not supplied with the new wip- Meter, gauge and indicator/warning
er blade, use the retainer from the old blade.
lamps operation
Run the engine to check the operation of all meters,
8 gauges, and indicator/warning lamps.
If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to
have your vehicle inspected.
8-18 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
For cold and snowy weather Fusible links Fuses

E01002800299 E01002900434 E01003000849
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a Fuse block location
Ventilation slots large current attempts to flow through certain elec- E01007600250
The ventilation slots in front of the windscreen trical systems. To prevent damage to the electrical system due to
should be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear after In case of a melted fusible link, we recommend shortcircuiting or overloading, each individual cir-
heavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heating you to have your vehicle inspected. cuit is provided with a fuse.
and ventilation systems will not be impaired. For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse load ca- There are fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
pacity” on page 8-20. ment and in the engine compartment.
Weatherstripping
Passenger compartment
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with sili- WARNING The fuse block in the passenger compartment is lo-
cated in front of the driver’s seat at the position
cone grease.
l Fusible links must not be replaced by any shown in the illustration.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-
Additional equipment ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-han- property destruction and serious or fatal
dled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that injuries at any time.
you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A
small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehi-
cle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen and
rear window are also useful.
OBKE12E1 8-19
Maintenance
Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse location No. Symbol Electrical sys- Capacity
In the engine compartment, the fuse blocks are lo- tem
cated as shown in the illustration.
8 Engine control 7.5 A
Type B 9 Cigarette lighter 15 A

10 — — —
Outside rear-
11 7.5 A
Type A view mirrors
12 Engine control 7.5 A
13 — — —
Rear window
14 15 A
wiper
Central door
15 15 A
locks
16 Rear fog lamp 10 A
17 — — —
Fuse load capacity 18 — — —
E01007700105
19 Heater 30 A
The fuse capacity and the name of the electrical sys- No. Symbol Electrical sys- Capacity
tems protected by the fuses are indicated on the in- tem Rear window
side of the lid located at the driver’s leg area and 20 30 A
Ignition coil demister
on the inside of the fuse block cover for fuses loca- 1 10 A
ted in the engine compartment. 21 Sunroof 20 A
2 Gauge 7.5 A
Passenger compartment fuse location table Anti-lock brake
E01007900703 3 Reversing lamp 7.5 A 22 10 A
system
4 — — 7.5 A 23 Heated seat 20 A
NOTE
8 l Spare fuses are contained in the fuse block 5 Relay 7.5 A 24 Approach lamps 10 A
lid. Always use a fuse of the same capacity
for replacement. 6 Heated door Transfer control
7.5 A 25 10 A
mirror
7 — — 30 A 26 ENG/POWER 10 A
8-20 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
No. Symbol Electrical sys- Capacity Engine compartment fuse location table Electrical sys-
E01008000639 No. Symbol Capacity
tem tem
27 Starter motor 10 A Engine compartment fuse location (Type A) 7 Rear heater 25 A
28 — — — Accessory sock-
8 25 A
et
29 — Spare fuse 20 A
9 Fuel line heater 25 A
31 — Spare fuse 30 A Condenser fan
10 25 A
motor
Rear air condi-
l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve- 11 20 A
tioning
hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-
ifications. Horn (Theft-
l The table above shows the main equipment 12 alarm system) 15 A
corresponding to each fuse.
Wiper de-icer
The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A
and 15 A fuses. If a fuse of one of these ca- 13 Horn 10 A
pacities blows, replace it temporarily by bor-
rowing the one that matches from: Automatic
14 20 A
7.5 A: Outside rear-view mirrors Electrical sys- transmission
15 A: Cigarette lighter No. Symbol Capacity
tem Hazard warning
Replace the borrowed fuse as soon as possible. 15 10 A
1 Alternator 140 A*1 flasher
16 Stop lamps 15 A
2 Fuse (+B) 60 A*1
17 Radio 10 A
3 Ignition switch 40 A*1
Electric win- 18 Room lamp 15 A
4 30 A*1
dow control Air condition-
19 10 A
5 Engine control 20 A*1 ing
6 Fuel pump 20 A
20 Front fog lamps 15 A 8
*1: Fusible link
*1: Fusible link *2: Vehicles without discharge headlamps
*2: Vehicles without discharge headlamps *3: Vehicles with discharge headlamps
*3: Vehicles with discharge headlamps
OBKE12E1 8-21
Maintenance
Electrical sys- l The table above shows the main equipment Capacity Colour
No. Symbol Capacity corresponding to each fuse.
tem
10 A Red
21 — — —
Engine compartment fuse location (Type B) 15 A Blue
Windscreen
22 20 A 20 A Yellow (fuse type)/Light blue (fusible
wiper
link type)
23 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A 25 A Transparent
24 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A Green (fuse type)/
30 A
Pink (fusible link type)
Headlamp low 10 A*2
25 40 A Green
beam (right) 20 A*3
50 A Red
Headlamp low 10 A*2
26 60 A Yellow
beam (left) 20 A*3 80 A Black
No. Symbol Electrical sys- Capacity
Headlamp high- tem 140 A Reddish brown
27 10 A
beam (right)
31 Anti-lock brake 60 A* Fuse replacement
Headlamp high- system
28 10 A E01007800702
beam (left) 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the
32 Brake system 40 A* electrical circuit concerned and place the ig-
29 Audio 30 A*1
nition switch in the “LOCK” position.
30 33 Glow relay 80 A* 2. Pull the fuse block lid (A) to remove it.
Heater 50 A*1
3. Remove the fuse puller (B) from the fuse
*1: Fusible link *: Fusible link block lid.
*2: Vehicles without discharge headlamps
*3: Vehicles with discharge headlamps l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-
hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-
l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve- ifications.
hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec- l The table above shows the main equipment
ifications. corresponding to each fuse.
8 Identification of fuse
E01008100164
Capacity Colour
7.5 A Brown
8-22 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
4. The replacement of fuses located in the driv- NOTE Replacement of lamp bulbs
er’s seat leg area should be performed from l If any system does not function but the fuse E01003100521
the hole of the fuse block lid. corresponding to that system is normal, there Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your
recommend you to have your vehicle checked. bare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evap-
orate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour will
6. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by us- condense on the reflector and dim the surface.
ing the fuse puller into the same place at the
fuse block.
CAUTION
l Bulbs are extremely hot immediately af-
ter being turned off.
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burnt.
5. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,

check the fuse pertaining to the problem. NOTE
l Do not attempt to repair or replace the lamp
bulbs other than described in this owner’s
manual. For repair or replacement, contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
CAUTION l If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, we recommend you to con-
l If the newly inserted fuse blows again af- sult a specialist.
ter a short time, we recommend you to l Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
have the electrical system checked to find when removing a lamp or lens.
the cause and rectify it. l When it rains or when the vehicle has been
l Never use a fuse with a capacity larger washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-
than that specified or any substitute, such comes foggy. This is the same phenomenon
C- Fuse is OK as wire, foil, etc.; doing so will cause the as when window glass mists up on a humid
D- Blown fuse circuit wiring to heat up and could cause day, and does not indicate a functional prob-
a fire. lem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat 8
will remove the fog. However, if water gath-
ers inside the lamp, we recommend you to
have it checked.
OBKE12E1 8-23
Maintenance
Bulb capacity 12- Stop and tail lamps*: 21/5 W (W21/5W)

E01003200014 CAUTION Stop lamps*: 21/5 W (W21/5W)
When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the 13- Reversing lamps: 21 W (W21W)
same wattage and colour. l On vehicles with discharge headlamps, do Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
not attempt to disassemble or repair dis-
Outside charge headlamps, and do not attempt to
E01003302631 replace their bulbs. A high voltage is NOTE
present in the power circuit and in the l On vehicles with LED type high-mounted
bulbs and bulb terminals. To avoid the stop lamp, do not attempt to repair or replace
Front
risk of an electric shock, contact a it.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized For repair and replacement, contact a
Service Point whenever repair or replace- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
ment is necessary. Point.
Inside
Rear E01003401244
1- Headlamps, high-beam: 65 W (H9)

2- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11)
3- Headlamps, low beam with discharge lamp:
35 W (D2S)
Headlamps, low beam without discharge 3-door models 5-door models
lamp: 55 W (H11)
4- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)
5- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (WY21W)
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types. 1- Luggage compartment lamp: 8 W
2- Door courtesy lamps: 3.4 W
3- Vanity mirror lamps*: 3 W
4- Room & map lamps: 8 W
6- High-mounted stop lamp (bulb type)*: 16 W 5- Rear personal lamps: 8 W
8 (W16W)
7- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
6- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W
8- Rear fog lamp: 21 W (W21W)

9- Tail lamps*: 5 W (W5W)
10- Rear turn-signal lamps*: 21 W (WY21W)
11- Rear turn-signal lamps*: 21 W (WY21W)
8-24 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Headlamps Replacement of low beam (except for vehicles

E01003501199 with discharge headlamps) CAUTION
1. Remove the bulb and connector assembly
Replacement of high-beam (A) by turning it anticlockwise.
l Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care.
The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is high-
1. Remove the bulb and connector assembly
ly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or
(A) by turning it anticlockwise.
scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause
it to shatter.
l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the head-
lamps are operated. If the glass surface is
dirty, it must be cleaned with alcohol,
paint thinner, etc., and refit it after dry-
ing it thoroughly.
2. Depress the tab (B) on the harness connector

and pull the harness connector (C) to remove
2. Depress the tab (B) on the harness connector it.
and pull the harness connector (C) to remove
it.
Position lamps
E01003700471
1. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to re-
move it.
8
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
steps in reverse.
OBKE12E1 8-25
Maintenance
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. Remove the entire socket and bulb assembly
out. steps in reverse. (G) by turning it anticlockwise.
Front fog lamps*

E01004001553
1. Remove the 5 clips (A, C) and screw (B) by
following procedures then turn up the cover
(D).

steps in reverse. CAUTION
l Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care.
Front turn-signal lamps The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is high-
E01003800733 ly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or
1. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to re- scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause
move it. 2. Depress the tab (E) on the harness connector it to shatter.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling (F) and pull the harness connector to remove
out. it.
l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the fog lamps
are operated. If the glass surface is dirty,
it must be cleaned with alcohol, paint thin-
ner, etc., and refit it after drying thorough-
ly.
8-26 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Left side 3. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies by

turning them anticlockwise. Remove the
bulb by pulling it out.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal Right side

steps in reverse.
NOTE A- Rear turn-signal lamp*

B- Stop and tail lamp*
l When refitting the clips (H and I) of the cov- Stop lamp*
er, push the pin (J).
C- Reversing lamp

steps in reverse.
On bumper*
1. Remove the lens mounting screws.
Rear combination lamps

E01004200659
8
On corner side
1. Remove the screws that hold the lamp unit.
2. Slide the lamp unit out sideways to remove it.
OBKE12E1 8-27
Maintenance
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth- 2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly (B) by 2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth-
er by turning it anticlockwise, and then returning it anticlockwise, and then remove the er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re-
move the bulb by pulling it out. bulb by pulling it out. move the bulb by pulling it out.
D- Rear turn-signal lamp

E- Tail lamp 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
steps in reverse.
High-mounted stop lamp (bulb type)* Licence plate lamps
E01004500535 E01004600709
Rear fog lamp 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver 1. Remove the lens mounting screws and re-
E01004100371 with a cloth over at the edge of the cover and move the socket and bulb assembly.
1. Open the spare wheel garnish (A). (Refer to pry gently to remove the cover.
“To remove the spare wheel” on page 6-10).
8-28 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly (A) to- NOTE 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
gether by turning it anticlockwise and then re- l When installing the lens, make sure the direc- steps in reverse.
move the bulb by pulling it out. tion of the lens is installed as shown in the il-
lustration. NOTE
l When installing the lens, align the tab on the
lens with the hole on the vehicle side.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal *: Right side of the vehicle
steps in reverse.
Room & map lamps
E01004700524
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver Rear personal lamps
E01005200252
with a cloth over its tip into the lens and pry When replacing a bulb, keep the interior lamp
gently to remove it.
switch in the “ ” (OFF) position.
2. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.
OBKE12E1 8-29
Maintenance
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver Luggage compartment lamp NOTE
with a cloth over its tip into the notch of the E01005300439
l When installing the lens, align the tabs on
lens and pry gently to remove it. 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver the lens with the holes on the vehicle side.
with a cloth over its tip into the notch of the
lens and pry gently to remove the lens.

Door courtesy lamps
E01005400339
steps in reverse. 2. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder. 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal with a cloth over its tip into the edge of the
NOTE steps in reverse. lens, pry gently to remove the lens.
l When installing the lens, align the tab on the
lens with the hole on the vehicle side. Front
8-30 OBKE12E1
Maintenance
Rear Glove box lamp 2. Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.
E01006100232 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
1. Pull out the bulb. steps in reverse.

steps in reverse.
NOTE 2. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
l When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on
the lens with the notches on the vehicle side.
Vanity mirror lamps*
E01006200262
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
with a cloth over its tip into the notch of the
lens and pry gently to remove it.
OBKE12E1 8-31
OBKE12E1
Specifications
Vehicle labeling............................................................................9-02
Vehicle dimensions.......................................................................9-04
Vehicle performance.....................................................................9-06
Vehicle weight..............................................................................9-07
Engine specifications....................................................................9-10
Electrical system...........................................................................9-11
Tyres and wheels..........................................................................9-12
Fuel consumption.........................................................................9-13
Refill capacities............................................................................9-15
9
OBKE12E1
Specifications
Vehicle labeling Please use this number when ordering replacement

parts.
Vehicle identification number plate
E01100102886 (RHD vehicles only)
The vehicle identification number is stamped on
the plate riveted to the left front corner of the instru-
ment panel pad. It is visible from outside of the ve-
hicle through the windscreen.
1- Model code
1. Vehicle identification number 2- Engine model code
The vehicle identification number is stamped on 3- Transmission model code
the bulkhead as shown in the illustration. 4- Body colour code
5- Interior code
2. Vehicle information code plate 6- Option code
7- Exterior code Engine number
The vehicle information code plate is clipped as The engine number is stamped on the engine cylin-
shown in the illustration. der block as shown in the illustrations.
The plate shows model code, engine model, trans-
mission model and body colour code, etc.
3000 models
9
9-02 OBKE12E1
Specifications
3200 models
3800 models
9
OBKE12E1 9-03
Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
E01100202643
3-door models
5-door models
9
9-04 OBKE12E1
Specifications
Item 3-door models 5-door models

1 Front track 3000 models — 1,560 mm
3200 models, 3800 models 1,560 mm 1,570 mm
Without side protector moulding 1,845 mm —
2 Overall width
With side protector moulding 1,875 mm
3 Front overhang 765 mm
4 Wheel base 2,545 mm 2,780 mm
5 Rear overhang 1,075 mm 1,355 mm
6 Overall length 4,385 mm 4,900 mm
3000 models — 235 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 3200 models 210 mm, 225 mm*1
3800 models 235 mm
3000 models — 1,870 mm
3200 models 1,840 mm, 1,850 mm*1, 1,860 mm, 1,870 mm*1,
8 Without roof rails
1,860 mm*2 1,880 mm*2
3800 models 1,850 mm 1,870 mm
Overall height
3000 models — 1,900 mm
3200 models 1,870 mm, 1,880 mm*1, 1,890 mm, 1,900 mm*1,
9 With roof rails
1,890 mm*2 1,910 mm*2
3800 models 1,880 mm 1,900 mm
10 Rear track 3000 models — 1,560 mm
3200 models, 3800 models 1,560 mm 1,570 mm
Body 5.7 m 6.1 m
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.3 m 5.7 m
*1: Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
*2: Vehicles with only the front seats 9
OBKE12E1 9-05
Specifications
Vehicle performance
E01100302208
Item 3000 models 3200 models 3800 models

180 km/h (112 mph), 185 km/h
Maximum speed 175 km/h (109 mph) 200 km/h (124 mph)
(115 mph)*
Maximum climbing ability (in 1st
35°
gear)
*: Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
9
9-06 OBKE12E1
Specifications
Vehicle weight
E01100404971
3-door models
3200 models
Vehicles except for Russia, Ukraine and Ka- Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
Item 3800 models
zakhstan
M/T A/T M/T A/T
Without optional
2,085 kg 2,020 kg *1 2,085 kg 2,020 kg *2 2,100 kg 2,090 kg 2,005 kg
parts
Kerb weight
With full optional
2,190 kg 2,190 kg 2,200 kg 2,190 kg 2,090 kg
parts
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,665 kg, 2,765 kg*3 2,705 kg, 2,765 kg*3 2,530 kg, 2,630 kg*3
Maximum axle Front 1,250 kg
weight Rear 1,600 kg
Maximum towable With brake 2,800 kg, 3,000 kg*4 2,800 kg

weight Without brake 750 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 120 kg 115 kg
Maximum permissible mass of the cou- 34 kg
pling device*2
Maximum roof With roof rails 100 kg

load Without roof rails 100 kg, 80 kg*4
Seating capacity 5 persons, 2 persons*2
*1: Vehicles with only t2,020 kghe front seats
*2: Vehicles with only the front seats
*3: In case of trailer towing
*4: Vehicles with 265/60R18 size tyre
9
OBKE12E1 9-07
Specifications
NOTE
l Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
5-door models
3200 models
3000 models Vehicles except for Russia, Uk- Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine and
Item 3800 models
raine and Kazakhstan Kazakhstan
M/T A/T M/T A/T M/T A/T
Without optional 2,280 kg, 2,265 kg,
2,100 kg 2,110 kg 2,265 kg 2,255 kg 2,160 kg
parts 2,185 kg*1 2,170 kg*1
Kerb weight
With full optional 2,395 kg, 2,380 kg,
2,200 kg 2,210 kg 2,390 kg 2,380 kg 2,270 kg
parts 2,300 kg*1 2,285 kg*1
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,910 kg,
2,810 kg, 2,835 kg*2 3,030 kg, 3,130 kg*2
3,010 kg*2
Maximum axle Front 1,250 kg 1,330 kg 1,300 kg

weight Rear 1,650 kg, 1,765 kg*2 1,780 kg, 1,925 kg*2
Maximum towable With brake 1,800 kg 3,300 kg*3, 3,500 kg*4 3,300 kg
weight Without brake 750 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 75 kg 140 kg 135 kg
Maximum permissible mass of the cou- 34 kg
pling device*1
Maximum roof With roof rails 100 kg

load Without roof rails 100 kg*3, 80 kg*4
Seating capacity 7 persons, 2 persons*1
*1: Vehicles with only the front seats
*2: In case of trailer towing
*3: Vehicles with 265/65R17 size tyre
9 *4: Vehicles with 265/60R18 size tyre
9-08 OBKE12E1
Specifications
NOTE
l Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
9
OBKE12E1 9-09
Specifications
Engine specifications
E01100602575

Engine model 6G72 4M41 6G75
No. of cylinders 6-V (60 °) 4 in line 6-V (60 °)
Total displacement 2,972 cc 3,200 cc 3,828 cc
Bore 91.1 mm 98.5 mm 95.0 mm
Stroke 76.0 mm 105.0 mm 90.0 mm
Camshaft Single overhead Double overhead Single overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic injection Electronic injection Electronic injection
182 kW/6,000 r/min *1
Maximum output (EEC net) 131 kW/5,250 r/min 147 kW/3,800 r/min
184 kW/6,000 r/min *2
Maximum torque (EEC net) 261 Nm/4,000 r/min 441 Nm/2,000 r/min 329 Nm/2,750 r/min
*1: 3-door models
*2: 5-door models
9
9-10 OBKE12E1
Specifications
Electrical system
E01100802320

Voltage 12 V
Type (JIS) 75D23L, 80D26L* 80D26L 75D23L, 80D26L*
Battery
Capacity (5HR) 52 Ah, 55 Ah* 55 Ah 52 Ah, 55 Ah*
Alternator capacity 120 A 130 A 120 A
Spark plug type NGK DIFR6C11 — IFR6B-K
9
OBKE12E1 9-11
Specifications
Tyres and wheels

E01100902897
Tyre 265/65R17 112H, 265/65R17 112S 265/60R18 110H

Size 17x7 1/2J 18x7 1/2J
Wheel
Offset 46 mm
NOTE
l Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
9
9-12 OBKE12E1
Specifications
Fuel consumption
E01101100661
3-door models
Combined Urban conditions Extra-urban conditions
Model Fuel consumption Fuel consumption Fuel consumption
CO2 (g/km) CO2 (g/km) CO2 (g/km)
(L/100 km) (L/100 km) (L/100 km)
M/T*1 207 7.8 251 9.5 181 6.9
M/T*2 221 8.4 271 10.3 193 7.3
3200 models A/T*1 216 8.2 263 10.0 189 7.2
A/T*2 239 9.0 286 10.8 212 8.0
A/T*3 220 8.4 262 10.0 196 7.4
3800 models 322 13.4 420 17.6 267 11.2
*1: Vehicles except for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
*3: Vehicles with only the front seat
NOTE
l The values shown above apply to a vehicle on which optional equipment has not been fitted.
l The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.
The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incor-
porate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and
the standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.
9
OBKE12E1 9-13
Specifications
5-door models
Combined Urban conditions Extra-urban conditions
Model Fuel consumption Fuel consumption Fuel consumption
CO2 (g/km) CO2 (g/km) CO2 (g/km)
(L/100 km) (L/100 km) (L/100 km)
M/T 287 12.2 372 15.8 237 10.0
3000 models
A/T 288 12.2 375 15.9 237 10.0
M/T*1 213 8.1 254 9.6 189 7.2
M/T*2 221 8.4 271 10.3 193 7.3
3200 models A/T*1 224 8.5 267 10.1 199 7.5
A/T*2 239 9.0 286 10.8 212 8.0
A/T*3 228 8.6 266 10.1 206 7.8
3800 models 324 13.5 423 17.7 268 11.2
*1: Vehicles except for Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
*3: Vehicles with only the front seat
NOTE
l The values shown above apply to a vehicle on which optional equipment has not been fitted.
l The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.
The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incor-
porate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and
the standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.
9
9-14 OBKE12E1
Specifications
Refill capacities
E01101303752
LHD
3000 models 3200 models 3800 models
RHD
3200 models
9
OBKE12E1 9-15
Specifications
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

Oil pan 4.3 litres
3000 models Oil filter 0.3 litre
Oil cooler 0.3 litre
Oil pan 7.5 litres
1 Engine oil 3200 models Oil filter 1.0 litre Refer to page 8-04.
Oil cooler 1.3 litres
Oil pan 4.3 litres
3800 models Oil filter 0.3 litre
Oil cooler 0.3 litre
3000 models, 3800 models 9.7 litres DIA QUEEN ATF SP III
2 Automatic transmission fluid
3200 models*1 10.9 litres DIA QUEEN ATF-PA
3 Brake fluid As required
Brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4
4 Clutch fluid As required
Front 5.1 litres
5 Washer fluid —
Rear*2 1.4 litres
Genuine MITSUBISHI Power Steering Fluid or
6 Power steering fluid As required
ATF DEXRON III/DEXRON II
Engine coolant Without rear air conditioning 9.0 litres
DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT or equiv-
7 (Includes 0.65 litre in the re-
With rear air conditioning 10.5 litres alent
serve tank)
8 Manual transmission oil 3.2 litres Gear oil API classification GL-3 SAE 75W-85 or Gear
9 Transfer oil 2.8 litres oil API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-85
Front 1.15 litres
10 Differential oil Gear oil API classification GL-5 or higher SAE 80W
Rear 1.6 litres
*1:
9 *2:
3200 models do not have a dipstick.
Rear washer fluid container is located on the backdoor. (Refer to “Rear window washer fluid” on page 8-08.)
9-16 OBKE12E1
Specifications
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

Refrigerant Without rear air conditioning 530 - 570 g
11 HFC-134a
(air conditioning) With rear air conditioning 850 - 890 g
*1: 3200 models do not have a dipstick.
*2: Rear washer fluid container is located on the backdoor. (Refer to “Rear window washer fluid” on page 8-08.)
9
OBKE12E1 9-17
OBKE12E1
Alphabetical index
Battery 8-10 Plastic, vinyl leather, etc 7-02

A Charge warning display 3-10 Polishing 7-04
Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 6-02 Sunroof 7-05
Accessory (Installation) 04 Specification 9-11 Washing 7-03
Accessory socket 5-86 Bleeding the fuel system 6-06 Waxing 7-04
Active stability & traction control (ASTC) 4-41 Bluetooth® 2.0 interface 5-67 Clutch
Additional equipment 8-19 Bonnet 8-03 Fluid 8-09,9-15
Air conditioning Brake Coat hooks 5-97
Front automatic air conditioning 5-03 Anti-lock brake 4-39 Combination headlamps and dipper switch 3-31
Important operation tips for the air condition- Brake assist system 4-38 Convenient hook 5-96
ing 5-11 Braking 4-37 Coolant (engine) 8-06,9-15
Rear air conditioning 5-10 Fluid 8-08,9-15 Cruise control 4-45
Air purifier (with deodorizing function) 5-12 Parking brake 4-06 Cup holder 5-94
Airbag 2-33 Power brakes 4-37 Curtain airbag system 2-40
Antenna 5-66 Warning lamp 3-09
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 4-39 Bulb capacity 8-24 D
Warning lamp 4-40
Approach lamps 1-08 C Daytime dipper button 3-06
Armrest 2-08,2-10 Daytime running lamp 3-32
Ashtray 5-85 Card holder 5-84,5-93 Demister (rear window) 3-42
Audio Cargo loads 4-56 Diesel particulate filter (DPF) 4-15
Error codes 5-59 Catalytic converter 8-02 Diesel preheat indication lamp 3-08
Handling of compact discs 5-65 Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehi- Dimensions 9-04
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD au- cles 4-35 Dipper (High/Low beam change) 3-32
tochanger 5-26 Central door locks 1-07 Door ajar warning lamp 3-11
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD Centre console box 5-92 Door courtesy lamps 5-91,8-24
player 5-12 Centre information display 3-11 Replacement 8-30
Steering wheel remote control switch 5-57 Changing a fuse 8-22 Doors
Auto-cutout function 5-91 Charge warning display 3-10 Central door locks 1-07
Automatic headlamp levelling 3-34 Check engine warning lamp 3-10 Child-protection 1-08
Automatic transmission Child restraint 2-23 Lock and unlock 1-06
Fluid 9-15 Child-protection rear doors 1-08 Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-02
Selector lever operation 4-19 Cigarette lighter 5-86
Selector lever position 4-20 Cleaning E
Sports mode 4-21 Aluminium wheels 7-05
Chrome parts 7-05 Economical driving 4-02
B Exterior of your vehicle 7-03 Electric window control 1-15
Genuine leather 7-02 Switch 1-15
Backdoor 1-09 Interior of your vehicle 7-02 Timer function 1-16
OBKE12E1 1
Alphabetical index
Electrical system 9-11 Front turn-signal lamps Switch 3-31

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting sys- Bulb capacity 8-24 Heated mirror 4-11
tem) 1-03 Replacement 8-26 Heated seats 2-08
Emergency starting 6-02 Fuel consumption 9-13 High-beam indication lamp 3-08
Engine Fuel High-mounted stop lamp (bulb type)
Coolant 8-06,9-15 Filling the fuel tank 03 Replacement 8-28
MIVEC 4-14 Fuel filter indication lamp 3-08 High-mounted stop lamp
Number 9-02 Fuel gauge 3-05 Bulb capacity 8-24
Oil 8-04 Fuel selection 02 Hinges and latches lubrication 8-18
Overheating 6-04 Low fuel warning lamp 3-05 Horn switch 3-43
Specifications 9-10 Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal systems 05 I
information 06 Tank capacity 03
Water temperature gauge 3-05 Fuses 8-19 If the vehicle breaks down 6-02
Error codes 5-59 Fusible links 8-19 Ignition switch 4-12
Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-18 Indication lamps 3-08
G Inside rear-view mirror 4-08
F Inspection and maintenance following rough road
Gauges 3-02 operation 4-35
Fluid General maintenance 8-18 Installation of accessories 04
Automatic transmission fluid 9-15 General vehicle data 9-04 Installation position for warning triangle 5-98
Brake fluid 8-08,9-15 Genuine parts 05 Instruments 3-02
Clutch fluid 8-09,9-15 Glove box 5-92 Interior lamp switch 5-88
Engine coolant 8-06,9-15 Glove box lamp Interior lamps 5-87
Manual transmission fluid 9-15 Bulb capacity 8-24
Power steering fluid 8-10,9-15 Replacement 8-31 J
Washer fluid 8-07,9-15
Fog lamp switch 3-36 H Jack handle 6-09
Foot lamps and ceiling lamp 5-90 Jack
For cold and snowy weather 8-19 Handling of compact discs 5-65 Storage 6-07
Front automatic air conditioning 5-03 Hazard warning flasher switch 3-35 Jump starting (Emergency starting) 6-02
Front fog lamps Hazard warning indication lamps 3-08
Bulb capacity 8-24
Indication lamp 3-08
Head restraints 2-11 K
Headlamp levelling 3-33
Replacement 8-26 Headlamp washer switch 3-41 Keyless entry system 1-04
Switch 3-36 Headlamps Keys 1-02
Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication Bulb capacity 8-24
lamp 2-36 Headlamp flasher 3-32
Front seats 2-05 Replacement 8-25
2 OBKE12E1
Alphabetical index
Rear combination lamps

L O Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-27
Labeling 9-02 Odometer 3-02 Rear differential lock 4-29
Lamp monitor buzzer 3-32 Oil pressure warning lamp 3-10 Rear fog lamp
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout func- Oil Bulb capacity 8-24
tion 3-32 Differential oil 9-15 Indication lamp 3-08
Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust Engine oil 8-04 Replacement 8-28
gas) 8-18 Manual transmission oil 9-15 Switch 3-36
Licence plate lamps Transfer oil 9-15 Rear personal lamp
Bulb capacity 8-24 Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-18 Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-28 Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10 Replacement 8-29
Link System 5-67 Overheating 6-04 Rear personal lamps 5-89
Low fuel warning lamp 3-05 Rear shelf (3-door models) 5-95
Lubricants 9-15 P Rear side/quarter window 1-17
Rear turn-signal lamps
Luggage compartment lamp 5-89
Bulb capacity 8-24 Parking 4-07 Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-30 Parking brake 4-06 Replacement 8-27
Luggage floor box 5-93 Position lamps Rear window demister switch 3-42
Luggage hooks 5-97 Bulb capacity 8-24 Rear-view camera 4-52
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD au- Indication lamp 3-08 Rear-view mirror
tochanger 5-26 Replacement 8-25 Inside 4-08
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD play- Power brakes 4-37 Outside 4-10
er 5-12 Power steering Refill capacities 9-15
Fluid 8-10,9-15 Removal of water from the fuel filter 6-06
M System 4-41 Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-23
Reversing lamps
Precautions to observe when using wipers and wash-
Making a flat seat 2-18 ers 3-41 Bulb capacity 8-24
Making a luggage area 2-12 Pregnant women restraint 2-22 Replacement 8-27
Manual transmission 4-16 Puncture (Tyre changing) 6-09 Reversing sensor system 4-49
Oil 9-15 Roof carrier precaution 4-56
Room & map lamps 5-88
Mirror R Bulb capacity 8-24
Inside rear-view mirror 4-08
Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10 Replacement 8-29
Radio
MIVEC engine 4-14 Running-in recommendations 4-04
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD au-
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel sys- tochanger 5-26
tems 05 LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD S
player 5-12
Rear air conditioning 5-10 Safe driving techniques 4-03
OBKE12E1 3
Alphabetical index
Seat belt 2-20 Replacement 8-27 Snow tyres 8-15

Adjustable seat belt anchor 2-21 Storage spaces 5-91 Spare wheel information 6-09
Child restraint 2-23 Sun visors 5-84 Tyre chains 8-15
Force limiter system 2-23 Sunglasses holder 5-94
Inspection 2-33 Sunroof 1-17 U
Pregnant women restraint 2-22 Lock switch 1-18
Pretensioner system 2-23 Safety mechanism 1-18 USB input terminal 5-82
Rear/second, third seat belt storage 2-22 Sunshade 1-19 Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal in-
Seat belt reminder/warning lamp 2-21 Super select 4WD II 4-24 formation 06
Seats Supplemental restraint system 2-33
Adjustment 2-05
Armrest 2-08,2-10
How the Supplemental Restraint System
works 2-34
V
Front seats 2-05 Servicing 2-43 Vanity mirror 5-84
Head restraints 2-11 Warning lamp 2-43 Vanity mirror lamps
Heated seats 2-08 Bulb capacity 8-24
Lumbar support 2-07 T Replacement 8-31
Making a flat seat 2-18 Vehicle care precautions 7-02
Making a luggage area 2-12 Tachometer 3-02 Vehicle dimensions 9-04
Rear seats 2-09 Tail lamps Vehicle identification number 9-02
Seat arrangement 2-03 Bulb capacity 8-24 Vehicle identification number plate 9-02
Second seats 2-09 Replacement 8-27 Vehicle information code plate 9-02
Third seat 2-11 Tank capacity 03 Vehicle labeling 9-02
Security alarm system 1-10 Third seat 2-11 Vehicle performance 9-06
Service precaution 8-02 Tools 6-07 Vehicle weight 9-07
Service reminder 3-02,3-03 Storage 6-07 Ventilators 5-02
Side airbag system 2-40 Towing 6-15
Side box 5-93
Snow tyres 8-15
Trailer towing 4-57
Transfer oil 9-15
W
Spark plug 9-11 Transmission Warning lamps 3-09
Specifications 9-02 Automatic transmission 4-19 Washer
Starting 4-14 Manual transmission 4-16 Fluid 8-07,9-15
Steering Tripmeter 3-02 Switch 3-37,3-41
Power steering fluid 8-10,9-15 Turn-signal indication lamps 3-08 Washing 7-03
Power steering system 4-41 Turn-signal lever 3-35 Water temperature gauge 3-05
Steering wheel height adjustment 4-08 Tyres 8-12 Waxing 7-04
Steering wheel lock 4-13 How to change a tyre 6-09 Weatherstripping 8-19
Steering wheel remote control switch 5-57 Inflation pressures 8-13 Weight 9-07
Stop lamps Rotation 8-14 Wheel condition 8-14
Bulb capacity 8-24 Size (tyre and wheel) 9-12 Wheel
4 OBKE12E1
Alphabetical index
Specification 9-12
Wiper de-icer switch 3-42
Wiper
Rear window 3-41
Switch 3-37
Wiper blades 8-17
OBKE12E1 5
6 OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1 7
8 OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1 9
10 OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1 11
12 OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1 13
14 OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1 15
16 OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1
OBKE12E1

Manual Mitsubishi Pajero Ioana

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mitsubishi Pajero Ioana

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Mitsubishi Pajero Ioana

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PAJERO

Locking and unlocking 1

Seat and seat belts 2

Instruments and controls 3

Starting and driving 4

For pleasant driving 5

Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

1. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for driver's seat) p. 2-33

1. Daytime dipper button (meter illumination control) p. 3-06

Instruments and Controls (Instrument panel)

1. Audio* p. 5-12, 5-26

1. Centre information display* p. 3-11

1. Electric window control p. 1-15

1. Sunroof switch* p. 1-17

1. Accessory socket p. 5-86

1. Engine compartment p. 9-15

1. Rear fog lamp p. 3-36, 8-24, 8-28

Fuel selection CAUTION l In petrol-powered vehicles, repeatedly driv-

E10 type petrol Filling the fuel tank Refueling

Fuel tank capacity

3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turn-

5. When the gun stops automatically, do not fill

Even when such parts are officially authorized, for

Used engine oils safety Disposal information for used

Electronic immobilizer (Anti- • When the key contacts or is close to other

Keyless entry system* NOTE To extend

Procedure for replacing the remote

3. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, in-

7. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.

10. Check the keyless entry system to see that it

Pull the inside door handle towards you to open

To lock without using the key

Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,

Driver’s door with key (except for ve-

“Child-protection” rear doors (5- Approach lamps* NOTE

(Since the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” NOTE

To deactivate the vehicle inclination detection

NOTE l If the UNLOCK switch is pressed and no NOTE

2. The alarm will resume if unlawful actions

Electric window control WARNING

1- Driver’s door window Passenger’s switches

To unlock, press it once again. NOTE

Rear side/quarter window To close Sunroof*

To close, press the switch (2).

To tilt up, press the switch (1).

NOTE NOTE NOTE

l Release the switch as soon as the sunroof rea- Sunshade To close

1- Front seats l To get in and out of the third seat (5-door

3-door models 5-door models

Flat seat (Except for 3-door models equipped with

3-door models 5-door models

Folding the rear seatbacks forward (3-door models) /

2 Folding the rear seats (3-door models) / Folding the

How to stow large articles

Storage of the third seat ® p. 2-14 —

Removing the third seat ® p. 2-16 —

Seat adjustment CAUTION Front seats

Power type To recline the seatback Power type

1- Adjustment forward 1- To move to forward direction

l The reclining mechanism of the seatback